100% found this document useful (1 vote)

318 views

16-Bit MCU & DSC Programmer's Reference Manual

Manual de referencia para los PIC microcontroladores/procesadores de señal de 16 bits.

Uploaded by

Jaime Barragan

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

318 views

16-Bit MCU & DSC Programmer's Reference Manual

Manual de referencia para los PIC microcontroladores/procesadores de señal de 16 bits.

Uploaded by

Jaime Barragan

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 460

16-bit MCU and DSC

Programmers Reference Manual

High-Performance Microcontrollers (MCU)
and Digital Signal Controllers (DSC)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E

Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices:

Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet.

Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the
intended manner and under normal conditions.

There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our
knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchips Data
Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property.

Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code.

Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not
mean that we are guaranteeing the product as unbreakable.

Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our
products. Attempts to break Microchips code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts
allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act.

Information contained in this publication regarding device

applications and the like is provided only for your convenience
and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to
ensure that your application meets with your specifications.
MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION,
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability
arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip
devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at
the buyers risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and
hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims,
suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are
conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip
intellectual property rights.

Trademarks
The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, dsPIC,
KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART,
PIC32 logo, rfPIC and UNI/O are registered trademarks of
Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other
countries.
FilterLab, Hampshire, HI-TECH C, Linear Active Thermistor,
MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL and The Embedded Control
Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip
Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A.
Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard,
dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN,
ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, HI-TIDE, In-Circuit Serial
Programming, ICSP, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified
logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, mTouch, Octopus, Omniscient Code
Generation, PICC, PICC-18, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit,
PICtail, REAL ICE, rfLAB, Select Mode, Total Endurance,
TSHARC, UniWinDriver, WiperLock and ZENA are
trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated
in the U.S.A.
All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their
respective companies.
2010, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the
U.S.A., All Rights Reserved.
Printed on recycled paper.
ISBN: 978-1-60932-029-4
Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide
headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and
Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California
and India. The Companys quality system processes and procedures
are for its PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs, KEELOQ code hopping
devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and
analog products. In addition, Microchips quality system for the design
and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified.

DS70157E-page 2

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Table of Contents
PAGE

SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Manual Objective ................................................................................................................................................ 6
Development Support ......................................................................................................................................... 6
Style and Symbol Conventions ........................................................................................................................... 7
Instruction Set Symbols ...................................................................................................................................... 8

SECTION 2. PROGRAMMERS MODEL

16-bit MCU and DSC Core Architecture Overview ............................................................................................ 10

Programmers Model ......................................................................................................................................... 13
Working Register Array ..................................................................................................................................... 17
Default Working Register (WREG) .................................................................................................................... 17
Software Stack Frame Pointer .......................................................................................................................... 18

SECTION 3. INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

SECTION 4. INSTRUCTION SET DETAILS

Data Addressing Modes .................................................................................................................................... 52

Program Addressing Modes .............................................................................................................................. 61
Instruction Stalls ................................................................................................................................................ 62
Byte Operations ................................................................................................................................................ 64
Word Move Operations ..................................................................................................................................... 66
Using 10-bit Literal Operands ........................................................................................................................... 69
Software Stack Pointer and Frame Pointer ....................................................................................................... 70
Conditional Branch Instructions ........................................................................................................................ 76
Z Status Bit ........................................................................................................................................................ 77
Assigned Working Register Usage .................................................................................................................... 78
DSP Data Formats (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices) ................................................................ 81
Accumulator Usage (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices) ............................................................... 83
Accumulator Access (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices) ............................................................. 84
DSP MAC Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices) .......................................................... 85
DSP Accumulator Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices) .............................................. 89
Scaling Data with the FBCL Instruction (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices) ................................ 90
Normalizing the Accumulator with the FBCL Instruction (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices) ....... 92

SECTION 5. INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTIONS

Instruction Symbols ........................................................................................................................................... 94

Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction .......................................................................................... 94
Instruction Description Example ........................................................................................................................ 99
Instruction Descriptions ................................................................................................................................... 100

SECTION 6. REFERENCE

441

Instruction Bit Map .......................................................................................................................................... 442

Instruction Set Summary Table ....................................................................................................................... 444
Revision History .............................................................................................................................................. 454

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 3

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SECTION 7. INDEX

456

SECTION 8. WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE

460

DS70157E-page 4

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

1
Introduction

Section 1. Introduction
HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following topics:
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 6
Manual Objective .............................................................................................................. 6
Development Support ....................................................................................................... 6
Style and Symbol Conventions ......................................................................................... 7
Instruction Set Symbols .................................................................................................... 8

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 5

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

1.1

INTRODUCTION
Microchip Technology focuses on products for the embedded control market. Microchip is a
leading supplier of the following devices and products:

8-bit General Purpose Microcontrollers (PIC MCUs)

16-bit Digital Signal Controllers (dsPIC DSCs)
16-bit and 32-bit Microcontrollers (MCUs)
Speciality and Standard Nonvolatile Memory Devices
Security Devices (KEELOQ Security ICs)
Application-specific Standard Products

Information about these devices and products, with corresponding technical documentation, is
available on the Microchip web site (www.microchip.com).

1.2

MANUAL OBJECTIVE
This manual is a software developers reference for the 16-bit MCU and DSC device families. It
describes the Instruction Set in detail and also provides general information to assist the
development of software for the 16-bit MCU and DSC device families.
This manual does not include detailed information about the core, peripherals, system integration
or device-specific information. The user should refer to the specific device family reference
manual for information about the core, peripherals and system integration. For device-specific
information, the user should refer to the individual data sheets. The information that can be found
in the data sheets includes:

Device memory map

Device pinout and packaging details
Device electrical specifications
List of peripherals included on the device

Code examples are given throughout this manual. These examples are valid for any device in
the 16-bit MCU and DSC families.

1.3

DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT
Microchip offers a wide range of development tools that allow users to efficiently develop and
debug application code. Microchips development tools can be broken down into four categories:

Code generation
Hardware/Software debug
Device programmer
Product evaluation boards

Information about the latest tools, product briefs and user guides can be obtained from the
Microchip web site (www.microchip.com) or from your local Microchip Sales Office.
Microchip offers other reference tools to speed the development cycle. These include:

Application Notes
Reference Designs
Microchip web site
Local Sales Offices with Field Application Support
Corporate Support Line

The Microchip web site also lists other sites that may be useful references.

DS70157E-page 6

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 1. Introduction
1.4

STYLE AND SYMBOL CONVENTIONS

Table 1-1:

Document Conventions

Symbol or Term

Description

set

To force a bit/register to a value of logic 1.

clear

To force a bit/register to a value of logic 0.

Reset

1.
2.

0xnnnn

Designates the number nnnn in the hexadecimal number system. These

conventions are used in the code examples. For example, 0x013F or
0xA800.

: (colon)

Used to specify a range or the concatenation of registers/bits/pins.

One example is ACCAU:ACCAH:ACCAL, which is the concatenation of
three registers to form the 40-bit Accumulator.
Concatenation order (left-right) usually specifies a positional relationship
(MSb to LSb, higher to lower).

Specifies bit locations in a particular register.

One example is SR<7:5> (or IPL<2:0>), which specifies the register and
associated bits or bit positions.

LSb, MSb

Indicates the Least Significant or Most Significant bit in a field.

To force a register/bit to its default state.

A condition in which the device places itself after a device Reset
occurs. Some bits will be forced to 0 (such as interrupt enable bits),
while others will be forced to 1 (such as the I/O data direction bits).

LSB, MSB

Indicates the Least/Most Significant Byte in a field of bits.

lsw, msw

Indicates the least/most significant word in a field of bits

Courier Font

Used for code examples, binary numbers and for Instruction Mnemonics
in the text.

Times New
Used for equations and variables.
Roman Font, Italic
Times New
Roman Font,
Bold Italic

Used in explanatory text for items called out from a figure, equation, or
example.

Note:

A Note presents information that we want to re-emphasize, either to help

you avoid a common pitfall, or make you aware of operating differences
between some device family members. In most instances, a Note is used
in a shaded box (as illustrated below); however, when referenced in a
table, a Note will appear at the bottom of the associated table (see
Table 1-2).
Note:

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

This is a Note in a shaded note box.

DS70157E-page 7

Introduction

Throughout this document, certain style and font format conventions are used. Table 1-1
provides a description of the conventions used in this document.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

1.5

INSTRUCTION SET SYMBOLS

The Summary Tables in Section 3.2 Instruction Set Overview and Section 6.2 Instruction
Set Summary Table, and the instruction descriptions in Section 5.4 Instruction
Descriptions utilize the symbols shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2:

Symbols Used in Instruction Summary Tables and Descriptions

Symbol(1)

Description

{ }

Optional field or operation

[text]
(text)

The location addressed by text

The contents of text

#text
The literal defined by text
a [b, c, d] a must be in the set of [b, c, d]
<n:m>
{label:}

Register bit field

Optional label name

Acc
AWB

Accumulator A or Accumulator B
Accumulator Write Back

bit4
Expr

4-bit wide bit position (0:7 in Byte mode, 0:15 in Word mode)
Absolute address, label or expression (resolved by the linker)

f
lit1

File register address

1-bit literal (0:1)

lit4
lit5

4-bit literal (0:15)

5-bit literal (0:31)

lit8
lit10

8-bit literal (0:255)

10-bit literal (0:255 in Byte mode, 0:1023 in Word mode)

lit14
lit16

14-bit literal (0:16383)

16-bit literal (0:65535)

lit23
Slit4

23-bit literal (0:8388607)

Signed 4-bit literal (-8:7)

Slit6
Slit10

Signed 6-bit literal (-32:31) (range is limited to -16:16)

Signed 10-bit literal (-512:511)

Slit16
TOS

Signed 16-bit literal (-32768:32767)

Top-of-Stack

Wb
Wd

Base working register

Destination working register (direct and indirect addressing)

Wm, Wn
Wm * Wm

Working register divide pair (dividend, divisor)

Working register multiplier pair (same source register)

Wm * Wn
Wn

Working register multiplier pair (different source registers)

Both source and destination working register (direct addressing)

Wnd
Wns

Destination working register (direct addressing)

Source working register (direct addressing)

WREG
Ws

Default working register (assigned to W0)

Source working register (direct and indirect addressing)

Wx
Wxd

Source Addressing mode and working register for X data bus prefetch
Destination working register for X data bus prefetch

Wy
Wyd

Source Addressing mode and working register for Y data bus prefetch
Destination working register for Y data bus prefetch

Note 1:

DS70157E-page 8

The range of each symbol is instruction dependent.

Refer to Section 5. Instruction Descriptions for the specific instruction range.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

HIGHLIGHTS

This section of the manual contains the following topics:

16-bit MCU and DSC Core Architecture Overview ......................................................... 10
Programmers Model....................................................................................................... 13
Working Register Array................................................................................................... 17
Default Working Register (WREG) ................................................................................. 17
Software Stack Frame Pointer ........................................................................................ 18

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 9

Programmers
Model

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

2.1

16-BIT MCU AND DSC CORE ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW

This section provides an overview of the 16-bit architecture features and capabilities for the
following families of devices:
16-bit Microcontrollers (MCU):
- PIC24F
- PIC24H
- PIC24E
16-bit Digital Signal Controllers (DSC):
- dsPIC30F
- dsPIC33F
- dsPIC33E

2.1.1

Features Specific to 16-bit MCU and DSC Core

The core of the 16-bit MCU and DSC devices is a 16-bit (data) modified Harvard architecture with
an enhanced instruction set. The core has a 24-bit instruction word, with an 8-bit Op code field.
The Program Counter (PC) is 23 bits wide and addresses up to 4M x 24 bits of user program
memory space. An instruction prefetch mechanism is used to help maintain throughput and
provides predictable execution. The majority of instructions execute in a single cycle.

2.1.1.1

REGISTERS

The 16-bit MCU and DSC devices have sixteen 16-bit working registers. Each of the working
registers can act as a data, address or offset register. The 16th working register (W15) operates
as a software Stack Pointer for interrupts and calls.

2.1.1.2

INSTRUCTION SET

The instruction set is almost identical for the 16-bit MCU and DSC architectures. The instruction
set includes many Addressing modes and was designed for optimum C compiler efficiency.

2.1.1.3

DATA SPACE ADDRESSING

The data space can be addressed as 32K words or 64 Kbytes. The upper 32 Kbytes of the data
space memory map can optionally be mapped into program space at any 16K program word
boundary, which is a feature known as Program Space Visibility (PSV). The program to data
space mapping feature lets any instruction access program space as if it were the data space,
which is useful for storing data coefficients.
Note:

2.1.1.4

Some devices families support Extended Data Space addressing. See the specific
device data sheet and family reference manual for more details on this feature.

ADDRESSING MODES

The core supports Inherent (no operand), Relative, Literal, Memory Direct, Register Direct,
Register Indirect, and Register Offset Addressing modes. Each instruction is associated with a
predefined Addressing mode group, depending upon its functional requirements. As many as
seven Addressing modes are supported for each instruction.
For most instructions, the CPU is capable of executing a data (or program data) memory read, a
working register (data) read, a data memory write and a program (instruction) memory read per
instruction cycle. As a result, 3-operand instructions can be supported, allowing A + B = C
operations to be executed in a single cycle.

DS70157E-page 10

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

2.1.1.5

ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT

A high-speed, 17-bit by 17-bit multiplier is included to significantly enhance the cores arithmetic
capability and throughput. The multiplier supports Signed, Unsigned, and Mixed modes, as well
as 16-bit by 16-bit, or 8-bit by 8-bit integer multiplication. All multiply instructions execute in a
single cycle.
The 16-bit Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) is enhanced with integer divide assist hardware that
supports an iterative non-restoring divide algorithm. It operates in conjunction with the REPEAT
instruction looping mechanism, and a selection of iterative divide instructions, to support 32-bit
(or 16-bit) divided by 16-bit integer signed and unsigned division. All divide operations require 19
cycles to complete, but are interruptible at any cycle boundary.

EXCEPTION PROCESSING

The 16-bit MCU and DSC devices have a vectored exception scheme with support for up to 8
sources of non-maskable traps and up to 246 interrupt sources. In both families, each interrupt
source can be assigned to one of seven priority levels.

2.1.2

PIC24E and dsPIC33E Features

In addition to the information provided in 2.1.1 Features Specific to 16-bit MCU and DSC
Core, this section describes the enhancements that are available in the PIC24E and dsPIC33E
families of devices.

2.1.2.1

DATA SPACE ADDRESSING

The Base Data Space address is used in conjunction with a read or write page register (DSRPAG
or DSWPAG) to form an Extended Data Space (EDS) address, which can also be used for PSV
access. The EDS can be addressed as 8 M words or 16 Mbytes. Refer to Section 3. Data
Memory (DS70595) in the dsPIC33E/PIC24E Family Reference Manual for more details on
EDS, PSV, and table accesses.
Note:

2.1.3

Some PIC24F devices also support Extended Data Space. Refer to Section 44.
CPU with EDS (DS39732) and Section 45. Data Memory with EDS
(DS39733) of the PIC24F Family Reference Manual for details.

dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Features

In addition to the information provided in 2.1.1 Features Specific to 16-bit MCU and DSC
Core, this section describes the DSP enhancements that are available in the dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E families of devices.

2.1.3.1

PROGRAMMING LOOP CONSTRUCTS

Overhead free program loop constructs are supported using the DO instruction, which is
interruptible.

2.1.3.2

DSP INSTRUCTION CLASS

The DSP class of instructions.are seamlessly integrated into the architecture and execute from
a single execution unit.

2.1.3.3

DATA SPACE ADDRESSING

The data space is split into two blocks, referred to as X and Y data memory. Each memory block
has its own independent Address Generation Unit (AGU). The MCU class of instructions operate
solely through the X memory AGU, which accesses the entire memory map as one linear data
space. The DSP dual source class of instructions operates through the X and Y AGUs, which
splits the data address space into two parts. The X and Y data space boundary is arbitrary and
device-specific.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 11

Programmers
Model

2.1.1.6

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

2.1.3.4

MODULO AND BIT-REVERSED ADDRESSING

Overhead-free circular buffers (modulo addressing) are supported in both X and Y address
spaces. The modulo addressing removes the software boundary checking overhead for DSP
algorithms. Furthermore, the X AGU circular addressing can be used with any of the MCU class
of instructions. The X AGU also supports bit-reverse addressing, to greatly simplify input or
output data reordering for radix-2 FFT algorithms.

2.1.3.5

DSP ENGINE

The DSP engine features a high-speed, 17-bit by 17-bit multiplier, a 40-bit ALU, two 40-bit
saturating accumulators and a 40-bit bidirectional barrel shifter. The barrel shifter is capable of
shifting a 40-bit value, up to 16 bits right, or up to 16 bits left, in a single cycle. The DSP
instructions operate seamlessly with all other instructions and have been designed for optimal
real-time performance. The MAC instruction and other associated instructions can concurrently
fetch two data operands from memory while multiplying two working registers. This requires that
the data space be split for these instructions and linear for all others. This is achieved in a
transparent and flexible manner through dedicating certain working registers to each address
space.

2.1.3.6

EXCEPTION PROCESSING

The dsPIC30F devices have a vectored exception scheme with support for up to 8 sources of
non-maskable traps and up to 54 interrupt sources. The dsPIC33F and dsPIC33E have a similar
exception scheme, but support up to 118, and up to 246 interrupt sources, respectively. In all
three families, each interrupt source can be assigned to one of seven priority levels.

DS70157E-page 12

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

2.2

PROGRAMMERS MODEL
Figure 2-1 through Figure show the programmers model diagrams for the 16-bit MCU and DSC
families of devices.

Figure 2-1:

PIC24F and PIC24H Programmers Model Diagram

PUSH.S
Shadow
Register

0
W0/WREG

DIV and MUL

Result Registers

Legend

W4
W5
W6
W7

Working Registers

W8
W9
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14/Frame Pointer
W15/Stack Pointer

Stack Pointer Limit Register

SPLIM
0

0
7

0
TABPAG
TBLPAG

Program Space Visibility Page Address

0
REPEAT Loop Counter

RCOUNT
15

0
CORCON

Data Table Page Address

0
PSVPAG
PSVPAG

Program Counter

IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA

CPU Core Control Register

C
Status Register

SRH

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

SRL

DS70157E-page 13

Programmers
Model

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Figure 2-2:

PIC24E Programmers Model Diagram

PUSH.S and
POP.S Shadow
Registers

0
W0/WREG

DIV and MUL

Result Registers

Legend

W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7

Working Registers

W8
W9
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14/Frame Pointer
W15/Stack Pointer

Stack Pointer Limit Register

SPLIM
0

0
7

0
TABPAG
TBLPAG

Data Space Read Page Address

0
Data Space Write Page Address

PSVPAG
DSWPAG
15

0
REPEAT Loop Counter

RCOUNT
15

0
CORCON

Data Table Page Address

0
PSVPAG
DSRPAG

Program Counter

IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA

CPU Core Control Register

C
Status Register

SRH

DS70157E-page 14

SRL

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

Figure 2-3:

dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F Programmers Model Diagram

PUSH.S
Shadow
Register

0
W0/WREG

DIV and MUL

Result Registers

DO Shadow
Register

W2
W3

Legend

W4
MAC Operand
Registers

W5
W6

Programmers
Model

Working Registers

W8
W9

MAC Address
Registers

W10
W11
W12
W13
W14/Frame Pointer
W15/Stack Pointer

Stack Pointer Limit Register

SPLIM
39

0
ACCA
ACCB

0
7

0
TABPAG
TBLPAG

0
REPEAT Loop Counter

RCOUNT
15

0
DCOUNT

24
DOSTART

DOEND

DO Loop Start Address

DO Loop End Address

0
CPU Core Control Register

CORCON

SB OAB SAB DA

DO Loop Counter

Data Table Page Address

Program Space Visibility Page Address

Program Counter

0
PSVPAG
PSVPAG

DSP
Accumulators

IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA

C
Status Register

SRH

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

SRL

DS70157E-page 15

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Figure 2-4:

dsPIC33E Programmers Model Diagram

PUSH.S and
POP.S Shadow
Registers

0
W0/WREG

DIV and MUL

Result Registers

Nested DO
Stack

W2
W3

Legend

W4
MAC Operand
Registers

W5
W6
W7

Working Registers

W8
W9

MAC Address
Registers

W10
W11
W12
W13
W14/Frame Pointer
W15/Stack Pointer

Stack Pointer Limit Register

SPLIM
39

0
ACCA
ACCB
0

Program Counter

0
7

0
Data Table Page Address

TABPAG
TBLPAG
9

0
X Data Space Read Page Address

PSVPAG
DSRPAG
8

0
X Data Space Write Page Address

PSVPAG
DSWPAG
15

0
REPEAT Loop Counter

RCOUNT
15

0
DCOUNT

24
DOSTART

DOEND

SB OAB SAB

DO Loop End Address

0
CPU Core Control Register

CORCON

DO Loop Start Address

DO Loop Counter

DSP
Accumulators

IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA

C
Status Register

SRH

DS70157E-page 16

SRL

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

All registers in the programmers model are memory mapped and can be manipulated directly by
the instruction set. A description of each register is provided in Table 2-1.
Note:

Unless otherwise specified, the Programmers Model Register Descriptions in

Table 2-1 apply to all MCU and DSC device families.

Table 2-1:

Programmers Model Register Descriptions

CPU Core Configuration register

23-bit Program Counter

PSVPAG(1)

Program Space Visibility Page Address register

DSRPAG(2)

Extended Data Space (EDS) Read Page register

(2)

DSWPAG

Extended Data Space (EDS) Write Page register

RCOUNT

Repeat Loop Count register

SPLIM

Stack Pointer Limit Value register

ALU and DSP Engine STATUS register

TBLPAG

Table Memory Page Address register

W0-W15

Working register array

ACCA, ACCB(3)

40-bit DSP Accumulators

DCOUNT(3)

DO Loop Count register

DOSTART(3)

DO Loop Start Address register

DOEND(3)

DO Loop End Address register

2:
3:

2
Programmers
Model

CORCON

Note 1:

2.3

Description

This register is only available on PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F

devices.
This register is only available on PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices.
This register is only available on dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.

WORKING REGISTER ARRAY

The 16 working (W) registers can function as data, address or offset registers. The function of a
W register is determined by the instruction that accesses it.
Byte instructions, which target the working register array, only affect the Least Significant Byte
(LSB) of the target register. Since the working registers are memory mapped, the Least and Most
Significant Bytes can be manipulated through byte-wide data memory space accesses.

2.4

DEFAULT WORKING REGISTER (WREG)

The instruction set can be divided into two instruction types: working register instructions and file
register instructions. The working register instructions use the working register array as data
values or as addresses that point to a memory location. In contrast, file register instructions
operate on a specific memory address contained in the instruction opcode.
File register instructions that also utilize a working register do not specify the working register that
is to be used for the instruction. Instead, a default working register (WREG) is used for these file
register instructions. Working register, W0, is assigned to be the WREG. The WREG assignment
is not programmable.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 17

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

2.5

SOFTWARE STACK FRAME POINTER

A frame is a user-defined section of memory in the stack, used by a function to allocate memory
for local variables. W14 has been assigned for use as a Stack Frame Pointer with the link (LNK)
and unlink (ULNK) instructions. However, if a Stack Frame Pointer and the LNK and ULNK
instructions are not used, W14 can be used by any instruction in the same manner as all other
W registers. On dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, a Stack Frame Active (SFA) Status bit is used
to support nested stack frames. See Section 4.7.2 Software Stack Frame Pointer for
detailed information about the Frame Pointer.

2.5.1

Software Stack Pointer

W15 serves as a dedicated Software Stack Pointer, and will be automatically modified by function
calls, exception processing and returns. However, W15 can be referenced by any instruction in
the same manner as all other W registers. This simplifies reading, writing and manipulating the
Stack Pointer. Refer to Section 4.7.1 Software Stack Pointer for detailed information about
the Stack Pointer.

2.5.2

Stack Pointer Limit Register (SPLIM)

The SPLIM is a 16-bit register associated with the Stack Pointer. It is used to prevent the Stack
Pointer from overflowing and accessing memory beyond the user allocated region of stack
memory. Refer to Section 4.7.3 Stack Pointer Overflow for detailed information about the
SPLIM.

2.5.3

Accumulator A and Accumulator B (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and

dsPIC33E Devices)

Accumulator A (ACCA) and Accumulator B (ACCB) are 40-bit wide registers, utilized by DSP
instructions to perform mathematical and shifting operations. Each accumulator is composed of
3 memory mapped registers:
AccxU (bits 39-32)
AccxH (bits 31-16)
AccxL (bits 15-0)
Refer to Section 4.12 Accumulator Usage (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)
for details on using ACCA and ACCB.

2.5.4

Program Counter

The Program Counter (PC) is 23 bits wide. Instructions are addressed in the 4M x 24-bit user
program memory space by PC<22:1>, where PC<0> is always set to 0 to maintain instruction
word alignment and provide compatibility with data space addressing. This means that during
normal instruction execution, the PC increments by 2.
Program memory located at 0x800000 and above is utilized for device configuration data, Unit ID
and Device ID. This region is not available for user code execution and the PC can not access
this area. However, one may access this region of memory using table instructions. For details
on accessing the configuration data, Unit ID, and Device ID, refer to the specific device family
reference manual.

2.5.5

TBLPAG Register

The TBLPAG register is used to hold the upper 8 bits of a program memory address during table
read and write operations. Table instructions are used to transfer data between program memory
space and data memory space. For details on accessing program memory with the table
instructions, refer to the family reference manual of the specific device.

DS70157E-page 18

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

2.5.6

PSVPAG Register (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F)

Program space visibility allows the user to map a 32-Kbyte section of the program memory space
into the upper 32 Kbytes of data address space. This feature allows transparent access of
constant data through instructions that operate on data memory. The PSVPAG register selects
the 32-Kbyte region of program memory space that is mapped to the data address space. For
details on program space visibility, refer to the specific device family reference manual.

2.5.7

RCOUNT Register

Note 1: If a REPEAT loop is executing and gets interrupted, RCOUNT may be cleared by
the Interrupt Service Routine to break out of the REPEAT loop when the foreground
code is re-entered.
2: Refer to the specific device family reference manual for complete details about
REPEAT loops.

2.5.8

DCOUNT Register (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)

The 14-bit DCOUNT register (16-bit for dsPIC33E devices) contains the loop counter for
hardware DO loops. When a DO instruction is executed, DCOUNT is loaded with the loop count
of the instruction, either lit14 for the DO #lit14,Expr instruction (lit15 for the DO
#lit15,Expr instruction for dsPIC33E devices) or the 14 LSb of the Ws register for the DO
Ws,Expr instruction (entire Wn for dsPIC33E devices). The DO loop will be executed DCOUNT
+ 1 times.
Note 1: In dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices, the DCOUNT register contains a shadow
register. See 2.5.13 Shadow Registers for information on shadow registers.
2: The dsPIC33E devices have a 4-level-deep, nested DO stack instead of a shadow
register.
3: Refer to the specific device family reference manual for complete details about DO
loops.

2.5.9

DOSTART Register (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E

Devices)

The DOSTART register contains the starting address for a hardware DO loop. When a DO
instruction is executed, DOSTART is loaded with the address of the instruction that follows the
DO instruction. This location in memory is the start of the DO loop. When looping is activated,
program execution continues with the instruction stored at the DOSTART address after the last
instruction in the DO loop is executed. This mechanism allows for zero overhead looping.
Note 1: For dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices, DOSTART has a shadow register. See
2.5.13 Shadow Registers for information on shadowing.
2: The dsPIC33E devices have a 4-level-deep, nested DO stack instead of a shadow
register.
3: Refer to the specific device family reference manual for complete details about DO
loops.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 19

2
Programmers
Model

The 14-bit RCOUNT register (16-bit for PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices) register contains the
loop counter for the REPEAT instruction. When a REPEAT instruction is executed, RCOUNT is
loaded with the repeat count of the instruction, either lit14 for the REPEAT #lit14 instruction
(lit15 for the REPEAT #lit15 instruction for PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices), or the 14 LSb
of the Wn register for the REPEAT Wn instruction (entire Wn for PIC24E and dsPIC33E
devices). The REPEAT loop will be executed RCOUNT + 1 time.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

2.5.10

DOEND Register (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)

The DOEND register contains the ending address for a hardware DO loop. When a DO instruction
is executed, DOEND is loaded with the address specified by the expression in the DO instruction.
This location in memory specifies the last instruction in the DO loop. When looping is activated
and the instruction stored at the DOEND address is executed, program execution will continue
from the DO loop start address (stored in the DOSTART register).
Note 1: For dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices, DOEND has a shadow register. See
2.5.13 Shadow Registers for information on shadow registers.
2: The dsPIC33E devices have a 4-level-deep, nested DO stack instead of a shadow
register.
3: Refer to the specific device family reference manual for complete details about DO
loops.

2.5.11

STATUS Register

The 16-bit STATUS register maintains status information for the instructions which have been
executed most recently. Operation Status bits exist for MCU operations, loop operations and
DSP operations. Additionally, the STATUS register contains the CPU Interrupt Priority Level bits,
IPL<2:0>, which are used for interrupt processing.
Depending on the MCU and DSC family, one of the following STATUS registers is used:
Register 2-1 for PIC24F, PIC24H, and PIC24E devices
Register 2-2 for dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices
Register 2-3 for dsPIC33E devices

2.5.11.1

MCU ALU STATUS BITS

The MCU operation Status bits are either affected or used by the majority of instructions in the
instruction set. Most of the logic, math, rotate/shift and bit instructions modify the MCU Status bits
after execution, and the conditional Branch instructions use the state of individual Status bits to
determine the flow of program execution. All conditional branch instructions are listed in Section
4.8 Conditional Branch Instructions.
The Carry (C), Zero (Z), Overflow (OV), Negative (N), and Digit Carry (DC) bits show the
immediate status of the MCU ALU by indicating whether an operation has resulted in a Carry,
Zero, Overflow, Negative result, or Digit Carry. When a subtract operation is performed, the C
flag is used as a Borrow flag.
The Z Status bit is useful for extended precision arithmetic. The Z Status bit functions like a
normal Z flag for all instructions except those that use a carry or borrow input (ADDC, CPB,
SUBB and SUBBR). See Section 4.9 Z Status Bit for more detailed information.
Note 1: All MCU bits are shadowed during execution of the PUSH.S instruction and they are
restored on execution of the POP.S instruction.
2: All MCU bits, except the DC flag (which is not in the SRL), are stacked during
exception processing (see Section 4.7.1 Software Stack Pointer).

2.5.11.2

LOOP STATUS BITS

The REPEAT Active (RA) bit is used to indicate when looping is active. The RA flag indicates that
a REPEAT instruction is being executed, and it is only affected by the REPEAT instructions. The
RA flag is set to 1 when the instruction being repeated begins execution, and it is cleared when
the instruction being repeated completes execution for the last time.
Since the RA flag is also read-only, it may not be directly cleared. However, if a REPEAT or its
target instruction is interrupted, the Interrupt Service Routine may clear the RA flag of the SRL,
which resides on the stack. This action will disable looping once program execution returns from
the Interrupt Service Routine, because the restored RA will be 0.

DS70157E-page 20

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

2.5.11.2.1 DO Active (DA) bit (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)
The DO Active (DA) bit is used to indicate when looping is active. The DO instructions affect the
DA flag, which indicates that a DO loop is active. The DA flag is set to 1 when the first instruction
of the DO loop is executed, and it is cleared when the last instruction of the loop completes final
execution.
The DA flag is read-only. This means that looping is not initiated by writing a 1 to DA, nor is it
terminated by writing a 0 to DA. If a DO loop must be terminated prematurely, the EDT bit,
CORCON<11>, should be used.

2.5.11.3

DSP ALU STATUS BITS (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)

The OA and OB bits are used to indicate when an operation has generated an overflow into the
guard bits (bits 32 through 39) of the respective accumulator. This condition can only occur when
the processor is in Super Saturation mode, or if saturation is disabled. It indicates that the
operation has generated a number which cannot be represented with the lower 31 bits of the
accumulator.
The SA and SB bits are used to indicate when an operation has generated an overflow out of the
MSb of the respective accumulator. The SA and SB bits are active, regardless of the Saturation
mode (Disabled, Normal or Super) and may be considered sticky. Namely, once the SA or SB
bit is set to 1, it can only be cleared manually by software, regardless of subsequent DSP
operations. When it is required, the BCLR instruction can be used to clear the SA or SB bit.
In addition, the SA and SB bits can be set by software in dsPIC33E devices, enabling efficient
context state switching.
For convenience, the OA and OB bits are logically ORed together to form the OAB flag, and the
SA and SB bits are logically ORed to form the SAB flag. These cumulative Status bits provide
efficient overflow and saturation checking when an algorithm is implemented. Instead of
interrogating the OA and the OB bits independently for arithmetic overflows, a single check of
OAB can be performed. Likewise, when checking for saturation, SAB may be examined instead
of checking both the SA and SB bits. Note that clearing the SAB flag will clear both the SA and
SB bits.

2.5.11.4

INTERRUPT PRIORITY LEVEL STATUS BITS

The three Interrupt Priority Level (IPL) bits of the SRL, SR<7:5>, and the IPL3 bit, CORCON<3>,
set the CPUs IPL which is used for exception processing. Exceptions consist of interrupts and
hardware traps. Interrupts have a user-defined priority level between 0 and 7, while traps have a
fixed priority level between 8 and 15. The fourth Interrupt Priority Level bit, IPL3, is a special IPL
bit that may only be read or cleared by the user. This bit is only set when a hardware trap is
activated and it is cleared after the trap is serviced.
The CPUs IPL identifies the lowest level exception which may interrupt the processor. The
interrupt level of a pending exception must always be greater than the CPUs IPL for the CPU to
process the exception. This means that if the IPL is 0, all exceptions at priority Level 1 and above
may interrupt the processor. If the IPL is 7, only hardware traps may interrupt the processor.
When an exception is serviced, the IPL is automatically set to the priority level of the exception
being serviced, which will disable all exceptions of equal and lower priority. However, since the
IPL field is read/write, one may modify the lower three bits of the IPL in an Interrupt Service
Routine to control which exceptions may preempt the exception processing. Since the SRL is

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 21

Programmers
Model

The high byte of the STATUS Register (SRH) is used by the DSP class of instructions, and it is
modified when data passes through one of the adders. The SRH provides status information
about overflow and saturation for both accumulators. The Saturate A, Saturate B, Overflow A and
Overflow B (SA, SB, OA, OB) bits provide individual accumulator status, while the Saturate AB
and Overflow AB (SAB, OAB) bits provide combined accumulator status. The SAB and OAB bits
provide an efficient method for the software developer to check the register for saturation or
overflow.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

stacked during exception processing, the original IPL is always restored after the exception is
serviced. If required, one may also prevent exceptions from nesting by setting the NSTDIS bit,
INTCON1<15>.
Note:

2.5.12

For more detailed information on exception processing, refer to the family reference
manual of the specific device.

Core Control Register

For all MCU and DSC devices, the 16-bit CPU Core Control register (CORCON), is used to set
the configuration of the CPU. This register provides the ability to map program space into data
space.
In addition to setting CPU modes, the CORCON register contains status information about the
IPL<3> Status bit, which indicates if a trap exception is being processed.
Depending on the MCU and DSC family, one of the following CORCON registers is used:

Register 2-4 for PIC24F and PIC24H devices

2.5.12.1

dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E SPECIFIC BITS

In addition to setting CPU modes, the following features are available through the CORCON
register:

Set the ACCA and ACCB saturation enable

Set the Data Space Write Saturation mode
Set the Accumulator Saturation and Rounding modes
Set the Multiplier mode for DSP operations
Terminate DO loops prematurely
Provide status information about the DO loop nesting level (DL<2:0>)
Select fixed or variable interrupt latency (dsPIC33E only)

2.5.12.2

PIC24E and dsPIC33E SPECIFIC BITS

A Status bit (SFA) is available that indicates whether the Stack Frame is active.
Note:

DS70157E-page 22

PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices do not have a PSV control bit.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

2.5.13

Shadow Registers

A shadow register is used as a temporary holding register and can transfer its contents to or from
the associated host register when instructed. Some of the registers in the programmers model
have a shadow register, which is utilized during the execution of a DO, POP.S, or PUSH.S
instruction. Shadow register usage is shown in Table 2-2.
Note:

The DO instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.

Table 2-2:

Automatic Shadow Register Usage

POP.S/PUSH.S

DCOUNT(1)

Yes

DOSTART(1)

Yes

DOEND(1)

Yes

STATUS Register DC, N, OV, Z and C bits

Yes

W0-W3

Yes

Note 1:

The DO shadow registers are only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.

For dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devicessince the DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND registers
are shadowedthe ability to nest DO loops without additional overhead is provided. Since all
shadow registers are one register deep, up to one level of DO loop nesting is possible. Further
nesting of DO loops is possible in software, with support provided by the DO Loop Nesting Level
Status bits (DL<2:0>) in the CORCON register (CORCON<10:8>).
Note:

2.5.14

All shadow registers are one register deep and not directly accessible. Additional
shadowing may be performed in software using the software stack.

DO Stack (dsPIC33E Devices)

The DO stack is used to preserve the following elements associated with a DO loop underway
when another DO loop is encountered (i.e., a nested DO loop).

DOSTART register value

DOEND register value
DCOUNT register value
First loop instruction
Second loop instruction; or second word of first loop instruction, if it is a 2-word instruction

Note that the DO level status field (DL<2:0>) also acts as a pointer to address the DO stack. After
the DO instruction is executed, the DO level status field (DL<2:0>) points to the next free entry.
The DOSTART, DOEND, and DCOUNT registers each have an associated hardware stack that
allows the DO loop hardware to support up to three levels of nesting. A conceptual representation
of the DO stack is shown in Figure 2-5.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 23

Programmers
Model

DO(1)

Location

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Figure 2-5:

DO Stack Conceptual Diagram

DL<2:0>

DOSTART

DOEND

DCOUNT

Odd Loop Op

Even Loop Op

000

Empty

001

Level 1 Registers

Level 1 Ops

010

Level 2 Registers

Level 2 Ops

011

Level 3 Registers

Level 3 Ops
Level 4 Ops

100

Note 1:

DS70157E-page 24

For DO register entries, DL<2:0> represents the value before the DO stack is executed.

For DO instruction buffer entries, DL<2:0> represents the value after the DO stack is executed.

If DL<2:0> = 0, no DO loops are active (DA = 0).

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

SR: CPU STATUS Register (PIC24H, PIC24F, and PIC24E Devices)

U-0

R/W-0

bit 15

bit 8

R/W-0

(1,2)

IPL1

IPL2

(1,2)

R/W-0
IPL0

(1,2)

R-0

R/W-0

bit 7

bit 0
U = Unimplemented bit, read as 0

R = Readable bit

W = Writable bit

C = Clearable bit

-n = Value at POR

1 = Bit is set

0 = Bit is cleared

x = Bit is unknown

bit 15-9

Unimplemented: Read as 0

bit 8

DC: MCU ALU Half Carry/Borrow bit

1 = A carry-out from the 4th low order bit (for byte-sized data) or 8th low order bit (for word-sized data
of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the 4th low order bit (for byte-sized data) or 8th low order bit (for word-sized data
of the result occurred

bit 7-5

IPL<2:0>: CPU Interrupt Priority Level Status bits(1,2)

111 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 (15). User interrupts disabled
110 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 6 (14)
101 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 5 (13)
100 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 4 (12)
011 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 3 (11)
010 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 2 (10)
001 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 1 (9)
000 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 0 (8)

bit 4

RA: REPEAT Loop Active bit

1 = REPEAT loop in progress
0 = REPEAT loop not in progress

bit 3

N: MCU ALU Negative bit

1 = Result was negative
0 = Result was non-negative (zero or positive)

bit 2

OV: MCU ALU Overflow bit

This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2s complement). It indicates an overflow of the magnitude that
causes the sign bit to change state.
1 = Overflow occurred for signed arithmetic (in this arithmetic operation)
0 = No overflow occurred

bit 1

Z: MCU ALU Zero bit

1 = An operation that affects the Z bit has set it at some time in the past
0 = The most recent operation that affects the Z bit has cleared it (i.e., a non-zero result)

bit 0

C: MCU ALU Carry/Borrow bit

1 = A carry-out from the MSb occurred
0 = No carry-out from the MSb occurred

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 25

Programmers
Model

Legend:

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SR: CPU STATUS Register (dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F Devices)

R-0
OA

R-0

R/C-0

(1,2)

R-0
OAB

R/C-0
(1,2,3)

SAB

R-0

R/W-0

(4)

bit 15

bit 8

R/W-0

R-0

R/W-0

(5)

IPL2

IPL1

IPL0

bit 7

bit 0

Legend:
R = Readable bit

W = Writable bit

C = Clearable bit

-n = Value at POR

1 = Bit is set

0 = Bit is cleared

x = Bit is unknown

bit 15

OA: Accumulator A Overflow bit

1 = Accumulator A overflowed
0 = Accumulator A has not overflowed

bit 14

OB: Accumulator B Overflow bit

1 = Accumulator B overflowed
0 = Accumulator B has not overflowed

bit 13

SA: Accumulator A Saturation bit(1, 2)

1 = Accumulator A is saturated or has been saturated since this bit was last cleared
0 = Accumulator A is not saturated

bit 12

SB: Accumulator B Saturation bit(1, 2)

1 = Accumulator B is saturated or has been saturated at since this bit was last cleared
0 = Accumulator B is not saturated

bit 11

OAB: OA || OB Combined Accumulator Overflow bit

1 = Accumulator A or B has overflowed
0 = Neither Accumulator A nor B has overflowed

bit 10

SAB: SA || SB Combined Accumulator bit(1, 2, 3)

1 = Accumulator A or B is saturated or has been saturated since this bit was last cleared
0 = Neither Accumulator A nor B is saturated

bit 9

DA: DO Loop Active bit(4)

1 = DO loop in progress
0 = DO loop not in progress

bit 8

DC: MCU ALU Half Carry bit

1 = A carry-out from the MSb of the lower nibble occurred
0 = No carry-out from the MSb of the lower nibble occurred

bit 7-5

IPL<2:0>: Interrupt Priority Level bits(5)

Note 1: This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.

2: Once this bit is set, it must be cleared manually by software.
3: Clearing this bit will clear SA and SB.
4: This bit is read-only.
5: The IPL<2:0> bits are concatenated with the IPL3 bit (CORCON<3>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority
Level. The value in parentheses indicates the IPL, if IPL3 = 1.

DS70157E-page 26

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

SR: CPU STATUS Register (dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F Devices) (Continued)

RA: REPEAT Loop Active bit
1 = REPEAT loop in progress
0 = REPEAT loop not in progress

bit 3

N: MCU ALU Negative bit

1 = The result of the operation was negative
0 = The result of the operation was not negative

bit 2

OV: MCU ALU Overflow bit

1 = Overflow occurred
0 = No overflow occurred

bit 1

Z: MCU ALU Zero bit

1 = The result of the operation was zero
0 = The result of the operation was not zero

bit 0

C: MCU ALU Carry/Borrow bit

1 = A carry-out from the MSb occurred
0 = No carry-out from the MSb occurred

2
Programmers
Model

bit 4

Note 1: This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 27

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SR: CPU STATUS Register (dsPIC33E Devices)

R/W-0

R/W-0
(3)

R/C-0

R -0

R/W-0

OAB

SAB

bit 15

bit 8

R/W-0

(1,2)

IPL1

IPL2

(1,2)

R/W-0
IPL0

(1,2)

R-0

R/W-0

bit 7

bit 0

Legend:

U = Unimplemented bit, read as 0

R = Readable bit

W = Writable bit

C = Clearable bit

-n = Value at POR

1 = Bit is set

0 = Bit is cleared

x = Bit is unknown

bit 15

OA: Accumulator A Overflow Status bit

1 = Accumulator A has overflowed
0 = Accumulator A has not overflowed

bit 14

OB: Accumulator B Overflow Status bit

1 = Accumulator B has overflowed
0 = Accumulator B has not overflowed

bit 13

SA: Accumulator A Saturation Status bit

1 = Accumulator A is saturated or has been saturated since this bit was last cleared
0 = Accumulator A is not saturated

bit 12

SB: Accumulator B Saturation Status bit

1 = Accumulator B is saturated or has been saturated since this bit was last cleared
0 = Accumulator B is not saturated

bit 11

OAB: OA || OB Combined Accumulator Overflow Status bit

1 = Accumulator A or B has overflowed
0 = Neither Accumulator A nor B has overflowed

bit 10

SAB: SA || SB Combined Accumulator Status bit

1 = Accumulator A or B is saturated or has been saturated since this bit was last cleared
0 = Neither Accumulator A nor B is saturated

bit 9

DA: DO Loop Active bit

1 = DO loop in progress
0 = DO loop not in progress

bit 8

DC: MCU ALU Half Carry/Borrow bit

Note 1: The IPL<2:0> bits are concatenated with the IPL3 bit (CORCON<3>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority
Level. The value in parentheses indicates the IPL, if IPL3 = 1. User interrupts are disabled when IPL3 = 1.
2: The IPL<2:0> Status bits are read only when NSTDIS = 1 (INTCON1<15>). Refer to the family reference
manual of the specific device family to see the associated interrupt register.
3: A data write to SR can modify the SA or SB bits by either a data write to SA and SB or by clearing the SAB
bit. To avoid a possible SA/SB bit write race-condition, the SA and SB bits should not be modified using
bit operations.

DS70157E-page 28

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

SR: CPU STATUS Register (dsPIC33E Devices) (Continued)

IPL<2:0>: CPU Interrupt Priority Level Status bits(1,2)
111 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 (15). User interrupts disabled
110 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 6 (14)
101 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 5 (13)
100 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 4 (12)
011 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 3 (11)
010 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 2 (10)
001 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 1 (9)
000 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 0 (8)

RA: REPEAT Loop Active bit

1 = REPEAT loop in progress
0 = REPEAT loop not in progress

bit 3

N: MCU ALU Negative bit

1 = Result was negative
0 = Result was non-negative (zero or positive)

bit 2

OV: MCU ALU Overflow bit

bit 1

Z: MCU ALU Zero bit

1 = The result of the operation was zero
0 = The result of the operation was not zero

bit 0

C: MCU ALU Carry/Borrow bit

1 = A carry-out from the MSb of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the MSb of the result occurred

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 29

Programmers
Model

bit 4

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CORCON: Core Control Register (PIC24F and PIC24H Devices)

U-0

bit 15

bit 8
U

R/C-0
IPL3

(1,2)

R/W-0

U-0

PSV

bit 7

bit 0

Legend:

C = Clearable bit

R = Readable bit

W = Writable bit

-n = Value at POR

1 = Bit is set

0 = Bit is cleared

x = Bit is unknown

U = Unimplemented bit, read as 0

bit 15-4

Unimplemented: Read as 0

bit 3

IPL3: Interrupt Priority Level 3 Status bit(1,2)

1 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 8 or greater (trap exception activated)
0 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 or less (no trap exception activated)

bit 2

PSV: Program Space Visibility in Data Space Enable bit

1 = Program space visible in data space
0 = Program space not visible in data space

bit 1-0

Unimplemented: Do not use

Note 1: This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.

2: This bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority Level.

DS70157E-page 30

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

CORCON: Core Control Register (PIC24E Devices)

R/W-0

U-0

VAR

bit 15

bit 8

U-0

R/C-0
(1,2)

IPL3

R-0

U-0

SFA

bit 7

bit 0

R = Readable bit

W = Writable bit

U = Unimplemented bit, read as 0

-n = Value at POR

1 = Bit is set

0 = Bit is cleared

x = Bit is unknown

bit 15

VAR: Variable Exception Processing Latency Control bit

1 = Variable (bounded deterministic) exception processing latency
0 = Fixed (fully deterministic) exception processing latency

bit 14-4

Unimplemented: Read as '0

bit 3

IPL3: CPU Interrupt Priority Level Status bit 3(1)

1 = CPU interrupt priority level is greater than 7
0 = CPU interrupt priority level is 7 or less

bit 2

SFA: Stack Frame Active Status bit

1 = Stack frame is active. W14 and W15 address 0x0000 to 0xFFFF, regardless of DSRPAG and DSWPAG values.
0 = Stack frame is not active. W14 and W15 address of EDS or Base Data Space

bit 1-0

Unimplemented: Read as '0

Note 1: This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.

2: The IPL3 bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU interrupt priority level.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 31

Programmers
Model

Legend:

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CORCON: Core Control Register (dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F Devices)

R/W-0

R(0)/W-0

EDT(1)

R-0

DL<2:0>(2,3)

bit 15

bit 8

R/W-0

SATA

SATB

R/W-1
SATDW

R/W-0
ACCSAT

R/C-0
IPL3

(4,5)

R/W-0

PSV

RND

bit 7

bit 0

Legend:

C = Clearable bit

R = Readable bit

W = Writable bit

-n = Value at POR

1 = Bit is set

0 = Bit is cleared

x = Bit is unknown

U = Unimplemented bit, read as 0

bit 15-13

Unimplemented: Do not use

bit 12

US: Unsigned or Signed Multiplier Mode Select bit

1 = Unsigned mode enabled for DSP multiply operations
0 = Signed mode enabled for DSP multiply operations

bit 11

EDT: Early DO Loop Termination Control bit(1)

1 = Terminate executing DO loop at end of current iteration
0 = No effect

bit 10-8

DL<2:0>: DO Loop Nesting Level Status bits(2, 3)

111 = DO looping is nested at 7 levels
110 = DO looping is nested at 6 levels
110 = DO looping is nested at 5 levels
110 = DO looping is nested at 4 levels
011 = DO looping is nested at 3 levels
010 = DO looping is nested at 2 levels
001 = DO looping is active, but not nested (just 1 level)
000 = DO looping is not active

bit 7

SATA: ACCA Saturation Enable bit

1 = Accumulator A saturation enabled
0 = Accumulator A saturation disabled

bit 6

SATB: ACCB Saturation Enable bit

1 = Accumulator B saturation enabled
0 = Accumulator B saturation disabled

bit 5

SATDW: Data Space Write from DSP Engine Saturation Enable bit
1 = Data space write saturation enabled
0 = Data space write saturation disabled

bit 4

ACCSAT: Accumulator Saturation Mode Select bit

1 = 9.31 saturation (Super Saturation)
0 = 1.31 saturation (Normal Saturation)

bit 3

IPL3: Interrupt Priority Level 3 Status bit(4, 5)

1 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 8 or greater (trap exception activated)
0 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 or less (no trap exception activated)

Note 1: This bit will always read 0.

2: DL<2:1> are read-only.
3: The first two levels of DO loop nesting are handled by hardware.
4: This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
5: This bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority Level.

DS70157E-page 32

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

CORCON: Core Control Register (dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F Devices) (Continued)

bit 2

PSV: Program Space Visibility in Data Space Enable bit

1 = Program space visible in data space
0 = Program space not visible in data space

bit 1

RND: Rounding Mode Select bit

1 = Biased (conventional) rounding enabled
0 = Unbiased (convergent) rounding enabled

bit 0

IF: Integer or Fractional Multiplier Mode Select bit

1 = Integer mode enabled for DSP multiply operations
0 = Fractional mode enabled for DSP multiply operations

2: DL<2:1> are read-only.

3: The first two levels of DO loop nesting are handled by hardware.
4: This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
5: This bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority Level.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 33

Programmers
Model

Note 1: This bit will always read 0.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CORCON: Core Control Register (dsPIC33E Devices)

R/W-0

U-0

VAR

R/W-0

US<1:0>

EDT

R-0

(1)

R-0

DL<2:0>

bit 15

bit 8

R/W-0

SATA

SATB

R/W-1
SATDW

R/W-0

R/C-0
(2,3)

ACCSAT

IPL3

R-0

R/W-0

SFA

RND

bit 7

bit 0

Legend:
R = Readable bit

W = Writable bit

U = Unimplemented bit, read as 0

-n = Value at POR

1 = Bit is set

0 = Bit is cleared

bit 15

x = Bit is unknown

VAR: Variable Exception Processing Latency Control bit

1 = Variable (bounded deterministic) exception processing latency
0 = Fixed (fully deterministic) exception processing latency

bit 14

Unimplemented: Read as '0

bit 13-12

US<1:0>: DSP Multiply Unsigned/Signed Control bits

11 = Reserved
10 = DSP engine multiplies are mixed-sign
01 = DSP engine multiplies are unsigned
00 = DSP engine multiplies are signed

bit 11

EDT: Early DO Loop Termination Control bit(1)

1 = Terminate executing DO loop at end of current loop iteration
0 = No effect

bit 10-8

DL<2:0>: DO Loop Nesting Level Status bits

111 = 7 DO loops active

001 = 1 DO loop active

000 = 0 DO loops active

bit 7

SATA: ACCA Saturation Enable bit

1 = Accumulator A saturation enabled
0 = Accumulator A saturation disabled

bit 6

SATB: ACCB Saturation Enable bit

1 = Accumulator B saturation enabled
0 = Accumulator B saturation disabled

bit 5

SATDW: Data Space Write from DSP Engine Saturation Enable bit
1 = Data space write saturation enabled
0 = Data space write saturation disabled

bit 4

ACCSAT: Accumulator Saturation Mode Select bit

1 = 9.31 saturation (super saturation)
0 = 1.31 saturation (normal saturation)

bit 3

IPL3: CPU Interrupt Priority Level Status bit 3(2)

1 = CPU interrupt priority level is greater than 7
0 = CPU interrupt priority level is 7 or less

Note 1: This bit always reads as 0.

2: This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.
3: The IPL3 bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU interrupt priority level.

DS70157E-page 34

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

CORCON: Core Control Register (dsPIC33E Devices) (Continued)

bit 2

SFA: Stack Frame Active Status bit

1 = Stack frame is active. W14 and W15 address 0x0000 to 0xFFFF, regardless of DSRPAG and DSWPAG values.
0 = Stack frame is not active. W14 and W15 address of EDS or Base Data Space

bit 1

RND: Rounding Mode Select bit

1 = Biased (conventional) rounding enabled
0 = Unbiased (convergent) rounding enabled

bit 0

IF: Integer or Fractional Multiplier Mode Select bit

1 = Integer mode enabled for DSP multiply
0 = Fractional mode enabled for DSP multiply

2: This bit may be read or cleared, but not set.

3: The IPL3 bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU interrupt priority level.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 35

Programmers
Model

Note 1: This bit always reads as 0.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

NOTES:

DS70157E-page 36

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
3.1
3.2
3.3

Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 38
Instruction Set Overview ................................................................................................. 38
Instruction Set Summary Tables ..................................................................................... 40

3
Instruction Set
Overview

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 37

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

3.1

INTRODUCTION
The 16-bit MCU and DSC instruction set provides a broad suite of instructions which supports
traditional microcontroller applications, and a class of instructions which supports math intensive
applications. Since almost all of the functionality of the 8-bit PIC MCU instruction set has been
maintained, this hybrid instruction set allows an easy 16-bit migration path for users already
familiar with the PIC microcontroller.

3.2

INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

Depending on the device family, the 16-bit MCU and DSC instruction set contains up to 84
instructions, which can be grouped into the functional categories shown in Table 3-1. Table 1-2
defines the symbols used in the instruction summary tables, Table 3-2 through Table 3-11. These
tables define the syntax, description, storage and execution requirements for each instruction.
Storage requirements are represented in 24-bit instruction words and execution requirements
are represented in instruction cycles.
Table 3-1:

Instruction Groups
Functional Group

Summary Table

Page Number

Move Instructions

Table 3-2

Math Instructions

Table 3-3

Logic Instructions

Table 3-4

Rotate/Shift Instructions

Table 3-5

Bit Instructions

Table 3-6

Compare/Skip and Compare/Branch Instructions

Table 3-7

Program Flow Instructions

Table 3-8

Shadow/Stack Instructions

Table 3-9

Control Instructions

Table 3-10

DSP Instructions(1)

Table 3-11

Note 1:

DSP instructions are only available in the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E
device families.

Most instructions have several different Addressing modes and execution flows, which require
different instruction variants. For instance, depending on the device family, there are up to six
unique ADD instructions and each instruction variant has its own instruction encoding. Instruction
format descriptions and specific instruction operation are provided in Section 5. Instruction
Descriptions. Additionally, a composite alphabetized instruction set table is provided in
Section 6. Reference.

DS70157E-page 38

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

3.2.1

Multi-Cycle Instructions

As the instruction summary tables show, most instructions execute in a single cycle, with the
following exceptions:
Note:

The DO and DIVF instructions are only available in the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and
dsPIC33E device families.

Instructions DO, MOV.D, POP.D, PUSH.D, TBLRDH, TBLRDL, TBLWTH and

TBLWTL require 2 cycles to execute.
Instructions DIV.S, DIV.U and DIVF are single-cycle instructions, which should be
executed 18 consecutive times as the target of a REPEAT instruction.
Instructions that change the program counter also require 2 cycles to execute, with the
extra cycle executed as a NOP. COMPARE-SKIP instructions, which skip over a 2-word
instruction, require 3 instruction cycles to execute, with 2 cycles executed as a NOP.
COMPARE_BRANCH instructions (dsPIC33E/PIC24E devices only) require 5 instruction
cycles to execute when the branch is taken.
The RETFIE, RETLW and RETURN are a special case of an instruction that changes the
program counter. These execute in 3 cycles, unless an exception is pending and then they
execute in 2 cycles.

2: All instructions may incur an additional delay on some device families, depending
on Flash memory access time. For example, PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices have
a 3-cycle Flash memory access time. However, instruction pipelining increases the
effective instruction execution throughput. Refer to Section 2. CPU of the
specific device family reference manual for details on instruction timing.
3: All read and read-modify-write operations (including bit operations) on non-CPU
Special Function Registers (e.g., I/O Port, peripheral control, or status registers;
interrupt flags, etc.) in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices require 2 instruction cycles
to execute.

3.2.2

Multi-Word Instructions

As defined by Table 3-2, almost all instructions consume one instruction word (24 bits), with the
exception of the CALL, DO and GOTO instructions, which are Program Flow Instructions, listed
in Table 3-8. These instructions require two words of memory because their opcodes embed
large literal operands.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 39

3
Instruction Set
Overview

Note 1: Instructions which access program memory as data, using Program Space Visibility
(PSV), will incur a one or two cycle delay for PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and
dsPIC33F devices, whereas using PSV in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices incurs a
4-cycle delay based on Flash memory access time. However, regardless of which
device is being used, when the target instruction of a REPEAT loop accesses program memory as data, only the first execution of the target instruction is subject to
the delay. See the specific device family reference manual for details.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

3.3

INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY TABLES

Table 3-2:

Move Instructions
Words

Cycles

Page
Number

Swap Wns and Wnd

247

282

Assembly Syntax
EXCH

Wns,Wnd
(1)

Description

MOV

f {,WREG}

Move f to destination

MOV

WREG,f

Move WREG to f

283

MOV

f,Wnd

Move f to Wnd

284

MOV

Wns,f

Move Wns to f

429

Note 1:
2:
3:

When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When
{,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.
The MOVPAG instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, these instructions require 3 additional cycles compared to dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H devices.

DS70157E-page 40

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

Table 3-3:

Math Instructions

Assembly Syntax

Description

Words

Cycles

Page
Number

ADD

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f + WREG

100

ADD

#lit10,Wn

Wn = lit10 + Wn

101

ADD

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb + lit5

102

ADD

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb + Ws

104

(1)

ADDC

f {,WREG}

Destination = f + WREG + (C)

109

ADDC

#lit10,Wn

Wn = lit10 + Wn + (C)

110

ADDC

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb + lit5 + (C)

111

ADDC

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb + Ws + (C)

113

DAW.B

Wn = decimal adjust Wn

222

DEC

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f 1

223

DEC

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws 1

224

DEC2

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f 2

226

DEC2

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws 2

227

DIV.S

Wm, Wn

Signed 16/16-bit integer divide

18(2)

229

DIV.SD

Wm, Wn

Signed 32/16-bit integer divide

18(2)

229

DIV.U

Wm, Wn

Unsigned 16/16-bit integer divide

18(2)

231
231

Wm, Wn

Unsigned 32/16-bit integer divide

DIVF

Wm, Wn

Signed 16/16-bit fractional divide

18(2)

233

INC

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f + 1

258

INC

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws + 1

259

(1)

INC2

f {,WREG}

Destination = f + 2

260

INC2

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws + 2

261

MUL

W3:W2 = f * WREG

323

MULW.SS

Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)

Wnd = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)

324

MULW.SU

Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)

Wnd = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)

326

MULW.SU

Wb,#lit5,Wnd(3) Wnd = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)

328

329

MULW.US
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:

Wb,Ws,Wnd

(3)

Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)

When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When
{,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.
The divide instructions must be preceded with a REPEAT #17 instruction, such that they are executed
18 consecutive times.
These instructions are only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
These instructions are only available in dsPIC33E devices.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 41

3
Instruction Set
Overview

DIV.UD

18(2)

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Table 3-3:

Math Instructions (Continued)

Assembly Syntax

Description

Words

Cycles

Page
Number

MULW.UU

Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)

Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)

331

MULW.UU

Wb,#lit5,Wnd(3)

Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)

332

Ws,Wnd

Wnd = signed-extended Ws

391

SUB

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f WREG

401

SUB

#lit10,Wn

Wn = Wn lit10

402

SUB

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb lit5

403

SUB

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb Ws

404

SUBB

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f WREG (C)

407

SUBB

#lit10,Wn

Wn = Wn lit10 (C)

408

SUBB

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb lit5 (C)

409

Wd = Wb Ws (C)

411

Destination = WREG f (C)

413

Wd = lit5 Wb (C)

414

SUBB

Wb,Ws,Wd
(1)

SUBBR

f {,WREG}

SUBBR

Wb,#lit5,Wd

SUBBR

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws Wb (C)

416

SUBR

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = WREG f

418

SUBR

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = lit5 Wb

419

SUBR

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws Wb

420

Ws,Wnd

Wnd = zero-extended Ws

439

ZE
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:

When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When
{,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.
The divide instructions must be preceded with a REPEAT #17 instruction, such that they are executed
18 consecutive times.
These instructions are only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
These instructions are only available in dsPIC33E devices.

DS70157E-page 42

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

Table 3-4:

Logic Instructions

Assembly Syntax

Description

Words

Cycles

Page
Number

AND

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f .AND. WREG

115

AND

#lit10,Wn

Wn = lit10 .AND. Wn

116

AND

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb .AND. lit5

117

AND

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb .AND. Ws

118

CLR

f = 0x0000

188

CLR

WREG

WREG = 0x0000

188

CLR

Wd = 0x0000

189

COM

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f

193

COM

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws

194

IOR

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f .IOR. WREG

262

IOR

#lit10,Wn

Wn = lit10 .IOR. Wn

263

IOR

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb .IOR. lit5

264

IOR

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb .IOR. Ws

266

NEG

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f + 1

333

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws + 1

334

f = 0xFFFF

392

SETM

WREG

WREG = 0xFFFF

392

SETM

Wd = 0xFFFF

393

XOR

f {,WREG}(1)

Destination = f .XOR. WREG

433

XOR

#lit10,Wn

Wn = lit10 .XOR. Wn

434

XOR

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb .XOR. lit5

435

XOR

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb .XOR. Ws

437

Note 1:

When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When
{,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 43

3
Instruction Set
Overview

NEG
SETM

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Table 3-5:

Rotate/Shift Instructions

Assembly Syntax
(1)

Description

Words

Cycles

Page #

ASR

f {,WREG}

Destination = arithmetic right shift f

120

ASR

Ws,Wd

Wd = arithmetic right shift Ws

122

ASR

Wb,#lit4,Wnd

Wnd = arithmetic right shift Wb by lit4

124

ASR

Wb,Wns,Wnd

Wnd = arithmetic right shift Wb by Wns

125

(1)

LSR

f {,WREG}

RLC

Ws,Wd

RLNC

f {,WREG}

RLNC

Ws,Wd

Wb,#lit4,Wnd

Wnd = left shift Wb by lit4

399

Wb,Wns,Wnd

Wnd = left shift Wb by Wns

400

Note 1:

When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When
{,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.

DS70157E-page 44

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

Table 3-6:

Bit Instructions

Assembly Syntax

Description

Words

Cycles

Page
Number

127

f,#bit4

Bit clear f

BCLR

Ws,#bit4

Bit clear Ws

128

BSET

f,#bit4

Bit set f

156

BSET

Ws,#bit4

Bit set Ws

157

BSW.C

Ws,Wb

Write C bit to Ws<Wb>

159

BSW.Z

Ws,Wb

Write Z bit to Ws<Wb>

159

BTG

f,#bit4

Bit toggle f

161

BTG

Ws,#bit4

Bit toggle Ws

162

BTST

f,#bit4

Bit test f

171

BTST.C

Ws,#bit4

Bit test Ws to C

252

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 45

3
Instruction Set
Overview

BCLR

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Table 3-7:

Compare/Skip and Compare/Branch Instructions

Assembly Syntax

Description

Words

Cycles(1)

Page
Number

BTSC

f,#bit4

Bit test f, skip if clear

1 (2 or 3)

164

BTSC

Ws,#bit4

Bit test Ws, skip if clear

1 (2 or 3)

166

BTSS

f,#bit4

Bit test f, skip if set

1 (2 or 3)

168

BTSS

Ws,#bit4

Bit test Ws, skip if set

1 (2 or 3)

169

Compare (f WREG)

196

Wb,#lit5(2)

Compare (Wb lit5)

197

Wb,#lit8(3)

Compare (Wb lit8)

198

Wb,Ws

Compare (Wb Ws)

199

CP0

Compare (f 0x0000)

200

CP0

Compare (Ws 0x0000)

201

CPB

Compare with Borrow (f WREG C)

202

Compare Wb with Wn, branch if =

CPBGT

Wb,Wn,Expr

(3)

Compare Wb with Wn, branch if >

CPBLT

Wb,Wn,Expr(3) Compare Wb with Wn, branch if <

CPBEQ

(3)

CPBNE

Wb,Wn,Expr

CPSEQ

Wb, Wn

Compare (Wb Wn), skip if =

1 (2 or 3)

213

CPSGT

Wb, Wn

Compare (Wb Wn), skip if >

1 (2 or 3)

217

CPSLT

Wb, Wn

Compare (Wb Wn), skip if <

1 (2 or 3)

218

CPSNE

Wb, Wn

Compare (Wb Wn), skip if

1 (2 or 3)

220

Note 1:
2:
3:
4:

Conditional skip instructions execute in 1 cycle if the skip is not taken, 2 cycles if the skip is taken over a
one-word instruction and 3 cycles if the skip is taken over a two-word instruction.
This instruction is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
Compare-branch instructions in dsPIC33E/PIC24E devices execute in 1 cycle if the branch is not taken and
5 cycles if the branch is taken.

DS70157E-page 46

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

Table 3-8:

Program Flow Instructions

Assembly Syntax
BRA

Expr

Description
Branch unconditionally

Words

Cycles

Page
Number

2(8)

130

(8)

132

BRA

Computed branch

BRA

C,Expr

Branch if Carry (no Borrow)

1 (2)(1,8)

134

(2)(1,8)

136

BRA

GE,Expr

Branch if greater than or equal

BRA

GEU,Expr

Branch if unsigned greater than or equal

1 (2)(1,8)

138

(1,8)

139

(2)(1,8)

140

(1,8)

BRA

GT,Expr

BRA

GTU,Expr

Branch if greater than

Branch if unsigned greater than

1 (2)
1

BRA

LE,Expr

Branch if less than or equal

1 (2)

141

BRA

OA,Expr

Branch if Accumulator A Overflow

1 (2)(1,8)

150

(1,8)

151

OB,Expr

Branch if Accumulator B Overflow

1 (2)

BRA

OV,Expr

Branch if Overflow

1 (2)(1,8)

152

(2)(1,8)

153

BRA

SA,Expr

Branch if Accumulator A Saturate

BRA

SB,Expr

Branch if Accumulator B Saturate

1 (2)(1,8)

154

(2)(1,8)

155

BRA

Z,Expr

Branch if Zero

CALL

Expr

Call subroutine

2(8)

179

(8)

183

CALL

Call indirect subroutine

CALL.L

Wn(4)

Call indirect subroutine (long address)

187

#lit14,Expr(6

Do code through PC + Expr, (lit14 + 1) times

235

#lit15,Expr(7

Do code through PC + Expr, (lit15 + 1) times

237

Wn,Expr(3)

Do code through PC + Expr, (Wn + 1) times

239

(8)

254

)
)

GOTO

Expr

Go to address

GOTO

Go to address indirectly

2(8)

255

Go to indirect (long address)

257

Relative call

2(8)

348

2(8)

352

(4)

GOTO.L

RCALL

Expr

RCALL
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:

Computed call

Conditional branch instructions execute in 1 cycle if the branch is not taken, or 2 cycles if the branch is
taken.
RETURN instructions execute in 3 cycles, but if an exception is pending, they execute in 2 cycles.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
This instruction is only available in PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
This instruction is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, these instructions require 2 additional cycles (4 cycles overall) when
the branch is taken.
In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, these instructions require 3 additional cycles.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 47

3
Instruction Set
Overview

BRA

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Table 3-8:

Program Flow Instructions (Continued)

Assembly Syntax

Description

Words

Cycles

Page
Number

356

REPEAT

#lit14(5)

Repeat next instruction (lit14 + 1) times

REPEAT

(4)

#lit15

Repeat next instruction (lit15 + 1) times

358

REPEAT

Repeat next instruction (Wn + 1) times

360

Return from interrupt enable

3 (2)(2,9)

366

Return with lit10 in Wn

3 (2)(2,9)

368

(2,9)

372

RETFIE
RETLW

#lit10,Wn

Return from subroutine

RETURN
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:

3 (2)

DS70157E-page 48

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

Table 3-9:

Shadow/Stack Instructions

Assembly Syntax

Description

Words

Cycles

Page
Number

LNK

#lit14

Link Frame Pointer

270

POP

POP TOS to f

338

POP

POP TOS to Wd

339

POP.D

Wnd

Double POP from TOS to Wnd:Wnd + 1

340

POP shadow registers

341

PUSH f to TOS

342

PUSH

PUSH Ws to TOS

343

PUSH.D

Wns

PUSH double Wns:Wns + 1 to TOS

345

POP.S
PUSH

PUSH.S

PUSH shadow registers

346

ULNK

Unlink Frame Pointer

431

Words

Cycles

Page
Number

Table 3-10:

Control Instructions

Assembly Syntax

Description
Clear Watchdog Timer

192

Disable interrupts for (lit14 + 1) instruction cycles

228

NOP

No operation

336

NOPR

No operation

337

CLRWDT
DISI

#lit1

RESET
Table 3-11:

Enter Power-saving mode lit1

347

Software device Reset

364

Words

Cycles

Page
Number

DSP Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)

Assembly Syntax

Description

ADD

Acc

Add accumulators

106

ADD

Ws,#Slit4,Acc

16-bit signed add to Acc

107

CLR

Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB

Clear Acc

190

Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd

Euclidean distance
(no accumulate)

243

EDAC

Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd

Euclidean distance

245

LAC

Ws,#Slit4,Acc

Load Acc

268

MAC

Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB Multiply and accumulate

278

MAC

Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd

Square and accumulate

280

MOVSAC

Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB

Move Wx to Wxd and Wy to Wyd

296

MPY

Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd

Multiply Wn by Wm to Acc

298

MPY

Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd

Square to Acc

300

MPY.N

Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd

-(Multiply Wn by Wm) to Acc

302

MSC

Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB Multiply and subtract from Acc

304

NEG

Acc

Negate Acc

335

SAC

Acc,#Slit4,Wd

Store Acc

387

SAC.R

Acc,#Slit4,Wd

Store rounded Acc

389

SFTAC

Acc,#Slit6

Arithmetic shift Acc by Slit6

394

SFTAC

Acc,Wn

Arithmetic shift Acc by (Wn)

395

SUB

Acc

Subtract accumulators

406

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 49

3
Instruction Set
Overview

PWRSAV

#lit14

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

NOTES:

DS70157E-page 50

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17

Data Addressing Modes.................................................................................................. 52

Program Addressing Modes ........................................................................................... 61
Instruction Stalls.............................................................................................................. 62
Byte Operations .............................................................................................................. 64
Word Move Operations ................................................................................................... 66
Using 10-bit Literal Operands ......................................................................................... 69
Software Stack Pointer and Frame Pointer ..................................................................... 70
Conditional Branch Instructions ...................................................................................... 76
Z Status Bit...................................................................................................................... 77
Assigned Working Register Usage ................................................................................. 78
DSP Data Formats (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices) .............................. 81
Accumulator Usage (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices) ............................. 83
Accumulator Access (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)............................ 84
DSP MAC Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)......................... 85
DSP Accumulator Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)............. 89
Scaling Data with the FBCL Instruction (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)90
Normalizing the Accumulator with the FBCL Instruction (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and
dsPIC33E Devices)......................................................................................................... 92

4
Instruction Set
Details

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 51

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.1

DATA ADDRESSING MODES

The 16-bit MCU and DSC devices support three native Addressing modes for accessing data
memory, along with several forms of immediate addressing. Data accesses may be performed
using file register addressing, register direct or indirect addressing, and immediate addressing,
allow a fixed value to be used by the instruction.
File register addressing provides the ability to operate on data stored in the lower 8K of data
memory (Near RAM), and also move data between the working registers and the entire 64K data
space. Register direct addressing is used to access the 16 memory mapped working registers,
W0:W15. Register indirect addressing is used to efficiently operate on data stored in the entire
64K data space (and also Extended Data Space, in the case of dsPIC33E/PIC24E), using the
contents of the working registers as an effective address. Immediate addressing does not access
data memory, but provides the ability to use a constant value as an instruction operand. The
address range of each mode is summarized in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1:

16-bit MCU and DSC Addressing Modes

Addressing Mode
File Register

0x0000-0x1FFF (see Note)

0x0000-0x001F (working register array W0:W15)

0x0000-0xFFFF

Immediate

N/A (constant value)

Note:

4.1.1

Address Range

The address range for the File Register MOV is 0x0000-0xFFFE.

File Register Addressing

File register addressing is used by instructions which use a predetermined data address as an
operand for the instruction. The majority of instructions that support file register addressing
provide access to the lower 8 Kbytes of data memory, which is called the Near RAM. However,
the MOV instruction provides access to all 64 Kbytes of memory using file register addressing.
This allows the loading of the data from any location in data memory to any working register, and
storing the contents of any working register to any location in data memory. It should be noted
that file register addressing supports both byte and word accesses of data memory, with the
exception of the MOV instruction, which accesses all 64K of memory as words. Examples of file
register addressing are shown in Example 4-1.
Most instructions, which support file register addressing, perform an operation on the specified
file register and the default working register WREG (see Section 2.4 Default Working
Register (WREG)). If only one operand is supplied in the instruction, WREG is an implied
operand and the operation results are stored back to the file register. In these cases, the
instruction is effectively a read-modify-write instruction. However, when both the file register and
WREG are specified in the instruction, the operation results are stored in WREG and the
contents of the file register are unchanged. Sample instructions which show the interaction
between the file register and WREG are shown in Example 4-2.
Note:

DS70157E-page 52

Instructions which support file register addressing use f as an operand in the

instruction summary tables of Section 3. Instruction Set Overview.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

Example 4-1:
DEC

File Register Addressing

0x1000

; decrement data stored at 0x1000

Before Instruction:
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555

After Instruction:
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5554
MOV

0x27FE, W0

; move data stored at 0x27FE to W0

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
Data Memory 0x27FE = 0x1234

After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x27FE = 0x1234

Example 4-2:
AND

File Register Addressing and WREG

0x1000

; AND 0x1000 with WREG, store to 0x1000

Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x332C
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555

After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x332C
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1104
AND

0x1000, WREG

; AND 0x1000 with WREG, store to WREG

Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x332C
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555

After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x1104
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555

4.1.2

Register Direct Addressing

Another feature of register direct addressing is that it provides the ability for dynamic flow control.
Since variants of the DO and REPEAT instruction support register direct addressing, flexible
looping constructs may be generated using these instructions.
Note:

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Instructions which must use register direct addressing, use the symbols Wb, Wn,
Wns and Wnd in the summary tables of Section 3. Instruction Set Overview.
Commonly, register direct addressing may also be used when register indirect
addressing may be used. Instructions which use register indirect addressing, use
the symbols Wd and Ws in the summary tables of Section 3. Instruction Set
Overview.

DS70157E-page 53

Instruction Set
Details

Register direct addressing is used to access the contents of the 16 working registers (W0:W15).
The Register Direct Addressing mode is fully orthogonal, which allows any working register to be
specified for any instruction that uses register direct addressing, and it supports both byte and
word accesses. Instructions which employ register direct addressing use the contents of the
specified working register as data to execute the instruction, therefore this Addressing mode is
useful only when data already resides in the working register core. Sample instructions which
utilize register direct addressing are shown in Example 4-3.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 4-3:
EXCH

Register Direct Addressing

W2, W3

; Exchange W2 and W3

Before Instruction:
W2 = 0x3499
W3 = 0x003D

After Instruction:
W2 = 0x003D
W3 = 0x3499

IOR

#0x44, W0

; Inclusive-OR 0x44 and W0

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x9C2E

After Instruction:
W0 = 0x9C6E
SL

W6, W7, W8

; Shift left W6 by W7, and store to W8

Before Instruction:
W6 = 0x000C
W7 = 0x0008
W8 = 0x1234

After Instruction:
W6 = 0x000C
W7 = 0x0008
W8 = 0x0C00

4.1.3

Register Indirect Addressing

Register indirect addressing is used to access any location in data memory by treating the
contents of a working register as an Effective Address (EA) to data memory. Essentially, the
contents of the working register become a pointer to the location in data memory which is to be
accessed by the instruction.
This Addressing mode is powerful, because it also allows one to modify the contents of the
working register, either before or after the data access is made, by incrementing or decrementing
the EA. By modifying the EA in the same cycle that an operation is being performed, register
indirect addressing allows for the efficient processing of data that is stored sequentially in
memory. The modes of indirect addressing supported by the 16-bit MCU and DSC devices are
shown in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2:

Indirect Addressing Modes

Indirect Mode
No Modification

Syntax
[Wn]

Function
(Byte Instruction)
EA = [Wn]

Function
(Word Instruction)
EA = [Wn]

Description
The contents of Wn forms the EA.

Pre-Increment

[++Wn]

EA = [Wn + = 1]

EA = [Wn + = 2]

Wn is pre-incremented to form the EA.

Pre-Decrement

[--Wn]

EA = [Wn = 1]

EA = [Wn = 2]

Wn is pre-decremented to form the EA.

Post-Increment

[Wn++]

EA = [Wn]+ = 1

EA = [Wn]+ = 2

The contents of Wn forms the EA, then

Wn is post-incremented.

EA = [Wn] = 1

EA = [Wn] = 2

The contents of Wn forms the EA, then

Wn is post-decremented.

EA = [Wn + Wb]

The sum of Wn and Wb forms the EA.

Wn and Wb are not modified.

Post-Decrement [Wn--]
Register Offset

DS70157E-page 54

[Wn+Wb] EA = [Wn + Wb]

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

Table 4-2 shows that four Addressing modes modify the EA used in the instruction, and this
allows the following updates to be made to the working register: post-increment, post-decrement,
pre-increment and pre-decrement. Since all EAs must be given as byte addresses, support is
provided for Word mode instructions by scaling the EA update by 2. Namely, in Word mode,
pre/post-decrements subtract 2 from the EA stored in the working register, and
pre/post-increments add 2 to the EA. This feature ensures that after an EA modification is made,
the EA will point to the next adjacent word in memory. Example 4-4 shows how indirect
addressing may be used to update the EA.
Table 4-2 also shows that the Register Offset mode addresses data which is offset from a base
EA stored in a working register. This mode uses the contents of a second working register to form
the EA by adding the two specified working registers. This mode does not scale for Word mode
instructions, but offers the complete offset range of 64 Kbytes. Note that neither of the working
registers used to form the EA are modified. Example 4-5 shows how register offset indirect
addressing may be used to access data memory.
Note:

The MOV with offset instructions (see pages 288 and 289) provides a literal addressing offset ability to be used with indirect addressing. In these instructions, the EA is
formed by adding the contents of a working register to a signed 10-bit literal.
Example 4-6 shows how these instructions may be used to move data to and from
the working register array.

Example 4-4:
MOV.B

Indirect Addressing with Effective Address Update

[W0++], [W13--]

; byte move [W0] to [W13]

; post-inc W0, post-dec W13

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x2300
W13 = 0x2708
Data Memory 0x2300 = 0x7783
Data Memory 0x2708 = 0x904E

After Instruction:
W0 = 0x2301
W13 = 0x2707
Data Memory 0x2300 = 0x7783
Data Memory 0x2708 = 0x9083
ADD

W1, [--W5], [++W8]

; pre-dec W5, pre-inc W8

; add W1 to [W5], store in [W8]

W1 =
W5 =
W8 =
Data
Data

Instruction Set
Details

Before Instruction:
0x0800
0x2200
0x2400
Memory 0x21FE = 0x7783
Memory 0x2402 = 0xAACC

After Instruction:
W1 =
W5 =
W8 =
Data
Data

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

0x0800
0x21FE
0x2402
Memory 0x21FE = 0x7783
Memory 0x2402 = 0x7F83

DS70157E-page 55

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 4-5:
MOV.B

Indirect Addressing with Register Offset

[W0+W1], [W7++]

; byte move [W0+W1] to W7, post-inc W7

Before Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
W7 =
Data
Data

0x2300
0x01FE
0x1000
Memory 0x24FE = 0x7783
Memory 0x1000 = 0x11DC

After Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
W7 =
Data
Data

0x2300
0x01FE
0x1001
Memory 0x24FE = 0x7783
Memory 0x1000 = 0x1183

LAC

[W0+W8], A

; load ACCA with [W0+W8]

; (sign-extend and zero-backfill)

Before Instruction:
W0 =
W8 =
ACCA
Data

0x2344
0x0008
= 0x00 7877 9321
Memory 0x234C = 0xE290

After Instruction:
W0 =
W8 =
ACCA
Data

0x2344
0x0008
= 0xFF E290 0000
Memory 0x234C = 0xE290

Example 4-6:
MOV

Move with Literal Offset Instructions

[W0+0x20], W1

; move [W0+0x20] to W1

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1200
W1 = 0x01FE
Data Memory 0x1220 = 0xFD27

After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1200
W1 = 0xFD27
Data Memory 0x1220 = 0xFD27
MOV

W4, [W8-0x300]

; move W4 to [W8-0x300]

Before Instruction:
W4 = 0x3411
W8 = 0x2944
Data Memory 0x2644 = 0xCB98

After Instruction:
W4 = 0x3411
W8 = 0x2944
Data Memory 0x2644 = 0x3411

DS70157E-page 56

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.1.3.1

REGISTER INDIRECT ADDRESSING AND THE INSTRUCTION SET

The Addressing modes presented in Table 4-2 demonstrate the Indirect Addressing mode
capability of the 16-bit MCU and DSC devices. Due to operation encoding and functional
considerations, not every instruction which supports indirect addressing supports all modes
shown in Table 4-2. The majority of instructions which use indirect addressing support the No
Modify, Pre-Increment, Pre-Decrement, Post-Increment and Post-Decrement Addressing
modes. The MOV instructions, and several accumulator-based DSP instructions (dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices only), are also capable of using the Register Offset
Addressing mode.
Note:

Instructions which use register indirect addressing use the operand symbols Wd
and Ws in the summary tables of Section 3. Instruction Set Overview.

4.1.3.2

DSP MAC INDIRECT ADDRESSING MODES (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, AND

dsPIC33E DEVICES)

A special class of Indirect Addressing modes is utilized by the DSP MAC instructions. As is
described later in 4.14 DSP MAC Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E
Devices), the DSP MAC class of instructions are capable of performing two fetches from
memory using effective addressing. Since DSP algorithms frequently demand a broader range
of address updates, the Addressing modes offered by the DSP MAC instructions provide greater
range in the size of the effective address update which may be made. Table 4-3 shows that both
X and Y prefetches support Post-Increment and Post-Decrement Addressing modes, with
updates of 2, 4 and 6 bytes. Since DSP instructions only execute in Word mode, no provisions
are made for odd sized EA updates.
Table 4-3:

DSP MAC Indirect Addressing Modes

Addressing Mode

X Memory

Y Memory

Indirect with no modification

EA = [Wx]

EA = [Wy]

Indirect with Post-Increment by 2

EA = [Wx] + = 2

EA = [Wy] + = 2

Indirect with Post-Increment by 4

EA = [Wx] + = 4

EA = [Wy] + = 4

Indirect with Post-Increment by 6

EA = [Wx] + = 6

EA = [Wy] + = 6

Indirect with Post-Decrement by 2

EA = [Wx] = 2

EA = [Wy] = 2

Indirect with Post-Decrement by 4

EA = [Wx] = 4

EA = [Wy] = 4

Indirect with Post-Decrement by 6

EA = [Wx] = 6

EA = [Wy] = 6

Indirect with Register Offset

EA = [W9 + W12]

EA = [W11 + W12]

4.1.3.3

As described in Section 4.14 DSP MAC Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and

dsPIC33E Devices), only W8 and W9 may be used to access X Memory, and only
W10 and W11 may be used to access Y Memory.

MODULO AND BIT-REVERSED ADDRESSING MODES (dsPIC30F,

dsPIC33F, AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)

The 16-bit DSC architecture provides support for two special Register Indirect Addressing
modes, which are commonly used to implement DSP algorithms. Modulo (or circular) addressing
provides an automated means to support circular data buffers in X and/or Y memory. Modulo
buffers remove the need for software to perform address boundary checks, which can improve
the performance of certain algorithms. Similarly, bit-reversed addressing allows one to access
the elements of a buffer in a nonlinear fashion. This Addressing mode simplifies data re-ordering
for radix-2 FFT algorithms and provides a significant reduction in FFT processing time.
Both of these Addressing modes are powerful features of the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and
dsPIC33E architectures, which can be exploited by any instruction that uses indirect addressing.
Refer to the specific device family reference manual for details on using modulo and bit-reversed
addressing.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 57

Instruction Set
Details

Note:

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.1.4

Immediate Addressing

In immediate addressing, the instruction encoding contains a predefined constant operand,

which is used by the instruction. This Addressing mode may be used independently, but it is more
frequently combined with the File Register, Direct and Indirect Addressing modes. The size of
the immediate operand which may be used varies with the instruction type. Constants of size
1-bit (#lit1), 4-bit (#bit4, #lit4 and #Slit4), 5-bit (#lit5), 6-bit (#Slit6), 8-bit (#lit8), 10-bit (#lit10
and #Slit10), 14-bit (#lit14) and 16-bit (#lit16) may be used. Constants may be signed or
unsigned and the symbols #Slit4, #Slit6 and #Slit10 designate a signed constant. All other
immediate constants are unsigned. Table 4-4 shows the usage of each immediate operand in the
instruction set.
Note:

Table 4-4:

The 6-bit (#Slit6) operand is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E
devices.
Immediate Operands in the Instruction Set

Operand

Instruction Usage

#lit1

PWRSAV

#bit4

BCLR, BSET, BTG, BTSC, BTSS, BTST, BTST.C, BTST.Z, BTSTS,

BTSTS.C, BTSTS.Z

#lit4

ASR, LSR, SL

#Slit4

ADD, LAC, SAC, SAC.R

#lit5

ADD, ADDC, AND, CP(5), CPB(5), IOR, MUL.SU, MUL.UU, SUB,

SUBB, SUBBR, SUBR, XOR

#Slit6(1)

SFTAC

#lit8

MOV.B, CP(4), CPB(4)

#lit10

ADD, ADDC, AND, CP, CPB, IOR, RETLW, SUB, SUBB, XOR

#Slit10

MOV

#lit14

DISI, DO(2), LNK, REPEAT(5)

#lit15

DO(3), REPEAT(4)

#lit16

MOV

Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

This operand or instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E

devices.
This operand or instruction is only available in dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices.
This operand or instruction is only available in dsPIC33E devices.
This operand or instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.
This operand or instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F, and
PIC24H devices.

The syntax for immediate addressing requires that the number sign (#) must immediately
precede the constant operand value. The # symbol indicates to the assembler that the quantity
is a constant. If an out-of-range constant is used with an instruction, the assembler will generate
an error. Several examples of immediate addressing are shown in Example 4-7.

DS70157E-page 58

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

Example 4-7:

Immediate Addressing

PWRSAV #1

; Enter IDLE mode

ADD.B

; Add 0x10 to W0 (byte mode)

#0x10, W0

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x12A9

After Instruction:
W0 = 0x12B9

XOR

W0, #1, [W1++]

; Exclusive-OR W0 and 0x1

; Store the result to [W1]
; Post-increment W1

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0xFFFF
W1 = 0x0890
Data Memory 0x0890 = 0x0032

After Instruction:
W0 = 0xFFFF
W1 = 0x0892
Data Memory 0x0890 = 0xFFFE

4.1.5

Data Addressing Mode Tree

The Data Addressing modes of the PIC24F, PIC24H, and PIC24E families are summarized in
Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1:

Data Addressing Mode Tree (PIC24F, PIC24H, and PIC24E)

Immediate
File Register
Data Addressing Modes

Direct
Indirect

No Modification
Pre-Increment

Pre-Decrement
Post-Increment

Literal Offset
Register Offset

The Data Addressing modes of the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E are summarized in
Figure 4-2.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 59

Instruction Set
Details

Post-Decrement

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Figure 4-2:

Data Addressing Mode Tree (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E)

Immediate
File Register
Basic
Direct
Indirect

No Modification
Pre-Increment
Pre-Decrement
Post-Increment
Post-Decrement
Literal Offset

Data Addressing Modes

DSP MAC

No Modification
Post-Increment (2, 4 and 6)
Indirect

Post-Decrement (2, 4 and 6)

DS70157E-page 60

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.2

PROGRAM ADDRESSING MODES

The 16-bit MCU and DSC devices have a 24-bit Program Counter (PC). The PC addresses the
24-bit wide program memory to fetch instructions for execution, and it may be loaded in several
ways. For byte compatibility with the table read and table write instructions, each instruction word
consumes two locations in program memory. This means that during serial execution, the PC is
loaded with PC + 2.
Several methods may be used to modify the PC in a non-sequential manner, and both absolute
and relative changes may be made to the PC. The change to the PC may be from an immediate
value encoded in the instruction, or a dynamic value contained in a working register. In dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices, when DO looping is active, the PC is loaded with the address
stored in the DOSTART register, after the instruction at the DOEND address is executed. For
exception handling, the PC is loaded with the address of the exception handler, which is stored
in the interrupt vector table. When required, the software stack is used to return scope to the
foreground process from where the change in program flow occurred.
Table 4-5 summarizes the instructions which modify the PC. When performing function calls, it is
recommended that RCALL be used instead of CALL, since RCALL only consumes 1 word of
program memory.

Table 4-5:

Methods of Modifying Program Flow

Condition/Instruction

PC Modification

Software Stack Usage

Sequential Execution

PC = PC + 2

None

BRA Expr(1)
(Branch Unconditionally)

RCALL Wn
(Computed Relative Call)

PC = PC + 2 * Wn

PC + 2 is PUSHed on the stack(2)

Exception Handling

PC = address of the exception handler PC + 2 is PUSHed on the stack(3)

(read from vector table)

PC = Target REPEAT instruction

(REPEAT Looping)

PC not modified (if REPEAT active)

None

PC = DOEND address(4)
(DO Looping)

PC = DOSTART (if DO active)

None

Wn(5)

2:
3:
4:
5:

For BRA, CALL and GOTO, the Expr may be a label, absolute address, or expression, which is resolved by
the linker to a 16-bit or 23-bit value (Slit16 or lit23). See Section 5. Instruction Descriptions for details.
After CALL or RCALL is executed, RETURN or RETLW will POP the Top-of-Stack (TOS) back into the PC.
After an exception is processed, RETFIE will POP the Top-of-Stack (TOS) back into the PC.
This condition/instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
This condition instruction is only available in dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 61

Instruction Set
Details

Note 1:

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.3

INSTRUCTION STALLS
In order to maximize the data space EA calculation and operand fetch time, the X data space
read and write accesses are partially pipelined. A consequence of this pipelining is that address
register data dependencies may arise between successive read and write operations using
common registers.
Read After Write (RAW) dependencies occur across instruction boundaries and are detected by
the hardware. An example of a RAW dependency would be a write operation that modifies W5,
followed by a read operation that uses W5 as an Address Pointer. The contents of W5 will not be
valid for the read operation until the earlier write completes. This problem is resolved by stalling
the instruction execution for one instruction cycle, which allows the write to complete before the
next read is started.

4.3.1

RAW Dependency Detection

During the instruction pre-decode, the core determines if any address register dependency is
imminent across an instruction boundary. The stall detection logic compares the W register
(if any) used for the destination EA of the instruction currently being executed with the W register
to be used by the source EA (if any) of the prefetched instruction. When a match between the
destination and source registers is identified, a set of rules are applied to decide whether or not
to stall the instruction by one cycle. Table 4-6 lists various RAW conditions which cause an
instruction execution stall.
Table 4-6:

Raw Dependency Rules (Detection By Hardware)

Destination
Address Mode Using Wn

Source Address Mode

Using Wn

Examples(2)
(Wn = W2)

Stall
Required?

Direct

No Stall

ADD.W
MOV.W

W0, W1, W2
W2, W3

Indirect

Direct

ADD.W
MOV.W

W0, W1, [W2](2)

[W2], W3(2)

Indirect

Indirect with pre/post-modification

DS70157E-page 62

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.3.2

Instruction Stalls and Exceptions

In order to maintain deterministic operation, instruction stalls are allowed to happen, even if they
occur immediately prior to exception processing.

4.3.3

Instruction Stalls and Instructions that Change Program Flow

CALL and RCALL write to the stack using W15 and may, therefore, be subject to an instruction
stall if the source read of the subsequent instruction uses W15.
GOTO, RETFIE and RETURN instructions are never subject to an instruction stall because they
do not perform write operations to the working registers.

4.3.4

Instruction Stalls and DO/REPEAT Loops

Instructions operating in a DO or REPEAT loop are subject to instruction stalls, just like any other
instruction. Stalls may occur on loop entry, loop exit and also during loop processing.
Note:

4.3.5

DO loops are only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.

Instruction Stalls and PSV

Instructions operating in PSV address space are subject to instruction stalls, just like any other
instruction. Should a data dependency be detected in the instruction immediately following the
PSV data access, the second cycle of the instruction will initiate a stall. Should a data
dependency be detected in the instruction immediately before the PSV data access, the last
cycle of the previous instruction will initiate a stall.
Note:

Refer to the specific device family reference manual for more detailed information
about RAW instruction stalls.

4
Instruction Set
Details

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 63

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.4

BYTE OPERATIONS
Since the data memory is byte addressable, most of the base instructions may operate in either
Byte mode or Word mode. When these instructions operate in Byte mode, the following rules
apply:
All direct working register references use the Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit working
register and leave the Most Significant Byte (MSB) unchanged
All indirect working register references use the data byte specified by the 16-bit address
stored in the working register
All file register references use the data byte specified by the byte address
The STATUS Register is updated to reflect the result of the byte operation
It should be noted that data addresses are always represented as byte addresses. Additionally,
the native data format is little-endian, which means that words are stored with the Least
Significant Byte at the lower address, and the Most Significant Byte at the adjacent, higher
address (as shown in Figure 4-3). Example 4-8 shows sample byte move operations and
Example 4-9 shows sample byte math operations.
Note:

Instructions that operate in Byte mode must use the .b or .B instruction

extension to specify a byte instruction. For example, the following two instructions
are valid forms of a byte clear operation:
CLR.b
CLR.B

Example 4-8:
MOV.B

W0
W0

Sample Byte Move Operations

#0x30, W0

; move the literal byte 0x30 to W0

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x5530
MOV.B

0x1000, W0

; move the byte at 0x1000 to W0

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234

After Instruction:
W0 = 0x5534
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
MOV.B

W0, 0x1001

; byte move W0 to address 0x1001

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555

After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x3455
MOV.B

W0, [W1++]

; byte move W0 to [W1], then post-inc W1

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
W1 = 0x1001
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555

After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
W1 = 0x1002
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x3455

DS70157E-page 64

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

Example 4-9:
CLR.B

Sample Byte Math Operations

[W6--]

; byte clear [W6], then post-dec W6

Before Instruction:
W6 = 0x1001
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555

After Instruction:
W6 = 0x1000
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x0055
SUB.B

W0, #0x10, W1

; byte subtract literal 0x10 from W0

; and store to W1

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
W1 = 0xFFFF
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
W1 = 0xFF24
ADD.B

W0, W1, [W2++]

; byte add W0 and W1, store to [W2]

; and post-inc W2

Before Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
W2 =
Data

0x1234
0x5678
0x1000
Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555

After Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
W2 =
Data

0x1234
0x5678
0x1001
Memory 0x1000 = 0x55AC

4
Instruction Set
Details

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 65

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.5

WORD MOVE OPERATIONS

Even though the data space is byte addressable, all move operations made in Word mode must
be word-aligned. This means that for all source and destination operands, the Least Significant
address bit must be 0. If a word move is made to or from an odd address, an address error
exception is generated. Likewise, all double words must be word-aligned. Figure 4-3 shows how
bytes and words may be aligned in data memory. Example 4-10 contains several legal word
move operations.
When an exception is generated due to a misaligned access, the exception is taken after the
instruction executes. If the illegal access occurs from a data read, the operation will be allowed
to complete, but the Least Significant bit of the source address will be cleared to force word
alignment. If the illegal access occurs during a data write, the write will be inhibited. Example 4-11
contains several illegal word move operations.
Figure 4-3:

Data Alignment in Memory

0x1001

0x1000

0x1003

0x1005

0x1004

0x1007

0x1006

0x1009

0x1008

0x100A

0x100B

0x1002

Legend:
b0 byte stored at 0x1000
b1 byte stored at 0x1003
b3:b2 word stored at 0x1005:1004 (b2 is LSB)
b7:b4 double word stored at 0x1009:0x1006 (b4 is LSB)
b8 byte stored at 0x100A
Note:

Instructions that operate in Word mode are not required to use an instruction
extension. However, they may be specified with an optional .w or .W extension,
if desired. For example, the following instructions are valid forms of a word clear
operation:
CLR
CLR.w
CLR.W

DS70157E-page 66

W0
W0
W0

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

Example 4-10:
MOV

Legal Word Move Operations

#0x30, W0

; move the literal word 0x30 to W0

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555

After Instruction:
W0 = 0x0030
MOV

0x1000, W0

; move the word at 0x1000 to W0

Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234

After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
MOV

[W0], [W1++]

; word move [W0] to [W1],

; then post-inc W1

Before Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
Data
Data

0x1234
0x1000
Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
Memory 0x1234 = 0xAAAA

After Instruction:
W0 =
W1 =
Data
Data

0x1234
0x1002
Memory 0x1000 = 0xAAAA
Memory 0x1234 = 0xAAAA

4
Instruction Set
Details

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 67

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 4-11:
MOV

Illegal Word Move Operations

10-bit Literal Coding

Literal Value

Word Mode
kk kkkk kkkk

Byte Mode
kkkk kkkk

00 0000 0000

0000 0000

00 0000 0001

0000 0001

00 0000 0010

0000 0010

127

00 0111 1111

0111 1111

128

00 1000 0000

1000 0000

255

00 1111 1111

1111 1111

256

01 0000 0000

N/A

512

10 0000 0000

N/A

1023

11 1111 1111

N/A

Example 4-12:
ADD.B
ADD.B
ADD.B
ADD.B
ADD.B
ADD.B
ADD.B

Note:

Using 10-bit Literals For Byte Operands

#0x80, W0
#0x380, W0
#0xFF, W0
#0x3FF, W0
#0xF, W0
#0x7F, W0
#0x100, W0

;
;
;
;
;
;
;

add 128 (or -128) to W0

ERROR... Illegal syntax for byte mode
add 255 (or -1) to W0
ERROR... Illegal syntax for byte mode
add 15 to W0
add 127 to W0
ERROR... Illegal syntax for byte mode

Using a literal value greater than 127 in Byte mode is functionally identical to using
the equivalent negative twos complement value, since the Most Significant bit of the
byte is set. When operating in Byte mode, the Assembler will accept either a positive
or negative literal value (i.e., #-10).

4
Instruction Set
Details

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 69

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.7

SOFTWARE STACK POINTER AND FRAME POINTER

4.7.1

Software Stack Pointer

The 16-bit MCU and DSC devices feature a software stack which facilitates function calls and
exception handling. W15 is the default Stack Pointer (SP) and after any Reset, it is initialized to
0x0800 (0x1000 for PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices). This ensures that the SP will point to valid
RAM and permits stack availability for exceptions, which may occur before the SP is set by the
user software. The user may reprogram the SP during initialization to any location within data
space.
The SP always points to the first available free word (Top-of-Stack) and fills the software stack,
working from lower addresses towards higher addresses. It pre-decrements for a stack POP
(read) and post-increments for a stack PUSH (write).
The software stack is manipulated using the PUSH and POP instructions. The PUSH and POP
instructions are the equivalent of a MOV instruction, with W15 used as the destination pointer. For
example, the contents of W0 can be PUSHed onto the Top-of-Stack (TOS) by:
PUSH W0

This syntax is equivalent to:

MOV W0,[W15++]

The contents of the TOS can be returned to W0 by:

POP W0

This syntax is equivalent to:

MOV [--W15],W0

During any CALL instruction, the PC is PUSHed onto the stack, such that when the subroutine
completes execution, program flow may resume from the correct location. When the PC is
PUSHed onto the stack, PC<15:0> is PUSHed onto the first available stack word, then
PC<22:16> is PUSHed. When PC<22:16> is PUSHed, the Most Significant 7 bits of the PC are
zero-extended before the PUSH is made, as shown in Figure 4-4. During exception processing,
the Most Significant 7 bits of the PC are concatenated with the lower byte of the STATUS
register (SRL) and IPL<3>, CORCON<3>. This allows the primary STATUS register contents
and CPU Interrupt Priority Level to be automatically preserved during interrupts.
Note:

In order to protect against misaligned stack accesses, W15<0> is always clear.

Figure 4-4:

Stack Operation for CALL Instruction

0x0000

Stack Grows Towards

Higher Address

PC<15:0>
0x0

W15 (before CALL)

PC<22:16>
Top-of-Stack

W15 (after CALL)

0xFFFE
Note:

DS70157E-page 70

For exceptions, the upper nine bits of the second PUSHed word contains
the SRL and IPL<3>.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.7.1.1

STACK POINTER EXAMPLE

Figure 4-5 through Figure 4-8 show how the software stack is modified for the code snippet
shown in Example 4-13. Figure 4-5 shows the software stack before the first PUSH has executed.
Note that the SP has the initialized value of 0x0800. Furthermore, the example loads 0x5A5A
and 0x3636 to W0 and W1, respectively. The stack is PUSHed for the first time in Figure 4-6 and
the value contained in W0 is copied to TOS. W15 is automatically updated to point to the next
available stack location, and the new TOS is 0x0802. In Figure 4-7, the contents of W1 are
PUSHed onto the stack, and the new TOS becomes 0x0804. In Figure 4-8, the stack is POPped,
which copies the last PUSHed value (W1) to W3. The SP is decremented during the POP
operation, and at the end of the example, the final TOS is 0x0802.
Example 4-13:
MOV
MOV
PUSH
PUSH
POP

Figure 4-5:

Stack Pointer Usage

#0x5A5A, W0
#0x3636, W1
W0
W1
W3

;
;
;
;
;

Load W0
Load W1
Push W0
Push W1
Pop TOS

with 0x5A5A
with 0x3636
to TOS (see Figure 4-5)
to TOS (see Figure 4-7)
to W3 (see Figure 4-8)

Stack Pointer Before The First PUSH

0x0000
0x0800

<TOS>

W15 (SP)

0xFFFE
W0 = 0x5A5A
W1 = 0x3636
W15 = 0x0800

Figure 4-6:

Stack Pointer After PUSH W0 Instruction

0x0000
0x0800
0x0802

5A5A
<TOS>

W15 (SP)

Instruction Set
Details

0xFFFE
W0 = 0x5A5A
W1 = 0x3636
W15 = 0x0802

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 71

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Figure 4-7:

Stack Pointer After PUSH W1 Instruction

0x0000
0x0800
0x0802
0x0804

5A5A
3636
<TOS>

W15 (SP)

0xFFFE
W0 = 0x5A5A
W1 = 0x3636
W15 = 0x0804

Figure 4-8:

Stack Pointer After POP W3 Instruction

0x0000
0x0800
0x0802
0x0804

5A5A
<TOS>

W15 (SP)

0xFFFE
W0 = 0x5A5A
W1 = 0x3636
W3 = 0x3636
W15 = 0x0802
Note: The contents of 0x802, the new TOS, remain unchanged (0x3636).

4.7.2

Software Stack Frame Pointer

A Stack Frame is a user-defined section of memory residing in the software stack. It is used to
allocate memory for temporary variables which a function uses, and one Stack Frame may be
created for each function. W14 is the default Stack Frame Pointer (FP) and it is initialized to
0x0000 on any Reset. If the Stack Frame Pointer is not used, W14 may be used like any other
working register.
The link (LNK) and unlink (ULNK) instructions provide Stack Frame functionality. The LNK
instruction is used to create a Stack Frame. It is used during a call sequence to adjust the SP,
such that the stack may be used to store temporary variables utilized by the called function. After
the function completes execution, the ULNK instruction is used to remove the Stack Frame
created by the LNK instruction. The LNK and ULNK instructions must always be used together to
avoid stack overflow.

DS70157E-page 72

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.7.2.1

STACK FRAME POINTER EXAMPLE

Figure 4-9 through Figure 4-11 show how a Stack Frame is created and removed for the code
snippet shown in Example 4-14. This example demonstrates how a Stack Frame operates and
is not indicative of the code generated by the compiler. Figure 4-9 shows the stack condition at
the beginning of the example, before any registers are PUSHed to the stack. Here, W15 points
to the first free stack location (TOS) and W14 points to a portion of stack
memory allocated for the routine that is currently executing.
Before calling the function COMPUTE, the parameters of the function (W0, W1 and W2) are
PUSHed on the stack. After the CALL COMPUTE instruction is executed, the PC changes to the
address of COMPUTE and the return address of the function TASKA is placed on the stack
(Figure 4-10). Function COMPUTE then uses the LNK #4 instruction to PUSH the calling
routines Frame Pointer value onto the stack and the new Frame Pointer will be set to point to the
current Stack Pointer. Then, the literal 4 is added to the Stack Pointer address in W15, which
reserves memory for two words of temporary data (Figure 4-11).
Inside the function COMPUTE, the FP is used to access the function parameters and temporary
(local) variables. [W14 + n] will access the temporary variables used by the routine and [W14 n]
is used to access the parameters. At the end of the function, the ULNK instruction is used to copy
the Frame Pointer address to the Stack Pointer and then POP the calling subroutines Frame
Pointer back to the W14 register. The ULNK instruction returns the stack back to the state shown
in Figure 4-10.
A RETURN instruction will return to the code that called the subroutine. The calling code is
responsible for removing the parameters from the stack. The RETURN and POP instructions
restore the stack to the state shown in Figure 4-9.
Example 4-14:
TASKA:
...
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
CALL
POP
POP
POP
...

W0
W1
W2
COMPUTE
W2
W1
W0

;
;
;
;
;
;
;

Push parameter 1
Push parameter 2
Push parameter 3
Call COMPUTE function
Pop parameter 3
Pop parameter 2
Pop parameter 1

; Stack FP, allocate 4 bytes for local variables

; Free allocated memory, restore original FP
; Return to TASKA

Stack at the Beginning of Example 4-14

0x0000
0x0800
Frame
of
TASKA

W14 (FP)

<TOS>

W15 (SP)

0xFFFE

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 73

4
Instruction Set
Details

COMPUTE:
LNK
#4
...
ULNK
RETURN

Figure 4-9:

Frame Pointer Usage

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Figure 4-10:

Stack After CALLCOMPUTE Executes

0x0000
0x0800
Frame
of
TASKA
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
PC<15:0>
0:PC<22:16>
<TOS>

W14 (FP)

W15 (SP)

0xFFFE

Figure 4-11:

Stack After LNK #4 Executes

0x0000
0x0800
Frame
of
TASKA
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
PC<15:0>
0:PC<22:16>
FP of TASKA
Temp Word 1
Temp Word 2
<TOS>

W14 (FP)
W15 (SP)

0xFFFE

4.7.3

Stack Pointer Overflow

There is a stack limit register (SPLIM) associated with the Stack Pointer that is reset to 0x0000.
SPLIM is a 16-bit register, but SPLIM<0> is fixed to 0, because all stack operations must be
word-aligned.
The stack overflow check will not be enabled until a word write to SPLIM occurs, after which time
it can only be disabled by a device Reset. All effective addresses generated using W15 as a
source or destination are compared against the value in SPLIM. Should the effective address be
greater than the contents of SPLIM, then a stack error trap is generated.
If stack overflow checking has been enabled, a stack error trap will also occur if the W15 effective
address calculation wraps over the end of data space (0xFFFF).
Refer to the specific device family reference manual for more information on the stack error trap.

4.7.4

Stack Pointer Underflow

The stack is initialized to 0x0800 during Reset (0x1000 for PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices). A
stack error trap will be initiated should the Stack Pointer address ever be less than 0x0800
(0x1000 for PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices).
Note:

DS70157E-page 74

Locations in data space between 0x0000 and 0x07FF (0x0FFF for PIC24E and
dsPIC33E devices) are, in general, reserved for core and peripheral Special
Function Registers (SFR).

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.7.5

Stack Frame Active (SFA) Control (dsPIC33E and PIC24E

Devices)

W15 is never subject to paging and is therefore restricted to address range 0x000000 to
0x00FFFF. However, the Stack Frame Pointer (W14) for any user software function is only
dedicated to that function when a stack frame addressed by W14 is active (i.e., after a LNK
instruction). Therefore, it is desirable to have the ability to dynamically switch W14 between use
as a general purpose W register, and use as a Stack Frame Pointer. The SFA Status
(CORCON<2>) bit achieves this function without additional S/W overhead.
When SFA is clear, W14 may be used with any page register. When SFA is set, W14 is not
subject to paging and is locked into the same address range as W15 (0x000000 to 0x00FFFF).
Operation of the SFA register lock is as follows:
The LNK instruction sets SFA (and creates a stack frame).
The ULNK instruction clears SFA (and deletes the stack frame).
The CALL, CALL.L, and RCALL instructions also stack the SFA bit (placing it in the LSb of
the stacked PC), and clear the SFA bit after the stacking operation is complete. The called
procedure is now free to either use W14 as a general purpose register, or create another
stack frame using the LNK instruction.
The RETURN, RETLW and RETFIE instructions all restore the SFA bit from its previously
stacked value.
The SFA bit is a read-only bit. It can only be set by execution of the LNK instruction, and cleared
by the ULNK, CALL, CALL.L, and RCALL instructions.
Note:

In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, the SFA bit is stacked instead of PC<0>.

4
Instruction Set
Details

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 75

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.8

CONDITIONAL BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS

Conditional branch instructions are used to direct program flow, based on the contents of the
STATUS register. These instructions are generally used in conjunction with a Compare class
instruction, but they may be employed effectively after any operation that modifies the STATUS
register.
The compare instructions CP,
CP0 and CPB, perform a subtract operation
(minuend subtrahend), but do not actually store the result of the subtraction. Instead, compare
instructions just update the flags in the STATUS register, such that an ensuing conditional branch
instruction may change program flow by testing the contents of the updated STATUS register. If
the result of the STATUS register test is true, the branch is taken. If the result of the STATUS
register test is false, the branch is not taken.
The conditional branch instructions supported by the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E
devices are shown in Table 4-8. This table identifies the condition in the STATUS register which
must be true for the branch to be taken. In some cases, just a single bit is tested (as in BRA C),
while in other cases, a complex logic operation is performed (as in BRA GT). For dsPIC30F,
dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices, it is worth noting that both signed and unsigned conditional
tests are supported, and that support is provided for DSP algorithms with the OA, OB, SA and
SB condition mnemonics.
Table 4-8:

Conditional Branch Instructions

Condition
Mnemonic(1)

Status Test

Carry (not Borrow)

Signed greater than or equal

(N&&OV) || (N&&OV)

GEU(2)

Unsigned greater than or equal

Signed greater than

(Z&&N&&OV) || (Z&&N&&OV)

GTU

Unsigned greater than

C&&Z

Signed less than or equal

Z || (N&&OV) || (N&&OV)

LEU

Unsigned less than or equal

C || Z

Signed less than

(N&&OV) || (N&&OV)

LTU

Unsigned less than

Negative

(3)

Not Carry (Borrow)

Not Negative

NOV

Not Overflow

Not Zero

OA(4)

Accumulator A overflow

OB(4)

Accumulator B overflow

Overflow

SA(4)

Accumulator A saturate

SB(4)

Accumulator B saturate

Zero

Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Note:

DS70157E-page 76

Description

Instructions are of the form: BRA mnemonic, Expr.

GEU is identical to C and will reverse assemble to BRA C, Expr.
LTU is identical to NC and will reverse assemble to BRA NC, Expr.
This condition is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.
The Compare and Skip instructions (CPBEQ, CPBGT, CPBLT, CPBNE, CPSEQ,
CPSGT, CPSLT, and CPSNE) do not modify the STATUS register.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.9

Z STATUS BIT
The Z Status bit is a special zero Status bit that is useful for extended precision arithmetic. The
Z bit functions like a normal Z flag for all instructions, except those that use the carry/borrow input
(ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR). For the ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR instructions, the Z bit
can only be cleared and never set. If the result of one of these instructions is non-zero, the Z bit
will be cleared and will remain cleared, regardless of the result of subsequent ADDC, CPB, SUBB
or SUBBR operations. This allows the Z bit to be used for performing a simple zero check on the
result of a series of extended precision operations.
A sequence of instructions working on multi-precision data (starting with an instruction with no
carry/borrow input), will automatically logically AND the successive results of the zero test. All
results must be zero for the Z flag to remain set at the end of the sequence of operations. If the
result of the ADDC, CPB, SUBB or SUBBR instruction is non-zero, the Z bit will be cleared and
remain cleared for all subsequent ADDC, CPB, SUBB or SUBBR instructions. Example 4-15
shows how the Z bit operates for a 32-bit addition. It shows how the Z bit is affected for a 32-bit
addition implemented with an ADD/ADDC instruction sequence. The first example generates a
zero result for only the most significant word, and the second example generates a zero result
for both the least significant word and most significant word.
Example 4-15:

Z Status bit Operation for 32-bit Addition

; Add two doubles (W0:W1 and W2:W3)

; Store the result in W5:W4
ADD
W0, W2, W4
; Add LSWord and store to W4
ADDC
W1, W3, W5
; Add MSWord and store to W5

Before 32-bit Addition (zero result for the most significant word):
W0
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
SR

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

0x2342
0xFFF0
0x39AA
0x0010
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000

After 32-bit Addition:

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

0x2342
0xFFF0
0x39AA
0x0010
0x5CEC
0x0000
0x0201 (DC,C=1)

Before 32-bit Addition (zero result for the least significant word and most significant word):
W0
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
SR

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

0xB76E
0xFB7B
0x4892
0x0484
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000

After 32-bit Addition:

W0
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
SR

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

0xB76E
0xFB7B
0x4892
0x0485
0x0000
0x0000
0x0103 (DC,Z,C=1)

DS70157E-page 77

Instruction Set
Details

W0
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
SR

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.10

ASSIGNED WORKING REGISTER USAGE

The 16 working registers of the 16-bit MCU and DSC devices provide a large register set for
efficient code generation and algorithm implementation. In an effort to maintain an instruction set
that provides advanced capability, a stable run-time environment and backwards compatibility
with earlier Microchip processor cores, some working registers have a pre-assigned usage.
Table 4-9 summarizes these working register assignments. For the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and
dsPIC33E, additional details are provided in subsections Section 4.10.1 Implied DSP
Operands (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices) through Section 4.10.3 PIC
Microcontroller Compatibility.
Table 4-9:

Special Working Register Assignments

Special Assignment

Default WREG, Divide Quotient

Divide Remainder

MUL f Product least significant word

MUL f Product most significant word

MAC Operand(1)

MAC Prefetch Address (X Memory)(1)

W10

MAC Prefetch Address (Y Memory)(1)

W11

MAC Prefetch Address (Y Memory)(1)

W12

MAC Prefetch Offset(1)

W13

MAC Write Back Destination(1)

W14

Frame Pointer

W15

Stack Pointer

Note 1:

4.10.1

This assignment is only applicable in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.

Implied DSP Operands (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E

Devices)

To assist instruction encoding and maintain uniformity among the DSP class of instructions,
some working registers have pre-assigned functionality. For all DSP instructions which have
prefetch ability, the following 10 register assignments must be adhered to:

W4-W7 are used for arithmetic operands

W8-W11 are used for prefetch addresses (pointers)
W12 is used for the prefetch register offset index
W13 is used for the accumulator Write Back destination

These restrictions only apply to the DSP MAC class of instructions, which utilize working
registers and have prefetch ability (described in Section 4.15 DSP Accumulator Instructions
(dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)). These instructions are CLR, ED, EDAC, MAC,
MOVSAC, MPY, MPY.N and MSC.
The DSP Accumulator class of instructions (described in Section 4.15 DSP Accumulator
Instructions (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E Devices)) are not required to follow the
working register assignments in Table 4-9 and may freely use any working register when required.

DS70157E-page 78

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.10.2

Implied Frame and Stack Pointer

To accommodate software stack usage, W14 is the implied Frame Pointer (used by the LNK and
ULNK instructions) and W15 is the implied Stack Pointer (used by the CALL, LNK, POP, PUSH,
RCALL, RETFIE, RETLW, RETURN, TRAP and ULNK instructions). Even though W14 and
W15 have this implied usage, they may still be used as generic operands in any instruction, with
the exceptions outlined in Section 4.10.1 Implied DSP Operands (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and
dsPIC33E Devices). If W14 and W15 must be used for other purposes (it is strongly advised
that they remain reserved for the Frame and Stack Pointer), extreme care must be taken such
that the run-time environment is not corrupted.

4.10.3

PIC Microcontroller Compatibility

4.10.3.1

DEFAULT WORKING REGISTER WREG

To ease the migration path for users of the Microchip 8-bit PIC MCU families, the 16-bit MCU and
DSC devices have matched the functionality of the PIC MCU instruction sets as closely as
possible. One major difference between the 16-bit MCU and DSC and the 8-bit PIC MCU
processors is the number of working registers provided. The 8-bit PIC MCU families only provide
one 8-bit working register, while the 16-bit MCU and DSC families provide sixteen, 16-bit working
registers. To accommodate for the one working register of the 8-bit PIC MCU, the 16-bit MCU
and DSC device instruction set has designated one working register to be the default working
register for all legacy file register instructions. The default working register is set to W0, and it is
used by all instructions which use file register addressing.
Additionally, the syntax used by the 16-bit MCU and DSC device assembler to specify the default
working register is similar to that used by the 8-bit PIC MCU assembler. As shown in the detailed
instruction descriptions in Section 5. Instruction Descriptions, WREG must be used to
specify the default working register. Example 4-16 shows several instructions which use WREG.
Example 4-16:
ADD
ASR
CLR.B
DEC
MOV
SETM
XOR

4.10.3.2

Using the Default Working Register WREG

RAM100
RAM100, WREG
WREG
RAM100, WREG
WREG, RAM100
WREG
RAM100

;
;
;
;
;
;
;

add RAM100 and WREG, store in RAM100

shift RAM100 right, store in WREG
clear the WREG LS Byte
decrement RAM100, store in WREG
move WREG to RAM100
set all bits in the WREG
XOR RAM100 and WREG, store in RAM100

PRODH:PRODL REGISTER PAIR

Despite this architectural difference, the 16-bit MCU and DSC devices still support the legacy file
register multiply instruction (MULWF) with the MUL{.B} f instruction (described on page 306).
Supporting the legacy MULWF instruction has been accomplished by mapping the
PRODH:PRODL registers to the working register pair W3:W2. This means that when MUL{.B}
f is executed in Word mode, the multiply generates a 32-bit product which is stored in W3:W2,
where W3 has the most significant word of the product and W2 has the least significant word of
the product. When MUL{.B} f is executed in Byte mode, the 16-bit product is stored in W2,
and W3 is unaffected. Examples of this instruction are shown in Example 4-17.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 79

4
Instruction Set
Details

Another significant difference between the Microchip 8-bit PIC MCU and 16-bit MCU and DSC
architectures is the multiplier. Some PIC MCU families support an 8-bit x 8-bit multiplier, which
places the multiply product in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. The 16-bit MCU and DSC
devices have a 17-bit x 17-bit multiplier, which may place the result into any two successive
working registers (starting with an even register), or an accumulator.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 4-17:
MUL.B

Unsigned f and WREG Multiply (Legacy MULWF Instruction)

0x100

; (0x100)*WREG (byte mode), store to W2

Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705
W2 = 0x1235
W3 = 0x1000
Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255

After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705
W2 = 0x01A9
W3 = 0x1000
Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255
MUL

0x100

; (0x100)*WREG (word mode), store to W3:W2

Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705
W2 = 0x1235
W3 = 0x1000
Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255

After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705
W2 = 0xDEA9
W3 = 0x0885
Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255

4.10.3.3

MOVING DATA WITH WREG

The MOV{.B} f {,WREG} instruction (described on page 5-145) and MOV{.B} WREG, f
instruction (described on page 5-146) allow for byte or word data to be moved between file
register memory and the WREG (working register W0). These instructions provide equivalent
functionality to the legacy Microchip PIC MCU MOVF and MOVWF instructions.
The MOV{.B} f {,WREG} and MOV{.B} WREG, f instructions are the only MOV instructions
which support moves of byte data to and from file register memory. Example 4-18 shows several
MOV instruction examples using the WREG.
Note:

When moving word data between file register memory and the working register
array, the MOV Wns, f and MOV f, Wnd instructions allow any working register
(W0:W15) to be used as the source or destination register, not just WREG.

Example 4-18:
MOV.B
MOV
MOV.B
MOV

DS70157E-page 80

Moving Data with WREG

0x1001, WREG
0x1000, WREG
WREG, TBLPAG
WREG, 0x804

;
;
;
;

move
move
move
move

the
the
the
the

byte
word
byte
word

stored
stored
stored
stored

at
at
at
at

location 0x1001 to W0
location 0x1000 to W0
W0 to the TBLPAG register
W0 to location 0x804

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.11

DSP DATA FORMATS (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)

4.11.1

Integer and Fractional Data

The dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices support both integer and fractional data types.
Integer data is inherently represented as a signed twos complement value, where the Most
Significant bit is defined as a sign bit. Generally speaking, the range of an N-bit twos complement
integer is -2N-1 to 2N-1 1. For a 16-bit integer, the data range is -32768 (0x8000) to 32767
(0x7FFF), including 0. For a 32-bit integer, the data range is -2,147,483,648 (0x8000 0000) to
2,147,483,647 (0x7FFF FFFF).
Fractional data is represented as a twos complement number, where the Most Significant bit is
defined as a sign bit, and the radix point is implied to lie just after the sign bit. This format is
commonly referred to as 1.15 (or Q15) format, where 1 is the number of bits used to represent
the integer portion of the number, and 15 is the number of bits used to represent the fractional
portion. The range of an N-bit twos complement fraction with this implied radix point is -1.0 to
(1 21-N). For a 16-bit fraction, the 1.15 data range is -1.0 (0x8000) to 0.999969482 (0x7FFF),
including 0.0 and it has a precision of 3.05176x10-5. In Normal Saturation mode, the 32-bit
accumulators use a 1.31 format, which enhances the precision to 4.6566x10-10.
Super Saturation mode expands the dynamic range of the accumulators by using the 8 bits of
the Upper Accumulator register (ACCxU) as guard bits. Guard bits are used if the value stored
in the accumulator overflows beyond the 32nd bit, and they are useful for implementing DSP
algorithms. This mode is enabled when the ACCSAT bit (CORCON<4>), is set to 1 and it
expands the accumulators to 40 bits. The accumulators then support an integer range of
-5.498x1011 (0x80 0000 0000) to 5.498x1011 (0x7F FFFF FFFF). In Fractional mode, the guard
bits of the accumulator do not modify the location of the radix point and the 40-bit accumulators
use a 9.31 fractional format. Note that all fractional operation results are stored in the 40-bit
Accumulator, justified with a 1.31 radix point. As in Integer mode, the guard bits merely increase
the dynamic range of the accumulator. 9.31 fractions have a range of -256.0 (0x80 0000 0000)
to (256.0 4.65661x10-10) (0x7F FFFF FFFF). Table 4-10 identifies the range and precision of
integers and fractions on the dsPIC30F/33F/33E devices for 16-bit, 32-bit and 40-bit registers.

Table 4-10:

dsPIC30F/33F/33E Data Ranges

Integer Range
-32768 to 32767

Fraction Range
-1.0 to (1.0 2-15)
-31

32-bit

-2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647

-1.0 to (1.0 2

40-bit

-549,755,813,888 to
549,755,813,887

-256.0 to (256.0 2-31)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Fraction Resolution
3.052 x 10-5
4.657 x 10-10
4.657 x 10-10

DS70157E-page 81

4
Instruction Set
Details

It should be noted that, with the exception of DSP multiplies, the ALU operates identically on
integer and fractional data. Namely, an addition of two integers will yield the same result (binary
number) as the addition of two fractional numbers. The only difference is how the result is
interpreted by the user. However, multiplies performed by DSP operations are different. In these
instructions, data format selection is made by the IF bit, CORCON<0>, and it must be set
accordingly (0 for Fractional mode, 1 for Integer mode). This is required because of the implied
radix point used by dsPIC30F/33F/33E fractional numbers. In Integer mode, multiplying two
16-bit integers produces a 32-bit integer result. However, multiplying two 1.15 values generates
a 2.30 result. Since the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices use a 1.31 format for the
accumulators, a DSP multiply in Fractional mode also includes a left shift of one bit to keep the
radix point properly aligned. This feature reduces the resolution of the DSP multiplier to 2-30, but
has no other effect on the computation (e.g., 0.5 x 0.5 = 0.25).

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.11.2

Integer and Fractional Data Representation

Having a working knowledge of how integer and fractional data are represented on the
dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E is fundamental to working with the device. Both integer and
fractional data treat the Most Significant bit as a sign bit, and the binary exponent decreases by
one as the bit position advances toward the Least Significant bit. The binary exponent for an N-bit
integer starts at (N-1) for the Most Significant bit, and ends at 0 for the Least Significant bit. For
an N-bit fraction, the binary exponent starts at 0 for the Most Significant bit, and ends at (1-N)
for the Least Significant bit (as shown in Figure 4-12 for a positive value and in Figure 4-13 for a
negative value).
Conversion between integer and fractional representations can be performed using simple
division and multiplication. To go from an N-bit integer to a fraction, divide the integer value by
2N-1. Likewise, to convert an N-bit fraction to an integer, multiply the fractional value by 2N-1.
Figure 4-12:

Different Representations of 0x4001

Integer:
0

-215 214

213

212 . . . . . .

0x4001 = 214 + 20 = 16384 + 1 = 16385

1.15 Fractional:
0

-20 . 2-1

2-2

2-3 . . . . . .

2-15

Implied Radix Point

0x4001 = 2-1 + 2-15 = 0.5 + .000030518 = 0.500030518
Figure 4-13:

Different Representations of 0xC002

Integer:
1

-215 214

213

212 . . . . . .

0xC002 = -215 + 214 + 21= -32768 + 16384 + 2 = -16382

1.15 Fractional:
1

-20 . 2-1

2-2

2-3 . . . . . .

2-15

Implied Radix Point

0xC002 = -20 + 2-1 + 2-14 = -1.0 + 0.5 + 0.000061035 = -0.499938965

DS70157E-page 82

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.12

ACCUMULATOR USAGE (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)

Accumulators A and B are utilized by DSP instructions to perform mathematical and shifting
operations. Since the accumulators are 40 bits wide and the X and Y data paths are only 16 bits,
the method to load and store the accumulators must be understood.
Item A in Figure 4-14 shows that each 40-bit Accumulator (ACCA and ACCB) consists of an 8-bit
Upper register (ACCxU), a 16-bit High register (ACCxH) and a 16-bit Low register (ACCxL). To
address the bus alignment requirement and provide the ability for 1.31 math, ACCxH is used as
a destination register for loading the accumulator (with the LAC instruction), and also as a source
register for storing the accumulator (with the SAC.R instruction). This is represented by Item B,
Figure 4-14, where the upper and lower portions of the accumulator are shaded. In reality, during
accumulator loads, ACCxL is zero backfilled and ACCxU is sign-extended to represent the sign
of the value loaded in ACCxH.
When Normal (31-bit) Saturation is enabled, DSP operations (such as ADD, MAC, MSC, etc.)
utilize solely ACCxH:ACCxL (Item C in Figure 4-14) and ACCxU is only used to maintain the sign
of the value stored in ACCxH:ACCxL. For instance, when a MPY instruction is executed, the
result is stored in ACCxH:ACCxL, and the sign of the result is extended through ACCxU.
When Super Saturation is enabled, all registers of the accumulator may be used (Item D in
Figure 4-14) and the results of DSP operations are stored in ACCxU:ACCxH:ACCxL. The benefit
of ACCxU is that it increases the dynamic range of the accumulator, as described in
4.11.1 Integer and Fractional Data. Refer to Table 4-10 to see the range of values which may
be stored in the accumulator when in Normal and Super Saturation modes.
Figure 4-14:

Accumulator Alignment and Usage

ACCxU
39

32 31 30

ACCxL

ACCxH
16

Implied Radix Point (between bits 31 and 30)

Instruction Set
Details

A)
B)
C)
D)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

40-bit Accumulator consists of ACCxU:ACCxH:ACCxL

Load and Store operations
Operations in Normal Saturation mode
Operations in Super Saturation mode

DS70157E-page 83

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.13

ACCUMULATOR ACCESS (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)

The six registers of Accumulator A and Accumulator B are memory mapped like any other
Special Function Register. This feature allows them to be accessed with file register or indirect
addressing, using any instruction which supports such addressing. However, it is recommended
that the DSP instructions LAC, SAC and SAC.R be used to load and store the accumulators,
since they provide sign-extension, shifting and rounding capabilities. LAC, SAC and SAC.R
instruction details are provided in Section 5. Instruction Descriptions.
Note:

DS70157E-page 84

For convenience, ACCAU and ACCBU are sign-extended to 16 bits. This provides
the flexibility to access these registers using either Byte or Word mode (when file
register or indirect addressing is used).

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.14

DSP MAC INSTRUCTIONS (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)

The DSP Multiply and Accumulate (MAC) operations are a special suite of instructions which
provide the most efficient use of the dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E architectures. The DSP
MAC instructions, shown in Table 4-11, utilize both the X and Y data paths of the CPU core, which
enables these instructions to perform the following operations all in one cycle:
two reads from data memory using prefetch working registers (MAC Prefetches)
two updates to prefetch working registers (MAC Prefetch Register Updates)
one mathematical operation with an accumulator (MAC Operations)
In addition, four of the ten DSP MAC instructions are also capable of performing an operation with
one accumulator, while storing out the rounded contents of the alternate accumulator. This
feature is called accumulator Write Back (WB) and it provides flexibility for the software
developer. For instance, the accumulator WB may be used to run two algorithms concurrently, or
efficiently process complex numbers, among other things.
Table 4-11:

DSP MAC Instructions

Instruction

Description

Accumulator WB?

CLR

Clear accumulator

Yes

Euclidean distance (no accumulate)

EDAC

Euclidean distance

MAC

Multiply and accumulate

Yes

MAC

Square and accumulate

MOVSAC

Move from X and Y bus

Yes

MPY

Multiply to accumulator

MPY

Square to accumulator

MPY.N

Negative multiply to accumulator

MSC

Multiply and subtract

Yes

4.14.1

MAC Prefetches

Prefetches (or data reads) are made using the effective address stored in the working register.
The two prefetches from data memory must be specified using the working register assignments
shown in Table 4-9. One read must occur from the X data bus using W8 or W9, and one read
must occur from the Y data bus using W10 or W11. The allowed destination registers for both
prefetches are W4-W7.

4.14.2

MAC Prefetch Register Updates

After the MAC prefetches are made, the effective address stored in each prefetch working register
may be modified. This feature enables efficient single-cycle processing for data stored
sequentially in X and Y memory. Since all DSP instructions execute in Word mode, only even
numbered updates may be made to the effective address stored in the working register.
Allowable address modifications to each prefetch register are -6, -4, -2, 0 (no update), +2, +4 and
+6. This means that effective address updates may be made up to 3 words in either direction.
When the Register Offset Addressing mode is used, no update is made to the base prefetch
register (W9 or W11), or the offset register (W12).

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 85

4
Instruction Set
Details

As shown in Table 4-3, one special Addressing mode exists for the MAC class of instructions. This
mode is the Register Offset Addressing mode and utilizes W12. In this mode, the prefetch is
made using the effective address of the specified working register, plus the 16-bit signed value
stored in W12. Register Offset Addressing may only be used in the X space with W9, and in the
Y-space with W11.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.14.3

MAC Operations

The mathematical operations performed by the MAC class of DSP instructions center around
multiplying the contents of two working registers and either adding or storing the result to either
Accumulator A or Accumulator B. This is the operation of the MAC, MPY, MPY.N and MSC
instructions. Table 4-9 shows that W4-W7 must be used for data source operands in the MAC
class of instructions. W4-W7 may be combined in any fashion, and when the same working
register is specified for both operands, a square or square and accumulate operation is
performed.
For the ED and EDAC instructions, the same multiplicand operand must be specified by the
instruction, because this is the definition of the Euclidean Distance operation. Another unique
feature about this instruction is that the values prefetched from X and Y memory are not actually
stored in W4-W7. Instead, only the difference of the prefetched data words is stored in W4-W7.
The two remaining MAC class instructions, CLR and MOVSAC, are useful for initiating or completing
a series of MAC or EDAC instructions and do not use the multiplier. CLR has the ability to clear
Accumulator A or B, prefetch two values from data memory and store the contents of the other
accumulator. Similarly, MOVSAC has the ability to prefetch two values from data memory and store
the contents of either accumulator.

4.14.4

MAC Write Back

The write back ability of the MAC class of DSP instructions facilitates efficient processing of
algorithms. This feature allows one mathematical operation to be performed with one
accumulator, and the rounded contents of the other accumulator to be stored in the same cycle.
As indicated in Table 4-9, register W13 is assigned for performing the write back, and two
Addressing modes are supported: Direct and Indirect with Post-Increment.
The CLR, MOVSAC and MSC instructions support accumulator Write Back, while the ED, EDAC,
MPY and MPY.N instructions do not support accumulator Write Back. The MAC instruction, which
multiplies two working registers which are not the same, also supports accumulator Write Back.
However, the square and accumulate MAC instruction does not support accumulator Write Back
(see Table 4-11).

4.14.5

MAC Syntax

The syntax of the MAC class of instructions can have several formats, which depend on the
instruction type and the operation it is performing, with respect to prefetches and accumulator
Write Back. With the exception of the CLR and MOVSAC instructions, all MAC class instructions
must specify a target accumulator along with two multiplicands, as shown in Example 4-19.
Example 4-19:

Base MAC Syntax

; MAC with no prefetch

MAC W4*W5, A

; MAC with no prefetch

MAC W7*W7, B
Multiply W7*W7, Accumulate to ACCB

DS70157E-page 86

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

If a prefetch is used in the instruction, the assembler is capable of discriminating between the X
or Y data prefetch based on the register used for the effective address. [W8] or [W9] specifies
the X prefetch and [W10] or [W11] specifies the Y prefetch. Brackets around the working register
are required in the syntax, and they designate that indirect addressing is used to perform the
prefetch. When address modification is used, it must be specified using a minus-equals or
plus-equals C-like syntax (i.e., [W8] = 2 or [W8] + = 6). When Register Offset Addressing
is used for the prefetch, W12 is placed inside the brackets ([W9 + W12] for X prefetches and [W11
+ W12] for Y prefetches). Each prefetch operation must also specify a prefetch destination
register (W4-W7). In the instruction syntax, the destination register appears before the prefetch
register. Legal forms of prefetch are shown in Example 4-20.
Example 4-20:

MAC Prefetch Syntax

; MAC with X only prefetch

MAC W5*W6, A, [W8]+=2, W5
ACCA=ACCA+W5*W6
X([W8]+=2)W5
; MAC with Y only prefetch
MAC W5*W5, B, [W11+W12], W5

ACCB=ACCB+W5*W5
Y([W11+W12])W5
; MAC with X/Y prefetch
MAC W6*W7, B, [W9], W6,

[W10]+=4, W7
ACCB=ACCB+W6*W7
X([W9])W6
Y([W10]+=4)W7

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 87

Instruction Set
Details

If an accumulator Write Back is used in the instruction, it is specified last. The Write Back must
use the W13 register, and allowable forms for the Write Back are W13 for direct addressing and
[W13] + = 2 for indirect addressing with post-increment. By definition, the accumulator not used
in the mathematical operation is stored, so the Write Back accumulator is not specified in the
instruction. Legal forms of accumulator Write Back (WB) are shown in Example 4-21.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 4-21:

MAC Accumulator WB Syntax

; CLR with direct WB of ACCB

CLR A,

W13
0ACCA
ACCBW13

; MAC with indirect WB of ACCB

MAC W4*W5, A

[W13]+=2
ACCA=ACCA+W4*W5
ACCB [W13]+=2

; MAC with Y prefetch, direct WB of ACCA

MAC W4*W5, B,

[W10]+=2, W4,

W13
ACCB=ACCB+W4*W5
Y([W10]+=2)W4
ACCA W13

Putting it all together, an MSC instruction which performs two prefetches and a write back is
shown in Example 4-22.
Example 4-22:

MSC Instruction with Two Prefetches and Accumulator Write Back

; MSC with X/Y prefetch, indirect WB of ACCA

MSC W6*W7, B, [W8]+=2, W6, [W10]-=6, W7 [W13]+=2
ACCB=ACCB-W6*W7
X([W8]+=2)W6
Y([W10]-=6)W7
ACCA[W13]+=2

DS70157E-page 88

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

4.15

DSP ACCUMULATOR INSTRUCTIONS (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, AND

dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The DSP Accumulator instructions do not have prefetch or accumulator WB ability, but they do
provide the ability to add, negate, shift, load and store the contents of either 40-bit Accumulator.
In addition, the ADD and SUB instructions allow the two accumulators to be added or subtracted
from each other. DSP Accumulator instructions are shown in Table 4-12 and instruction details
are provided in Section 5. Instruction Descriptions.
Table 4-12:
Instruction

DSP Accumulator Instructions

Description

Accumulator WB?

ADD

Add accumulators

ADD

16-bit signed accumulator add

LAC

Load accumulator

NEG

Negate accumulator

SAC

Store accumulator

SAC.R

Store rounded accumulator

SFTAC

Arithmetic shift accumulator by Literal

SFTAC

Arithmetic shift accumulator by (Wn)

SUB

Subtract accumulators

4
Instruction Set
Details

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 89

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.16

SCALING DATA WITH THE FBCL INSTRUCTION (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F,

AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
To minimize quantization errors that are associated with data processing using DSP instructions,
it is important to utilize the complete numerical result of the operations. This may require scaling
data up to avoid underflow (i.e., when processing data from a 12-bit ADC), or scaling data down
to avoid overflow (i.e., when sending data to a 10-bit DAC). The scaling, which must be
performed to minimize quantization error, depends on the dynamic range of the input data which
is operated on, and the required dynamic range of the output data. At times, these conditions
may be known beforehand and fixed scaling may be employed. In other cases, scaling conditions
may not be fixed or known, and then dynamic scaling must be used to process data.
The FBCL instruction (Find First Bit Change Left) can efficiently be used to perform dynamic
scaling, because it determines the exponent of a value. A fixed point or integer values exponent
represents the amount which the value may be shifted before overflowing. This information is
valuable, because it may be used to bring the data value to full scale, meaning that its numeric
representation utilizes all the bits of the register it is stored in.
The FBCL instruction determines the exponent of a word by detecting the first bit change starting
from the values sign bit and working towards the LSB. Since the dsPIC DSC devices barrel
shifter uses negative values to specify a left shift, the FBCL instruction returns the negated
exponent of a value. If the value is being scaled up, this allows the ensuing shift to be performed
immediately with the value returned by FBCL. Additionally, since the FBCL instruction only
operates on signed quantities, FBCL produces results in the range of -15:0. When the FBCL
instruction returns 0, it indicates that the value is already at full scale. When the instruction
returns -15, it indicates that the value cannot be scaled (as is the case with 0x0 and 0xFFFF).
Table 4-13 shows word data with various dynamic ranges, their exponents, and the value after
scaling each data to maximize the dynamic range. Example 4-23 shows how the FBCL
instruction may be used for block processing.
Table 4-13:

Scaling Examples

Word Value

Exponent

Full Scale Value

(Word Value << Exponent)

0x0001

0x4000

0x0002

0x4000

0x0004

0x4000

0x0100

0x4000

0x01FF

0x7FC0

0x0806

0x4030

0x2007

0x400E

0x4800

0x7000

0x8000

0x900A

0xE001

0x8004

0xFF07

0x8380

Note:

For the word values 0x0000 and 0xFFFF, the FBCL instruction returns -15.

As a practical example, assume that block processing is performed on a sequence of data with
very low dynamic range stored in 1.15 fractional format. To minimize quantization errors, the data
may be scaled up to prevent any quantization loss which may occur as it is processed. The FBCL
instruction can be executed on the sample with the largest magnitude to determine the optimal
scaling value for processing the data. Note that scaling the data up is performed by left shifting
the data. This is demonstrated with the code snippet below.

DS70157E-page 90

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 4. Instruction Set Details

Example 4-23:

Scaling with FBCL

; assume W0 contains the largest absolute value of the data block

; assume W4 points to the beginning of the data block
; assume the block of data contains BLOCK_SIZE words
; determine the exponent to use for scaling
FBCL
W0, W2
; store exponent in W2
; scale
DO
LAC
SFTAC
SCALE:
SAC

the entire data block before processing

#(BLOCK_SIZE-1), SCALE
[W4], A
; move the next data sample to ACCA
A, W2
; shift ACCA by W2 bits
A, [W4++]

; store scaled input (overwrite original)

; now process the data

; (processing block goes here)

4
Instruction Set
Details

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 91

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

4.17

NORMALIZING THE ACCUMULATOR WITH THE FBCL INSTRUCTION

(dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, AND dsPIC33E DEVICES)
The process of scaling a quantized value for its maximum dynamic range is known as
normalization (the data in the third column in Table 4-13 contains normalized data). Accumulator
normalization is a technique used to ensure that the accumulator is properly aligned before
storing data from the accumulator, and the FBCL instruction facilitates this function.
The two 40-bit accumulators each have 8 guard bits from the ACCxU register, which expands the
dynamic range of the accumulators from 1.31 to 9.31, when operating in Super Saturation mode
(see Section 4.11.1 Integer and Fractional Data). However, even in Super Saturation mode,
the Store Rounded Accumulator (SAC.R) instruction only stores 16-bit data (in 1.15 format) from
ACCxH, as described in Section 4.12 Accumulator Usage (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and
dsPIC33E Devices). Under certain conditions, this may pose a problem.
Proper data alignment for storing the contents of the accumulator may be achieved by scaling
the accumulator down if ACCxU is in use, or scaling the accumulator up if all of the ACCxH bits
are not being used. To perform such scaling, the FBCL instruction must operate on the ACCxU
byte and it must operate on the ACCxH word. If a shift is required, the ALUs 40-bit shifter is
employed, using the SFTAC instruction to perform the scaling. Example 4-24 contains a code
snippet for accumulator normalization.
Example 4-24:

Normalizing with FBCL

; assume an operation in ACCA has just completed (SR intact)

; assume the processor is in super saturation mode
; assume ACCAH is defined to be the address of ACCAH (0x24)
MOV
#ACCAH, W5
BRA
OA, FBCL_GUARD
FBCL_HI:
FBCL
[W5], W0
BRA
SHIFT_ACC
FBCL_GUARD:
FBCL
[++W5], W0
ADD.B
W0, #15, W0
SHIFT_ACC:
SFTAC
A, W0

DS70157E-page 92

; W5 points to ACCAH
; if overflow we right shift
; extract exponent for left shift
; branch to the shift
; extract exponent for right shift
; adjust the sign for right shift
; shift ACCA to normalize

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

Instruction Symbols......................................................................................................... 94
Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction........................................................ 94
Instruction Description Example ..................................................................................... 99
Instruction Descriptions................................................................................................. 100

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 93

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

5.1

Instruction Symbols
All the symbols used in 5.4 Instruction Descriptions are listed in Table 1-2.

5.2

Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction

All instruction encoding field descriptors used in 5.4 Instruction Descriptions are shown in
Table 5-2 through Table 5-12.
Table 5-1:

Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors

Field

Description
A(1)
aa(1)
B
bbbb
D

dddd
f ffff ffff ffff
fff ffff ffff ffff
ffff ffff ffff ffff
ggg
hhh
iiii(1)
jjjj(1)
k
kkkk
kk kkkk
kkkk kkkk
kk kkkk kkkk
kk kkkk kkkk kkkk
kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk
mm
mmm
nnnn nnnn nnnn nnn0
nnn nnnn
nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn
ppp
qqq
rrrr
ssss
tttt
vvvv
W

Accumulator selection bit: 0 = ACCA; 1 = CCB

Accumulator Write Back mode (see Table 5-12)
Byte mode selection bit: 0 = word operation; 1 = byte operation
4-bit bit position select: 0000 = LSB; 1111 = MSB
Destination address bit: 0 = result stored in WREG;
1 = result stored in file register
Wd destination register select: 0000 = W0; 1111 = W15
13-bit register file address (0x0000 to 0x1FFF)
15-bit register file word address (implied 0 LSB)
(0x0000 to 0xFFFE)
16-bit register file byte address (0x0000 to 0xFFFF)
Register Offset Addressing mode for Ws source register
(see Table 5-4)
Register Offset Addressing mode for Wd destination register
(see Table 5-5)
Prefetch X Operation (see Table 5-6)
Prefetch Y Operation (see Table 5-8)
1-bit literal field, constant data or expression
4-bit literal field, constant data or expression
6-bit literal field, constant data or expression
8-bit literal field, constant data or expression
10-bit literal field, constant data or expression
14-bit literal field, constant data or expression
16-bit literal field, constant data or expression
Multiplier source select with same working registers
(see Table 5-10)
Multiplier source select with different working registers
(see Table 5-11)
23-bit program address for CALL and GOTO instructions

16-bit program offset field for relative branch/call instructions

Addressing mode for Ws source register (see Table 5-2)
Addressing mode for Wd destination register (see Table 5-3)
Barrel shift count
Ws source register select: 0000 = W0; 1111 = W15
Dividend select, most significant word
Dividend select, least significant word
Double Word mode selection bit: 0 = word operation;
1 = double word operation
wwww
Wb base register select: 0000 = W0; 1111 = W15
Prefetch X Destination (see Table 5-7)
xx(1)
xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
16-bit unused field (dont care)
Prefetch Y Destination (see Table 5-9)
yy(1)
z
Bit test destination: 0 = C flag bit; 1 = Z flag bit
Note 1: This field is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E devices.

DS70157E-page 94

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Table 5-2:

Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register

Addressing Mode

ppp

Source Operand

000

001

Indirect

[Ws]

010

Indirect with Post-Decrement

[Ws--]

011

Indirect with Post-Increment

[Ws++]

100

Indirect with Pre-Decrement

[--Ws]

101

Indirect with Pre-Increment

[++Ws]

11x

Unused

Table 5-3:

Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register

Addressing Mode

qqq

Destination Operand

000

001

Indirect

[Wd]

010

Indirect with Post-Decrement

[Wd--]

011

Indirect with Post-Increment

[Wd++]

100

Indirect with Pre-Decrement

[--Wd]

101

Indirect with Pre-Increment

[++Wd]

11x

Unused (an attempt to use this Addressing mode will force a RESET instruction)

Table 5-4:

Offset Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register (with Register Offset)

Addressing Mode

ggg

Source Operand

000

001

Indirect

[Ws]

010

Indirect with Post-Decrement

[Ws--]

011

Indirect with Post-Increment

[Ws++]

100

Indirect with Pre-Decrement

[--Ws]

101

Indirect with Pre-Increment

[++Ws]

11x

Indirect with Register Offset

[Ws+Wb]

Table 5-5:

Offset Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register

(with Register Offset)
Addressing Mode

hhh

Source Operand

001

Indirect

[Wd]

010

Indirect with Post-Decrement

[Wd--]

011

Indirect with Post-Increment

[Wd++]

100

Indirect with Pre-Decrement

[--Wd]

101

Indirect with Pre-Increment

[++Wd]

11x

Indirect with Register Offset

[Wd+Wb]

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

5
Instruction
Descriptions

000

DS70157E-page 95

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Table 5-6:

X Data Space Prefetch Operation (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E)

Operation

iiii
0000

Wxd = [W8]

0001

Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 + 2

0010

Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 + 4

0011

Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 + 6

0100

No Prefetch for X Data Space

0101

Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 6

0110

Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 4

0111

Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 2

1000

Wxd = [W9]

1001

Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 + 2

1010

Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 + 4

1011

Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 + 6

1100

Wxd = [W9 + W12]

1101

Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 6

1110

Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 4

1111

Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 2

Table 5-7:

X Data Space Prefetch Destination (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E)

Wxd

xx
00

Table 5-8:

Y Data Space Prefetch Operation (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E)

Operation

jjjj

DS70157E-page 96

0000

Wyd = [W10]

0001

Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 + 2

0010

Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 + 4

0011

Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 + 6

0100

No Prefetch for Y Data Space

0101

Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 6

0110

Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 4

0111

Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 2

1000

Wyd = [W11]

1001

Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 + 2

1010

Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 + 4

1011

Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 + 6

1100

Wyd = [W11 + W12]

1101

Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 6

1110

Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 4

1111

Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 2

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Table 5-9:

Y Data Space Prefetch Destination (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E)

Wyd

yy
00

Table 5-10:

MAC or MPY Source Operands (Same Working Register) (dsPIC30F,

dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E)
Multiplicands

mm
00

W4 * W4

W5 * W5

W6 * W6

W7 * W7

Table 5-11:

MAC or MPY Source Operands (Different Working Register) (dsPIC30F,

dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E)
Multiplicands

mmm
000

W4 * W5

001

W4 * W6

010

W4 * W7

011

Invalid

100

W5 * W6

101

W5 * W7

110

W6 * W7

111

Invalid

Table 5-12:

MAC Accumulator Write Back Selection (dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and

dsPIC33E)
Write Back Selection

aa
00

W13 = Other Accumulator (Direct Addressing)

[W13] + = 2 = Other Accumulator (Indirect Addressing with Post-Increment)

No Write Back

Invalid

Table 5-13:

MOVPAG Destination Selection

Target Page Register

DSRPAG

DSWPAG

Reserved do not use

TBLPAG

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

5
Instruction
Descriptions

DS70157E-page 97

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Table 5-14:

Accumulator Selection

DS70157E-page 98

Target Accumulator

Accumulator A

Accumulator B

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

5.3

Instruction Description Example

The example description below is for the fictitious instruction FOO. The following example
instruction was created to demonstrate how the table fields (syntax, operands, operation, etc.)
are used to describe the instructions presented in Section 5.4 Instruction Descriptions.

FOO
Implemented in:

The Header field summarizes what the instruction does

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

Cells marked with an X indicate the instruction is implemented for that

device family.
Syntax:

The Syntax field consists of an optional label, the instruction mnemonic, any
optional extensions which exist for the instruction and the operands for the
instruction. Most instructions support more than one operand variant to
support the various dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F Addressing modes. In these
circumstances, all possible instruction operands are listed beneath each
other and are enclosed in braces.

Operands:

The Operands field describes the set of values which each of the operands
may take. Operands may be accumulator registers, file registers, literal
constants (signed or unsigned), or working registers.

Operation:

The Operation field summarizes the operation performed by the instruction.

Status Affected:

The Status Affected field describes which bits of the STATUS Register are
affected by the instruction. Status bits are listed by bit position in
descending order.

Encoding:

The Encoding field shows how the instruction is bit encoded. Individual bit
fields are explained in the Description field, and complete encoding details
are provided in Table 5.2.

Description:

The Description field describes in detail the operation performed by the

instruction. A key for the encoding bits is also provided.

Words:

The Words field contains the number of program words that are used to
store the instruction in memory.

Cycles:

The Cycles field contains the number of instruction cycles that are required
to execute the instruction.

Examples:

The Examples field contains examples that demonstrate how the instruction
operates. Before and After register snapshots are provided, which allow
the user to clearly understand what operation the instruction performs.

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 99

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

5.4

Instruction Descriptions

ADD

Add f to WREG

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) + (WREG) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

ADD{.B}

1011

0100

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

0BDf

ffff

Add the contents of the default working register WREG to the contents of
the file register, and place the result in the destination register. The
optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is
specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the
result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ADD.B

RAM100

Before
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM100 FFC0
SR
0000

Example 2:

ADD

After
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM100 FF40
SR
0005 (OV, C = 1)

RAM200, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM200 FFC0
SR 0000

DS70157E-page 100

; Add WREG to RAM100 (Byte mode)

; Add RAM200 to WREG (Word mode)

After
Instruction
WREG CC40
RAM200 FFC0
SR 0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

ADD

Add Literal to Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

kkkk

dddd

Syntax:

{label:}

ADD{.B}

Operands:

lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation

lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit10 + (Wn) Wn

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

1011

0000

#lit10,

0Bkk

Add the 10-bit unsigned literal operand to the contents of the working
register Wn, and place the result back into the working register Wn.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits specify the literal operand.
The d bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned
value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands
for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ADD.B

#0xFF, W7

Before
Instruction
W7 12C0
SR
0000

Example 2:

ADD

Before
Instruction
W1 12C0
SR
0000

; Add -1 to W7 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W7 12BF
SR 0009 (N, C = 1)

#0xFF, W1

; Add 255 to W1 (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W1 13BF
SR 0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 101

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

ADD

Add Wb to Short Literal

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

ADD{.B}

Wb,

#lit5,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) + lit5 Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

0100

0www

wBqq

qddd

d11k

kkkk

Add the contents of the base register Wb to the 5-bit unsigned short literal
operand, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register
direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

ADD.B

Before
Instruction
W0
2290
W7 12C0
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 102

W0, #0x1F, W7

; Add W0 and 31 (Byte mode)

; Store the result in W7

After
Instruction
W0 2290
W7 12AF
SR 0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

ADD

Before
Instruction
W3
6006
W4
1000
Data 0FFE DDEE
Data 1000 DDEE
SR
0000

W3, #0x6, [--W4]

; Add W3 and 6 (Word mode)

; Store the result in [--W4]

After
Instruction
W3 6006
W4 0FFE
Data 0FFE 600C
Data 1000 DDEE
SR 0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 103

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

ADD

Add Wb to Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

ADD{.B}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) + (Ws) Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

0100

0www

Wb,

Ws,

wBqq

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

qddd

dppp

ssss

Add the contents of the source register Ws and the contents of the base
register Wb, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register
direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ADD.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W5, W6, W7

Before
Instruction
W5
AB00
W6
0030
W7
FFFF
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 104

; Add W5 to W6, store result in W7

; (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W5
AB00
W6
0030
W7
FF30
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

ADD

Before
Instruction
W5
AB00
W6
0030
W7
FFFF
SR
0000

W5, W6, W7

; Add W5 to W6, store result in W7

; (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W5
AB00
W6
0030
W7
AB30
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 105

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

ADD

Add Accumulators

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Acc [A,B]

Operation:

If (Acc = A):
(ACCA) + (ACCB) ACCA
Else:
(ACCA) + (ACCB) ACCB

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:

ADD

PIC24E

1100

Description:

1011

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0000

Acc

A000

Add the contents of Accumulator A to the contents of Accumulator B and

place the result in the selected accumulator. This instruction performs a
40-bit addition.
The A bit specifies the destination accumulator.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ADD

ACCA
ACCB
SR
Example 2:

ADD

ACCA
ACCB
SR

DS70157E-page 106

Before
Instruction
00 0022 3300
00 1833 4558
0000
B

Before
Instruction
00 E111 2222
00 7654 3210
0000

; Add ACCB to ACCA

ACCA
ACCB
SR

After
Instruction
00 1855 7858
00 1833 4558
0000

; Add ACCA to ACCB

; Assume Super Saturation mode enabled
; (ACCSAT = 1, SATA = 1, SATB = 1)

ACCA
ACCB
SR

After
Instruction
00 E111 2222
01 5765 5432
4800 (OB, OAB = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

ADD

16-bit Signed Add to Accumulator

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

{label:}

PIC24H

ADD

PIC24E

Ws,

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

rggg

ssss

{#Slit4,}

Acc

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[--Ws],
[++Ws],
[Ws+Wb],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wb [W0 ... W15]
Slit4 [-8 ... +7]
Acc [A,B]

Operation:

ShiftSlit4(Extend(Ws)) + (Acc) Acc

Status Affected: OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:
Description:

1100

1001

Awww

wrrr

Add a 16-bit value specified by the source working register to the most
significant word of the selected accumulator. The source operand may
specify the direct contents of a working register or an effective address. The
value specified is added to the most significant word of the accumulator by
sign-extending and zero backfilling the source operand prior to the operation.
The value added to the accumulator may also be shifted by a 4-bit signed
literal before the addition is made.
The A bit specifies the destination accumulator.
The w bits specify the offset register Wb.
The r bits encode the optional shift.
The g bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits specify the source register Ws.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ADD

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

W0, #2, A

Before
Instruction
8000
00 7000 0000
0000

; Add W0 right-shifted by 2 to ACCA

W0
ACCA
SR

After
Instruction
8000
00 5000 0000
0000

Instruction
Descriptions

W0
ACCA
SR

Positive values of operand Slit4 represent an arithmetic shift right

and negative values of operand Slit4 represent an arithmetic shift
left. The contents of the source register are not affected by Slit4.

DS70157E-page 107

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

ADD

W5
ACCA
Data 2000
SR

DS70157E-page 108

[W5++], A

Before
Instruction
2000
00 0067 2345
5000
0000

; Add the effective value of W5 to ACCA

; Post-increment W5

W5
ACCA
Data 2000
SR

After
Instruction
2002
00 5067 2345
5000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

ADDC

Add f to WREG with Carry

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) + (WREG) + (C) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

1011

ADDC{.B} f

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0100

ffff

{,WREG}

1BDf

ffff

Add the contents of the default working register WREG, the contents of
the file register and the Carry bit and place the result in the destination
register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination
register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is
not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ADDC.B

RAM100

; Add WREG and C bit to RAM100

; (Byte mode)

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG CC60
WREG CC60
RAM100
8006
RAM100 8067
SR
0001 (C=1)
SR 0000
Example 2:

ADDC

RAM200, WREG

; Add RAM200 and C bit to the WREG

; (Word mode)

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG
5600
WREG 8A01
RAM200
3400
RAM200 3400
SR
0001 (C=1)
SR 000C (N, OV = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 109

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

ADDC

Add Literal to Wn with Carry

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

kkkk

dddd

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation

lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit10 + (Wn) + (C) Wn

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

1011

ADDC{.B}

0000

#lit10,

1Bkk

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Add the 10-bit unsigned literal operand, the contents of the working
register Wn and the Carry bit, and place the result back into the working
register Wn.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits specify the literal operand.
The d bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an
unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal
Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in
Byte mode.
3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ADDC.B

#0xFF, W7

Before
Instruction
W7 12C0
SR
0000 (C = 0)

Example 2:

ADDC

#0xFF, W1

Before
Instruction
W1 12C0
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 110

; Add -1 and C bit to W7 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W7 12BF
SR 0009 (N,C = 1)

; Add 255 and C bit to W1 (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W1 13C0
SR 0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

ADDC

Add Wb to Short Literal with Carry

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

ADDC{.B}

Wb,

#lit5,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) + lit5 + (C) Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

0100

1www

wBqq

qddd

d11k

kkkk

Add the contents of the base register Wb, the 5-bit unsigned short literal
operand and the Carry bit, and place the result in the destination register
Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ADDC.B

W0, #0x1F, [W7]

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W0 CC80
W7 12C0
Data 12C0 B09F
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W0 CC80
W7
12C0
Data 12C0
B000
SR
0000 (C = 0)

; Add W0, 31 and C bit (Byte mode)

; Store the result in [W7]

DS70157E-page 111

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

ADDC

W3, #0x6, [--W4]

Before
Instruction
W3 6006
W4 1000
Data 0FFE DDEE
Data 1000 DDEE
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 112

W3
W4
Data 0FFE
Data 1000
SR

; Add W3, 6 and C bit (Word mode)

; Store the result in [--W4]

After
Instruction
6006
0FFE
600D
DDEE
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

ADDC

Add Wb to Ws with Carry

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

ADDC{.B}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) + (Ws) + (C) Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

0100

Wb,

1www

Ws,

wBqq

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X
Wd

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

qddd

dppp

ssss

Add the contents of the source register Ws, the contents of the base
register Wb and the Carry bit, and place the result in the destination
register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either
register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ADDC.B

W0,[W1++],[W2++]

; Add W0, [W1] and C bit (Byte mode)

; Store the result in [W2]
; Post-increment W1, W2

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0 CC20
W0 CC20
W1 0800
W1 0801
W2 1000
W2 1001
Data 0800 AB25
Data 0800 AB25
Data 1000 FFFF
Data 1000 FF46
SR 0001 (C = 1)
SR 0000

Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 113

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

ADDC

W3,[W2++],[W1++]

; Add W3, [W2] and C bit (Word mode)

; Store the result in [W1]
; Post-increment W1, W2

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W1 1000
W1
1002
W2 2000
W2
2002
W3 0180
W3
0180
Data 1000 8000
Data 1000
2681
Data 2000 2500
Data 2000
2500
SR 0001 (C = 1)
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 114

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

AND

AND f and WREG

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f).AND.(WREG) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:
Description:

AND{.B}

1011

0110

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

0BDf

ffff

Compute the logical AND operation of the contents of the default working
register WREG and the contents of the file register, and place the result in
the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG.
If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

AND.B

RAM100

Before
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM100 FFC0
SR
0000
Example 2:

AND

RAM200, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM200 12C0
SR
0000

; AND WREG to RAM100 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
WREG CC80
RAM100 FF80
SR 0008 (N = 1)
; AND RAM200 to WREG (Word mode)

After
Instruction
WREG 0080
RAM200 12C0
SR 0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 115

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

AND

AND Literal and Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

kkkk

dddd

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation

lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit10.AND.(Wn) Wn

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:
Description:

AND{.B}

1011

0010

#lit10,

0Bkk

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Compute the logical AND operation of the 10-bit literal operand and the
contents of the working register Wn and place the result back into the
working register Wn. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits specify the literal operand.
The d bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned
value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte
mode.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

AND.B

#0x83, W7

Before
Instruction
W7 12C0
SR
0000
Example 2:

AND

#0x333, W1

Before
Instruction
W1 12D0
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 116

; AND 0x83 to W7 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W7
1280
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; AND 0x333 to W1 (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W1
0210
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

AND

AND Wb and Short Literal

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

AND{.B}

Wb,

#lit5,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb).AND.lit5 Wd

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

0110

Description:

0www

wBqq

qddd

d11k

kkkk

Compute the logical AND operation of the contents of the base register
Wb and the 5-bit literal and place the result in the destination register Wd.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

AND.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W0,#0x3,[W1++]

Before
Instruction
W0 23A5
W1
2211
Data 2210
9999
SR
0000
AND

Before
Instruction
W0
6723
W1
7878
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W0 23A5
W1 2212
Data 2210 0199
SR 0000

W0,#0x1F,W1

; AND W0 and 0x1F (Word mode)

; Store to W1

After
Instruction
W0 6723
W1 0003
SR 0000

DS70157E-page 117

Instruction
Descriptions

Example 2:

; AND W0 and 0x3 (Byte mode)

; Store to [W1]
; Post-increment W1

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

AND

And Wb and Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

AND{.B}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb).AND.(Ws) Wd

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

0110

Description:

Wb,

0www

wBqq

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

qddd

dppp

ssss

Compute the logical AND operation of the contents of the source register
Ws and the contents of the base register Wb, and place the result in the
destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

AND.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W0, W1 [W2++]

Before
Instruction
W0 AA55
W1
2211
W2
1001
Data 1000 FFFF
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 118

; AND W0 and W1, and

; store to [W2] (Byte mode)
; Post-increment W2

After
Instruction
W0 AA55
W1
2211
W2
1002
Data 1000
11FF
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

AND

W0, [W1++], W2 ; AND W0 and [W1], and

; store to W2 (Word mode)
; Post-increment W1

Before
Instruction
W0
AA55
W1
1000
W2
55AA
Data 1000
2634
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W0
AA55
W1
1002
W2
2214
Data 1000
2634
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 119

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

ASR

Arithmetic Shift Right f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

ASR{.B}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

For byte operation:

(f<7>) Dest<7>
(f<7>) Dest<6>
(f<6:1>) Dest<5:0>
(f<0>) C
For word operation:
(f<15>) Dest<15>
(f<15>) Dest<14>
(f<14:1>) Dest<13:0>
(f<0>) C

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

Status Affected:

N, Z, C

Encoding:

1101

Description:

0101

1BDf

ffff

Shift the contents of the file register one bit to the right and place the result
in the destination register. The Least Significant bit of the file register is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS Register. After the shift is performed, the result is sign-extended. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in
WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ASR.B

RAM400, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG
0600
RAM400
0823
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 120

; ASR RAM400 and store to WREG

; (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
WREG
0611
RAM400
0823
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

ASR

RAM200

Before
Instruction
RAM200
8009
SR
0000

; ASR RAM200 (Word mode)

After
Instruction
RAM200 C004
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 121

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

ASR

Arithmetic Shift Right Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

ASR{.B}

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

(Ws<7>) Wd<7>
(Ws<7>) Wd<6>
(Ws<6:1>) Wd<5:0>
(Ws<0>) C
For word operation:
(Ws<15>) Wd<15>
(Ws<15>) Wd<14>
(Ws<14:1>) Wd<13:0>
(Ws<0>) C

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Status Affected:

N, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

1101

0001

1Bqq

qddd

Shift the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right and place the
result in the destination register Wd. The Least Significant bit of Ws is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register. After the shift is performed,
the result is sign-extended. Either register direct or indirect addressing may
be used for Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

DS70157E-page 122

Words:

Cycles:

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 1:

ASR.B

[W0++], [W1++]

Before
Instruction
W0
0600
W1
0801
Data 600
2366
Data 800
FFC0
SR
0000

Example 2:

ASR

W12, W13

Before
Instruction
W12 AB01
W13
0322
SR
0000

; ASR [W0] and store to [W1]

(Byte mode)
; Post-increment W0 and W1

After
Instruction
W0
0601
W1
0802
Data 600
2366
Data 800 33C0
SR
0000

; ASR W12 and store to W13

(Word mode)

After
Instruction
W12 AB01
W13 D580
SR 0009 (N, C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 123

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

ASR

Arithmetic Shift Right by Short Literal

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit4 [0...15]
Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit4<3:0> Shift_Val
Wb<15> Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1>
Wb<15:Shift_Val> Wnd<15-Shift_Val:0>

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

1101

Description:

ASR

1110

Wb,

1www

#lit4,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

d100

kkkk

Wnd

wddd

Arithmetic shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 4-bit
unsigned literal, and store the result in the destination register Wnd. After
the shift is performed, the result is sign-extended. Direct addressing must
be used for Wb and Wnd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ASR

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

W0, #0x4, W1

Before
Instruction
W0
060F
W1
1234
SR
0000
Example 2:

ASR

W0, #0x6, W1

Before
Instruction
W0
80FF
W1
0060
SR
0000
Example 3:

ASR

W0, #0xF, W1

Before
Instruction
W0
70FF
W1 CC26
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 124

; ASR W0 by 4 and store to W1

After
Instruction
W0 060F
W1
0060
SR
0000
; ASR W0 by 6 and store to W1

After
Instruction
W0 80FF
W1 FE03
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; ASR W0 by 15 and store to W1

After
Instruction
W0
70FF
W1
0000
SR
0002 (Z = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

ASR

Arithmetic Shift Right by Wns

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wns [W0 ...W15]
Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

Wns<3:0> Shift_Val
Wb<15> Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1>
Wb<15:Shift_Val> Wnd<15-Shift_Val:0>

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

ASR

1101

1110

Wb,

Wns,

1www

wddd

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

d000

ssss

Wnd

Description:

Arithmetic shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 4 Least
Significant bits of Wns (up to 15 positions) and store the result in the
destination register Wnd. After the shift is performed, the result is
sign-extended. Direct addressing must be used for Wb, Wns and Wnd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the destination register.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: If Wns is greater than 15, Wnd = 0x0 if Wb is positive, and
Wnd = 0xFFFF if Wb is negative.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ASR

W0, W5, W6

Before
Instruction
W0
80FF
W5
0004
W6
2633
SR
0000
Example 2:

ASR

W0, W5, W6

Before
Instruction
W0
6688
W5
000A
W6
FF00
SR
0000

; ASR W0 by W5 and store to W6

After
Instruction
W0
80FF
W5
0004
W6
F80F
SR
0000
; ASR W0 by W5 and store to W6

After
Instruction
W0
6688
W5
000A
W6
0019
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 125

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 3:

ASR

W11, W12, W13

Before
Instruction
W11
8765
W12
88E4
W13
A5A5
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 126

; ASR W11 by W12 and store to W13

After
Instruction
W11
8765
W12
88E4
W13
F876
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BCLR

Bit Clear f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation

f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 [0 ... 15] for byte operation

Operation:

0 f<bit4>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1010

Description:

BCLR{.B}

1001

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

fffb

#bit4

bbbf

ffff

Clear the bit in the file register f specified by bit4. Bit numbering begins
with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant
bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations).
The b bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be cleared.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be
between 0 and 7.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BCLR.B 0x800, #0x7

Before
Instruction
Data 0800
66EF
SR
0000
Example 2:

BCLR

After
Instruction
Data 0800
666F
SR
0000

0x400, #0x9

Before
Instruction
Data 0400
AA55
SR
0000

; Clear bit 7 in 0x800

; Clear bit 9 in 0x400

After
Instruction
Data 0400
A855
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 127

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BCLR

Bit Clear in Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0B00

0ppp

ssss

{label:}

BCLR{.B}

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

#bit4

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation

Operation:

0 Ws<bit4>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1010

0001

bbbb

Clear the bit in register Ws specified by bit4. Bit numbering begins with
the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit
7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The b bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be cleared.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The s bits select the source/destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the source
register address must be word-aligned.
3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be
between 0 and 7.
4: In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, this instruction uses the
DSRPAG register for indirect address generation in Extended
Data Space.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BCLR.B W2, #0x2

Before
Instruction
W2
F234
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 128

; Clear bit 3 in W2

After
Instruction
W2
F230
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

BCLR

[W0++], #0x0

Before
Instruction
W0
2300
Data 2300
5607
SR
0000

; Clear bit 0 in [W0]

; Post-increment W0

After
Instruction
W0
2302
Data 2300
5606
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 129

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA

Branch Unconditionally

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

BRA

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0011

Expr

0111

nnnn

Description:

The program will branch unconditionally, relative to the next PC. The offset
of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports
branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is
resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or
expression. After the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 *
Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of program words
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

2 (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F)

4 (PIC24E, dsPIC33E)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008
00200A THERE:
00200C

PC
SR
Example 2:

DS70157E-page 130

THERE
.
.
.
.
.
.

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000

002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008
00200A THERE:
00200C

PC
SR

BRA
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000

; Branch to THERE

After
Instruction
PC
00 200A
SR
0000
BRA
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

THERE+0x2
.
.
.
.
.
.

; Branch to THERE+0x2

After
Instruction
PC
00 200C
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 3:

002000 HERE:
002002
002004

PC
SR

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000

BRA 0x1366
. . .
. . .

; Branch to 0x1366

After
Instruction
PC
00 1366
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 131

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA

Computed Branch

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(PC + 2) + (2 * Wn) PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

BRA

PIC24E

0000

Description:

0001

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0000

0110

ssss

The program branches unconditionally, relative to the next PC. The offset
of the branch is the sign-extended 17-bit value (2 * Wn), which supports
branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. After this instruction
executes, the new PC will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Wn, since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next instruction.
The s bits select the source register.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
...
...
002108
00210A TABLE7:
00210C

PC
W7
SR

DS70157E-page 132

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0084
0000

.
.
.
.
.
.

BRA W7
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

; Branch forward (2+2*W7)

After
Instruction
PC
00 210A
W7
0084
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BRA

Computed Branch

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(PC + 2) + (2 * Wn) PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

BRA

0000

Description:

0001

0000

0110

0000

ssss

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
...
...
002108
00210A TABLE7:
00210C

PC
W7
SR

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0084
0000

.
.
.
.
.
.

BRA W7
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

; Branch forward (2+2*W7)

After
Instruction
PC
00 210A
W7
0084
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 133

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA C

Branch if Carry

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = C
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Description:

0011

0001

Syntax:

Encoding:

BRA

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Expr

nnnn

If the Carry flag bit is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC.
The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which
supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16
value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or
expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the
PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then
becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle.
The n bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from (PC + 2) in
instruction words.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000
002002
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C
00200E

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 134

HERE:
NO_C:

CARRY:
THERE:

BRA C, CARRY
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)

; If C is set, branch to CARRY

; Otherwise... continue

PC
SR

After
Instruction
00 2008
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

002000
002002
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C
00200E

PC
SR
Example 3:

Example 4:

CARRY:
THERE:

HERE:
NO_C:

CARRY:
THERE:

; If C is set, branch to CARRY

; Otherwise... continue

PC
SR
BRA C, CARRY
...
...
GOTO THERE
...
...
...
...

Before
Instruction
00 6230
0001 (C = 1)

006230 START:
006232
006234 CARRY:
006236
006238
00623A
00623C HERE:
00623E

PC
SR

BRA C, CARRY
...
...
GOTO THERE
...
...
...
...

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000

006230
006232
006234
006236
006238
00623A
00623C
00623E

PC
SR

HERE:
NO_C:

; If C is set, branch to CARRY

; Otherwise... continue

PC
SR

...
...
...
...
...
...
BRA C, CARRY
...

Before
Instruction
00 623C
0001 (C = 1)

After
Instruction
00 2002
0000

After
Instruction
00 6238
0001 (C = 1)

; If C is set, branch to CARRY

; Otherwise... continue

PC
SR

After
Instruction
00 6234
0001 (C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 135

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA GE

Branch if Signed Greater Than or Equal

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = (N&&OV)||(!N&&!OV)
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

GE,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

1101

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the logical expression (N&&OV)||(!N&&!OV) is true, then the program

will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos
complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K
instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the
linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from (PC + 2)
in instruction words.
Note:

The assembler will convert the specified label into the offset to
be used.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

007600 LOOP:
007602
007604
007606
007608 HERE:
00760A NO_GE:

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 136

Before
Instruction
00 7608
0000

. .
. .
. .
. .
BRA
. .

.
.
.
.
GE, LOOP
.

; If GE, branch to LOOP

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
PC
00 7600
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

007600 LOOP:
007602
007604
007606
007608 HERE:
00760A NO_GE:

PC
SR

. .
. .
. .
. .
BRA
. .

.
.
.
.
GE, LOOP
.

Before
Instruction
00 7608
0008 (N = 1)

; If GE, branch to LOOP

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
PC
00 760A
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 137

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA GEU

Branch if Unsigned Greater Than or Equal

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16 offset that supports an offset
range of [-32768 ... +32767] program words.

Operation:

Condition = C
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None
0011

Description:

0001

GEU,

Syntax:

Encoding:

BRA

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Carry flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next
PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 *
Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label,
absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16,
since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The
instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed
in the second cycle.
The n bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from
(PC + 2) in instruction words.
Note:

This instruction is identical to the BRA C, Expr (Branch if

Carry) instruction and has the same encoding. It will reverse
assemble as BRA C, Slit16.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_GEU:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 138

BRA GEU, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)

PC
SR

; If C is set, branch
; to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 200C
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BRA GT

Branch if Signed Greater Than

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = (!Z&&N&&OV)||(!Z&&!N&&!OV)
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

1100

GT,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the logical expression (!Z&&N&&OV)||(!Z&&!N&&!OV) is true, then the

program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the
twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K
instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the
linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from (PC + 2)
in instruction words.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_GT:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

BRA GT, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)

; If GT, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
PC
00 200C
SR
0001 (C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 139

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA GTU

Branch if Unsigned Greater Than

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = (C&&!Z)
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

1110

GTU,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the logical expression (C&&!Z) is true, then the program will branch
relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement
number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions
forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the
supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_GTU:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 140

BRA GTU, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)

PC
SR

; If GTU, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 200C
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BRA LE

Branch if Signed Less Than or Equal

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = Z||(N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV)
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

0100

LE,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the logical expression (Z||(N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV)) is true, then the

program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the
twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K
instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker
from the supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_LE:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

BRA LE, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)

PC
SR

; If LE, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 2002
0001 (C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 141

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA LEU

Branch if Unsigned Less Than or Equal

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = !C||Z
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

0110

LEU,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the logical expression (!C||Z) is true, then the program will branch
relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement
number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the
supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_LEU:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 142

BRA LEU, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)

PC
SR

; If LEU, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 200C
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BRA LT

Branch if Signed Less Than

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = (N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV)
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

0101

LT,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the logical expression ( (N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV) ) is true, then the program

will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos
complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K
instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the
linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_LT:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

BRA LT, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)

; If LT, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
PC
00 2002
SR
0001 (C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 143

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA LTU

Branch if Unsigned Less Than

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = !C
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

1001

LTU,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Carry flag is 0, then the program will branch relative to the next PC.
The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16,
which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The
Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute
address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Note:

This instruction is identical to the BRA NC, Expr (Branch if Not

Carry) instruction and has the same encoding. It will reverse
assemble as BRA NC, Slit16.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_LTU:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 144

BRA LTU, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)

PC
SR

; If LTU, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 2002
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BRA N

Branch if Negative

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = N
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register.

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

0011

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Negative flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next
PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16,
which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The
Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute
address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_N:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

BRA N, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0008 (N = 1)

PC
SR

; If N, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 200C
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 145

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA NC

Branch if Not Carry

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = !C
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

1001

NC,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Carry flag is 0, then the program will branch relative to the next PC.
The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which
supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16
value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or
expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_NC:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 146

BRA NC, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0001 (C = 1)

PC
SR

; If NC, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 2002
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BRA NN

Branch if Not Negative

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = !N
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

1011

NN,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Negative flag is 0, then the program will branch relative to the next
PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16,
which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The
Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute
address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_NN:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000

BRA NN, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

PC
SR

; If NN, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 200C
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 147

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA NOV

Branch if Not Overflow

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = !OV
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

1000

NOV,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Overflow flag is 0, then the program will branch relative to the next
PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16,
which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The
Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute
address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_NOV:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 148

BRA NOV, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0008 (N = 1)

PC
SR

; If NOV, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 200C
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BRA NZ

Branch if Not Zero

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = !Z
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

1010

NZ,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Z flag is 0, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The
offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which
supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16
value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or
expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_NZ:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

BRA NZ, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0002 (Z = 1)

PC
SR

; If NZ, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 2002
0002 (Z = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 149

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA OA

Branch if Overflow Accumulator A

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = OA
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

BRA

1100

OA,

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Overflow Accumulator A flag is 1, then the program will branch

relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement
number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions
forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the
supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
Note:

The assembler will convert the specified label into the offset to
be used.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_OA:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 150

BRA OA, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
PC
8800 (OA, OAB = 1) SR

; If OA, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 200C
8800 (OA, OAB = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BRA OB

Branch if Overflow Accumulator B

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = OB
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

BRA

1101

OB,

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Overflow Accumulator B flag is 1, then the program will branch

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_OB:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

BRA OB, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
PC
8800 (OA, OAB = 1) SR

; If OB, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 2002
8800 (OA, OAB = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 151

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA OV

Branch if Overflow

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = OV
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0011

Description:

BRA

0000

OV,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Overflow flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next
PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16,
which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The
Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute
address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_OV
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 152

BRA OV, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0002 (Z = 1)

PC
SR

; If OV, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 2002
0002 (Z = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BRA SA

Branch if Saturation Accumulator A

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = SA
If (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

BRA

1110

SA,

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Saturation Accumulator A flag is 1, then the program will branch

relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement
number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression.
If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_SA:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

BRA SA, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
PC
2400 (SA, SAB = 1) SR

; If SA, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 200C
2400 (SA, SAB = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 153

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BRA SB

Branch if Saturation Accumulator B

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

Condition = SB
if (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

BRA

1111

SB,

nnnn

Expr

nnnn

If the Saturation Accumulator B flag is 1, then the program will branch

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 if branch taken) dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F

1 (4 if branch taken) dsPIC33E

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_SB:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 154

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000

BRA SB, BYPASS

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

PC
SR

; If SB, branch to BYPASS

; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 2002
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BRA Z

Branch if Zero

Implemented in:

PIC24F
X

PIC24H
X

dsPIC33F
X

dsPIC33E
X

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where
Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].
Condition = Z
if (Condition)
(PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC
NOP Instruction Register
None
0011
0010
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
If the Zero flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC.
The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which
supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16
value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or
expression.

Status Affected:
Encoding:
Description:

dsPIC30F
X

Syntax:

Operation:

BRA

PIC24E
X

Expr

If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since
the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction
then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second
cycle.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions
offset from (PC + 2).
1
1 (2 if branch taken) PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F
1 (4 if branch taken) PIC24E, dsPIC33E

Words:
Cycles:

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002 NO_Z:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C BYPASS:
00200E

PC
SR

BRA Z, BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
GOTO THERE
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0002 (Z = 1)

PC
SR

; If Z, branch to BYPASS
; Otherwise... continue

After
Instruction
00 200C
0002 (Z = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 155

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BSET

Bit Set f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation

f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation

Operation:

1 f<bit4>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1010

Description:

BSET{.B}

1000

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

fffb

#bit4

bbbf

ffff

Set the bit in the file register f specified by bit4. Bit numbering begins
with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant
bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations).
The b bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be set.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be
between 0 and 7.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BSET.B

0x601, #0x3

Before
Instruction
Data 0600
F234
SR
0000
Example 2:

BSET

DS70157E-page 156

After
Instruction
Data 0600 FA34
SR
0000

0x444, #0xF

Before
Instruction
Data 0444
5604
SR
0000

; Set bit 3 in 0x601

; Set bit 15 in 0x444

After
Instruction
Data 0444 D604
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BSET

Bit Set in Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0B00

0ppp

ssss

{label:}

BSET{.B}

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

#bit4

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation

Operation:

1 Ws<bit4>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1010

0000

bbbb

Set the bit in register Ws specified by bit4. Bit numbering begins with the
Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7
for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). Register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Ws.
The b bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be cleared.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source/destination register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the source
register address must be word-aligned.
3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be
between 0 and 7.
4: In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, this instruction uses the
DSRPAG register for indirect address generation in Extended
Data Space.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BSET.B W3, #0x7

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W3 00A6
SR
0000

Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W3
0026
SR
0000

; Set bit 7 in W3

DS70157E-page 157

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

BSET

[W4++], #0x0

Before
Instruction
W4
6700
Data 6700
1734
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 158

; Set bit 0 in [W4]

; Post-increment W4

After
Instruction
W4
6702
Data 6700
1735
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BSW

Bit Write in Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

BSW.C

w000

0ppp

ssss

BSW.Z

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For .C operation:
C Ws<(Wb)>
For .Z operation (default):
Z Ws<(Wb)>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1010

1101

Zwww

The (Wb) bit in register Ws is written with the value of the C or Z flag from
the STATUS register. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit
(bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the working
register. Only the four Least Significant bits of Wb are used to determine
the destination bit number. Register direct addressing must be used for
Wb, and either register direct, or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The Z bit selects the C or Z flag as source.
The w bits select the address of the bit select register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BSW.C

W2, W3

This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is

provided, the .Z operation is assumed.

; Set bit W3 in W2 to the value

; of the C bit

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W2
F234
W2 7234
W3
111F
W3
111F
SR
0002 (Z = 1, C = 0) SR 0002 (Z = 1, C = 0)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 159

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

BSW.Z

W2, W3

; Set bit W3 in W2 to the complement

; of the Z bit

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W2
E235
W2
E234
W3
0550
W3
0550
SR
0002 (Z = 1, C = 0) SR
0002 (Z = 1, C = 0)
Example 3:

BSW.C

[++W0], W6

; Set bit W6 in [W0++] to the value

; of the C bit

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
1000
W0
1002
W6
34A3
W6 34A3
Data 1002
2380
Data 1002
2388
SR
0001 (Z = 0, C = 1) SR
0001 (Z = 0, C = 1)
Example 4:

BSW.Z [W1--], W5

; Set bit W5 in [W1] to the

; complement of the Z bit
; Post-decrement W1

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W1
1000
W1 0FFE
W5
888B
W5 888B
Data 1000 C4DD
Data 1000 CCDD
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 160

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BTG

Bit Toggle f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation

f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation

Operation:

(f)<bit4> (f)<bit4>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1010

Description:

BTG{.B}

1010

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

fffb

#bit4

bbbf

ffff

Bit bit4 in file register f is toggled (complemented). For the bit4

operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and
advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operation, bit 15 for
word operation) of the byte.
The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to toggle.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be
between 0 and 7.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BTG.B

0x1001, #0x4

Before
Instruction
Data 1000
F234
SR
0000
Example 2:

BTG

After
Instruction
Data 1000 E234
SR
0000

0x1660, #0x8

Before
Instruction
Data 1660
5606
SR
0000

; Toggle bit 4 in 0x1001

; Toggle bit 8 in RAM660

After
Instruction
Data 1660
5706
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 161

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BTG

Bit Toggle in Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0B00

0ppp

ssss

{label:}

BTG{.B}

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

#bit4

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation

Operation:

(Ws)<bit4> Ws<bit4>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1010

Description:

0010

bbbb

Bit bit4 in register Ws is toggled (complemented). For the bit4 operand,

bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to
the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word
operations). Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The s bits select the source/destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the source
register address must be word-aligned.
3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be
between 0 and 7.
4: In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, this instruction uses the
DSRPAG register for indirect address generation in Extended
Data Space.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BTG

W2, #0x0

Before
Instruction
W2
F234
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 162

; Toggle bit 0 in W2

After
Instruction
W2
F235
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

BTG

[W0++], #0x0

Before
Instruction
W0
2300
Data 2300
5606
SR
0000

; Toggle bit 0 in [W0]

; Post-increment W0

After
Instruction
W0
2302
Data 2300
5607
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 163

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BTSC

Bit Test f, Skip if Clear

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation

f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation

Operation:

Test (f)<bit4>, skip if clear

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1010

Description:

BTSC{.B}

1111

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

fffb

#bit4

bbbf

ffff

Bit bit4 in the file register is tested. If the tested bit is 0, the next
instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded
and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is 1,
the next instruction is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of
the file register are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering
begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most
Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations).
The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be
between 0 and 7.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A

PC
Data 1200
SR

DS70157E-page 164

Before
Instruction
00 2000
264F
0000

BTSC.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

0x1201, #2
BYPASS

; If bit 2 of 0x1201 is 0,
; skip the GOTO

After
Instruction
PC
00 2002
Data 1200
264F
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A

PC
Data 0804
SR

Before
Instruction
00 2000
2647
0000

BTSC
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

0x804, #14
BYPASS

; If bit 14 of 0x804 is 0,
; skip the GOTO

After
Instruction
PC
00 2006
Data 0804
2647
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 165

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BTSC

Bit Test Ws, Skip if Clear

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0000

0ppp

ssss

{label:}

BTSC

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

#bit4

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

bit4 [0 ... 15]

Operation:

Test (Ws)<bit4>, skip if clear

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1010

Description:

0111

bbbb

Bit bit4 in Ws is tested. If the tested bit is 0, the next instruction (fetched
during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next
cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is 1, the next instruction
is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of Ws are not changed.
For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit
(bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the word. Either
register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if the next instruction is skipped)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A

PC
W0
SR

DS70157E-page 166

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

Before
Instruction
00 2000
264F
0000

BTSC
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

W0, #0x0
BYPASS

; If bit 0 of W0 is 0,
; skip the GOTO

After
Instruction
PC
00 2002
W0
264F
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A

PC
W6
SR
Example 3:

Before
Instruction
00 2000
264F
0000

003400 HERE:
003402
003404
003406
003408 BYPASS:
00340A

PC
W6
Data 1800
SR

BTSC
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 3400
1800
1000
0000

W6, #0xF
BYPASS

PC
W6
SR
BTSC
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

; If bit 15 of W6 is 0,
; skip the GOTO

After
Instruction
00 2006
264F
0000

[W6++], #0xC
BYPASS

PC
W6
Data 1800
SR

; If bit 12 of [W6] is 0,
; skip the GOTO
; Post-increment W6

After
Instruction
00 3402
1802
1000
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 167

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BTSS

Bit Test f, Skip if Set

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation

f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation

Operation:

Test (f)<bit4>, skip if set

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

BTSS{.B}

1010

Description:

1110

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

fffb

#bit4

bbbf

ffff

Bit bit4 in the file register f is tested. If the tested bit is 1, the next
instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded
and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is 0, the
next instruction is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of the
file register are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins
with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant
bit (bit 7 for byte operation, bit 15 for word operation).
The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be
between 0 and 7.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if the next instruction is skipped)

Example 1:

007100 HERE:
007102
007104

PC
Data 1400
SR
Example 2:

DS70157E-page 168

Before
Instruction
00 7100
0280
0000

007100 HERE:
007102
007104
007106 BYPASS:

PC
Data 0890
SR

BTSS.B
CLR
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 7100
00FE
0000

0x1401, #0x1
WREG

PC
Data 1400
SR
BTSS
GOTO
. . .
. . .

After
Instruction
00 7104
0280
0000

0x890, #0x9
BYPASS

PC
Data 0890
SR

; If bit 1 of 0x1401 is 1,
; dont clear WREG

; If bit 9 of 0x890 is 1,
; skip the GOTO

After
Instruction
00 7102
00FE
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BTSS

Bit Test Ws, Skip if Set

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0000

0ppp

ssss

{label:}

BTSS

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

#bit4

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Ws [W0 ... W15]
bit4 [0 ... 15]

Operands:
Operation:

Test (Ws)<bit4>, skip if set.

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1010

Description:

0110

bbbb

Bit bit4 in Ws is tested. If the tested bit is 1, the next instruction (fetched
during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next
cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is 0, the next instruction
is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of Ws are not changed.
For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit
(bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the word. Either
register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The b bits select the value bit4, the bit position to test.
The s bits select the source register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
Note:

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if the next instruction is skipped)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A

PC
W0
SR

Before
Instruction
00 2000
264F
0000

BTSS
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

W0, #0x0
BYPASS

; If bit 0 of W0 is 1,
; skip the GOTO

After
Instruction
PC
00 2006
W0
264F
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 169

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A

PC
W6
SR
Example 3:

DS70157E-page 170

Before
Instruction
00 2000
264F
0000

003400 HERE:
003402
003404
003406
003408 BYPASS:
00340A

PC
W6
Data 1800
SR

BTSS
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 3400
1800
1000
0000

W6, #0xF
BYPASS

PC
W6
SR
BTSS
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

; If bit 15 of W6 is 1,
; skip the GOTO

After
Instruction
00 2002
264F
0000

[W6++], 0xC
BYPASS

PC
W6
Data 1800
SR

; If bit 12 of [W6] is 1,
; skip the GOTO
; Post-increment W6

After
Instruction
00 3406
1802
1000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BTST

Bit Test f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation

f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation

Operation:

(f)<bit4> Z

Status Affected:

Encoding:

1010

Description:

BTST{.B}

1011

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

fffb

#bit4

bbbf

ffff

Bit bit4 in file register f is tested and the complement of the tested bit is
stored to the Z flag in the STATUS register. The contents of the file
register are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with
the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit
(bit 7 for byte operation, bit 15 for word operation).
The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to be tested.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be
between 0 and 7.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BTST.B

0x1201, #0x3

Before
Instruction
Data 1200
F7FF
SR
0000
Example 2:

BTST

; Set Z = complement of
; bit 3 in 0x1201

After
Instruction
Data 1200 F7FF
SR
0002 (Z = 1)

0x1302, #0x7

; Set Z = complement of
; bit 7 in 0x1302

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
Data 1302
F7FF
Data 1302 F7FF
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR 0000

Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 171

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BTST

Bit Test in Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Z000

0ppp

ssss

{label:}

BTST.C

Ws,

BTST.Z

[Ws],

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

#bit4

[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

bit4 [0 ... 15]

Operation:

For .C operation:
(Ws)<bit4> C
For .Z operation (default):
(Ws)<bit4> Z

Status Affected:

Z or C

Encoding:
Description:

1010

0011

bbbb

Bit bit4 in register Ws is tested. If the .Z option of the instruction is

specified, the complement of the tested bit is stored to the Zero flag in the
STATUS register. If the .C option of the instruction is specified, the value
of the tested bit is stored to the Carry flag in the STATUS register. In either
case, the contents of Ws are not changed.
For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit
(bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the word. Either
register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test.
The Z bit selects the C or Z flag as destination.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BTST.C

This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is

provided, the .Z operation is assumed.

[W0++], #0x3

; Set C = bit 3 in [W0]

; Post-increment W0

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
1200
W0
1202
Data 1200
FFF7
Data 1200 FFF7
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 172

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

BTST.Z

W0, #0x7

Before
Instruction
W0
F234
SR
0000

; Set Z = complement of bit 7 in W0

After
Instruction
W0
F234
SR
0002 (Z = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 173

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BTST

Bit Test in Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

w000

0ppp

ssss

{label:}

BTST.C
BTST.Z

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For .C operation:
(Ws)<(Wb)> C
For .Z operation (default):
(Ws)<(Wb)> Z

Status Affected:

Z or C

Encoding:
Description:

1010

0101

Zwww

The (Wb) bit in register Ws is tested. If the .C option of the instruction is

specified, the value of the tested bit is stored to the Carry flag in the
STATUS register. If the .Z option of the instruction is specified, the
complement of the tested bit is stored to the Zero flag in the STATUS
register. In either case, the contents of Ws are not changed.
Only the four Least Significant bits of Wb are used to determine the bit
number. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and
advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the working register.
Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The Z bit selects the C or Z flag as destination.
The w bits select the address of the bit select register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BTST.C

This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is

provided, the .Z operation is assumed.

W2, W3

Before
Instruction
W2
F234
W3
2368
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 174

; Set C = bit W3 of W2

After
Instruction
W2 F234
W3 2368
SR 0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

BTST.Z

[W0++], W1

; Set Z = complement of
; bit W1 in [W0],
; Post-increment W0

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
1200
W0 1202
W1 CCC0
W1 CCC0
Data 1200
6243
Data 1200 6243
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR 0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 175

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

BTSTS

Bit Test/Set f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation

f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation
bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation
bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation

Operation:

(f)<bit4> Z
1 (f)<bit4>

Status Affected:

Encoding:

1010

Description:

BTSTS{.B} f,

1100

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

fffb

#bit4

bbbf

ffff

Bit bit4 in file register f is tested and the complement of the tested bit is
stored to the Zero flag in the STATUS register. The tested bit is then set
to 1 in the file register. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with
the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit
(bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations).
The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test/set.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register
address must be word-aligned.
3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be
between 0 and 7.
4: The file register f must not be the CPU Status (SR) register.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BTSTS.B

0x1201, #0x3 ; Set Z = complement of bit 3 in 0x1201,

; then set bit 3 of 0x1201 = 1

Before
Instruction
Data 1200
F7FF
SR
0000
Example 2:

BTSTS

After
Instruction
Data 1200 FFFF
SR
0002 (Z = 1)

0x808, #15

; Set Z = complement of bit 15 in 0x808,

; then set bit 15 of 0x808 = 1

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
RAM300
8050
RAM300
8050
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 176

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

BTSTS

Bit Test/Set in Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Z000

0ppp

ssss

{label:}

BTSTS.C
BTSTS.Z

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

#bit4

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

bit4 [0 ... 15]

Operation:

For .C operation:
(Ws)<bit4> C
1 Ws<bit4>
For .Z operation (default):
(Ws)<bit4> Z
1 Ws<bit4>

Status Affected:

Z or C

Encoding:
Description:

1010

0100

bbbb

Bit bit4 in register Ws is tested. If the .Z option of the instruction is

specified, the complement of the tested bit is stored to the Zero flag in the
STATUS register. If the .C option of the instruction is specified, the value
of the tested bit is stored to the Carry flag in the STATUS register. In both
cases, the tested bit in Ws is set to 1.
The b bits select the value bit4, the bit position to test/set.
The Z bit selects the C or Z flag as destination.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is
provided, the .Z operation is assumed.
2: If Ws is used as a pointer, it must not contain the address of the
CPU Status (SR) register.
3: In dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices, this instruction uses the
DSRPAG register for indirect address generation in Extended
Data Space.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

BTSTS.C

[W0++], #0x3

; Set C = bit 3 in [W0]

; Set bit 3 in [W0] = 1
; Post-increment W0

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
1200
W0
1202
Data 1200
FFF7
Data 1200
FFFF
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 177

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

BTSTS.Z

W0, #0x7

Before
Instruction
W0
F234
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 178

; Set Z = complement of bit 7

; in W0, and set bit 7 in W0 = 1

After
Instruction
W0 F2BC
SR
0002 (Z = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CALL

Call Subroutine

Implemented in:

PIC24F
X

PIC24H
X

dsPIC30F
X

dsPIC33F
X

dsPIC33E

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label or expression (but not a literal).

Expr is resolved by the linker to a lit23, where lit23 [0 ... 8388606].
(PC) + 4 PC
(PC<15:0>) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
(PC<23:16>) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
lit23 PC
NOP Instruction Register
None

Operation:

Status Affected:
Encoding:
1st word
2nd word
Description:

CALL

PIC24E

Expr

0000
0010
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnn0
0000
0000
0000
0000
0nnn
nnnn
Direct subroutine call over the entire 4-Mbyte instruction program
memory range. Before the CALL is made, the 24-bit return address
(PC + 4) is PUSHed onto the stack. After the return address is
stacked, the 23-bit value lit23 is loaded into the PC.
The n bits form the target address.
Note:

Words:
Cycles:

The linker will resolve the specified expression into the lit23 to
be used.

2
2

Example 1:

026000
026004
.
.
026844 _FIR:
026846

PC
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR

Before
Instruction
02 6000
A268
FFFF
FFFF
0000

CALL
MOV
...
...
MOV
...

_FIR
W0, W1

#0x400, W2

PC
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR

; Call _FIR subroutine

; _FIR subroutine start

After
Instruction
02 6844
A26C
6004
0002
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 179

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

072000
072004
.
077A28 _G66:
077A2A
077A2C

PC
W15
Data 9004
Data 9006
SR

DS70157E-page 180

Before
Instruction
07 2000
9004
FFFF
FFFF
0000

CALL
MOV
...
INC
...

_G66
W0, W1

; call routine _G66

W6, [W7++]

; routine start

PC
W15
Data 9004
Data 9006
SR

After
Instruction
07 7A28
9008
2004
0007
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CALL

Call Subroutine

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E
X

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be a label or expression (but not a literal).

Expr is resolved by the linker to a lit23, where lit23 [0 ... 8388606].
(PC) + 4 PC
(PC<15:1>) TOS<15:1>, SFA bit TOS<0>
(W15) + 2 W15
(PC<23:16>) TOS
(W15) + 2 W15
0 SFA bit
lit23 PC
NOP Instruction Register
SFA

Operation:

Status Affected:
Encoding:
1st word
2nd word
Description:

CALL

PIC24E
X
Expr

Words:
Cycles:

The linker will resolve the specified expression into the lit23 to
be used.

2
4

Example 1:

026000
026004
.
.
026844 _FIR:
026846

PC
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR

Before
Instruction
02 6000
A268
FFFF
FFFF
0000

CALL
MOV
...
...
MOV
...

_FIR
W0, W1

#0x400, W2

PC
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR

; Call _FIR subroutine

; _FIR subroutine start

After
Instruction
02 6844
A26C
6004
0002
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 181

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

072000
072004
.
077A28 _G66:
077A2A
077A2C

PC
W15
Data 9004
Data 9006
SR

DS70157E-page 182

Before
Instruction
07 2000
9004
FFFF
FFFF
0000

CALL
MOV
...
INC
...

_G66
W0, W1

; call routine _G66

W6, [W7++]

; routine start

PC
W15
Data 9004
Data 9006
SR

After
Instruction
07 7A28
9008
2004
0007
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CALL

Call Indirect Subroutine

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(PC) + 2 PC
(PC<15:0>) TOS
(W15) + 2 W15
(PC<23:16>) TOS
(W15) + 2 W15
0 PC<22:16>
(Wn<15:1>) PC<15:1>
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

CALL

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0000

0001

0000

ssss

Indirect subroutine call over the first 32K instructions of program memory.
Before the CALL is made, the 24-bit return address (PC + 2) is PUSHed
onto the stack. After the return address is stacked, Wn<15:1> is loaded
into PC<15:1> and PC<22:16> is cleared. Since PC<0> is always 0,
Wn<0> is ignored.
The s bits select the source register.

Words:

Cycles:

Example
1:

001002
001004
.
001600 _BOOT:
001602
.

PC
W0
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR

Before
Instruction
00 1002
1600
6F00
FFFF
FFFF
0000

CALL W0
...
...
MOV #0x400, W2
MOV #0x300, W6
...

PC
W0
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR

; Call BOOT subroutine indirectly

; using W0
; _BOOT starts here

After
Instruction
00 1600
1600
6F04
1004
0000
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 183

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

004200
004202
.
005500 _TEST:
005502
.

PC
W7
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR

DS70157E-page 184

Before
Instruction
00 4200
5500
6F00
FFFF
FFFF
0000

CALL
...
...
INC
DEC
...

; Call TEST subroutine indirectly

; using W7

W1, W2
W1, W3

; _TEST starts here

;

PC
W7
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR

After
Instruction
00 5500
5500
6F04
4202
0000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CALL

Call Indirect Subroutine

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(PC) + 2 PC
(PC<15:1>) TOS, SFA bit TOS<0>
(W15) + 2 W15
(PC<23:16>) TOS
(W15) + 2 W15
0 SFA bit
0 PC<22:16>
(Wn<15:1>) PC<15:1>
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

SFA

Encoding:

0000

Description:

CALL

0001

0000

ssss

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

001002
001004
.
001600 _BOOT:
001602
.

PC
W0
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR

Before
Instruction
00 1002
1600
6F00
FFFF
FFFF
0000

CALL W0
...
...
MOV #0x400, W2
MOV #0x300, W6
...

PC
W0
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR

; Call BOOT subroutine indirectly

; using W0
; _BOOT starts here

After
Instruction
00 1600
1600
6F04
1004
0000
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 185

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

004200
004202
.
005500 _TEST:
005502
.

PC
W7
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR

DS70157E-page 186

Before
Instruction
00 4200
5500
6F00
FFFF
FFFF
0000

CALL
...
...
INC
DEC
...

; Call TEST subroutine indirectly

; using W7

W1, W2
W1, W3

; _TEST starts here

;

PC
W7
W15
Data 6F00
Data 6F02
SR

After
Instruction
00 5500
5500
6F04
4202
0000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CALL.L

Call Indirect Subroutine Long

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E
X

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:
Operation:

Wn [W0, W2, W4, W6, W8, W10, W12]

(PC) +2 PC,
(PC<15:1>) TOS<15:1>, SFA bit TOS<0>
(W15)+2 W15
(PC<23:16>) TOS,
(W15)+2 W15
0 SFA bit,
PC<23> PC<23> (see text); (Wn+1)<6:0> PC<22:16>; (Wn)
PC<15:0>
NOP Instruction Register
SFA
0000
0001
1www
w000
0000
ssss
Indirect subroutine call to any User program memory address. First, return
address (PC+2) and the state of the Stack Frame Active (SFA) bit is
pushed onto the system stack, after which the SFA bit is cleared.
Then, the LS 7-bits of (Wn+1) are loaded in PC<22:16>, and the 16-bit
value (Wn) is loaded into PC<15:0>.
PC<23> is not modified by this instruction.
The contents of (Wn+1)<15:7> are ignored.
The value of Wn<0> is also ignored and PC<0> is always set to 0.
The s bits specify the address of the Wn source register.
The w bits specify the address of the Wn+1 source register.

Status Affected:
Encoding:
Description:

Words:
Cycles:

CALL.L

PIC24E
X
Wn

1
4

Example 1:

026000
026004
.
.
026844 _FIR:
026846

PC
W4
W5
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR

Before
Instruction
02 6000
6844
0002
A268
FFFF
FFFF
0000

CALL.L W4
MOV
W0, W1
...
...
MOV
#0x400, W2
...

PC
W4
W5
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR

; Call _FIR subroutine

; _FIR subroutine start

After
Instruction
02 6844
6844
0002
A26C
6004
0002
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 187

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CLR

Clear f or WREG

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

ffff

{label:}

CLR{.B}

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

f
WREG

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

0 destination designated by D

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1110

1111

0BDf

Clear the contents of a file register or the default working register WREG.
If WREG is specified, the WREG is cleared. Otherwise, the specified file
register f is cleared.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CLR.B

RAM200

Before
Instruction
RAM200 8009
SR 0000
Example 2:

CLR

WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG
0600
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 188

; Clear RAM200 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
RAM200 8000
SR 0000
; Clear WREG (Word mode)

After
Instruction
WREG
0000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CLR

Clear Wd

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

qddd

d000

0000

{label:}

CLR{.B}

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

0 Wd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1110

Description:

1011

0Bqq

Clear the contents of register Wd. Either register direct or indirect

addressing may be used for Wd.
The B bit select byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CLR.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Before
Instruction
W2 3333
SR 0000
Example 2:

CLR

[W0++]

Before
Instruction
W0
2300
Data 2300
5607
SR
0000

; Clear W2 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W2 3300
SR 0000
; Clear [W0]
; Post-increment W0

After
Instruction
W0
2302
Data 2300
0000
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 189

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CLR

Clear Accumulator, Prefetch Operands

Implemented in:

Syntax:
{label:}

PIC24F

CLR

PIC24H

Acc

PIC24E

{,[Wx],Wxd}

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

{,[Wy],Wyd}

{,AWB}

{,[Wx] + = kx,Wxd} {,[Wy] + = ky,Wyd}

{,[Wx] = kx,Wxd} {,[Wy] = ky,Wyd}
{,[W9 + W12],Wxd} {,[W11 + W12],Wyd}
Operands:

Acc [A,B]
Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7]
Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7]
AWB [W13, [W13] + = 2]

Operation:

0 Acc(A or B)
([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) +/ kx Wx
([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) +/ ky Wy
(Acc(B or A)) rounded AWB

Status Affected:

OA, OB, SA, SB

Encoding:
Description:

1100

0011

A0xx

yyii

iijj

jjaa

Clear all 40 bits of the specified accumulator, optionally prefetch

operands in preparation for a MAC type instruction and optionally store
the non-specified accumulator results. This instruction clears the respective overflow and saturate flags (either OA, SA or OB, SB).
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations,
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in
Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. Operand AWB specifies the optional
register direct or indirect store of the convergently rounded contents of
the other accumulator, as described in Section 4.14.4 MAC Write
Back.
The A bit selects the other accumulator used for write back.
The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
The a bits select the accumulator Write Back destination.

DS70157E-page 190

Words:

Cycles:

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 1:

CLR

W4
W8
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
SR
Example
2:

CLR

W6
W7
W8
W10
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
Data 3000
Data 4000
SR

A, [W8]+=2, W4, W13

Before
Instruction
F001
2000
C623
00 0067 2345
00 5420 3BDD
1221
0000

; Clear ACCA
; Load W4 with [W8], post-inc W8
; Store ACCB to W13

W4
W8
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
SR

After
Instruction
1221
2002
5420
00 0000 0000
00 5420 3BDD
1221
0000

B, [W8]+=2, W6, [W10]+=2, W7, [W13]+=2

Before
Instruction
F001
C783
2000
3000
4000
00 0067 2345
00 5420 ABDD
1221
FF80
FFC3
0000

W6
W7
W8
W10
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
Data 3000
Data 4000
SR

;
;
;
;
;

Clear ACCB
Load W6 with [W8]
Load W7 with [W10]
Save ACCA to [W13]
Post-inc W8,W10,W13

After
Instruction
1221
FF80
2002
3002
4002
00 0067 2345
00 0000 0000
1221
FF80
0067
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 191

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CLRWDT

Clear Watchdog Timer

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0110

0000

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

0 WDT count register

0 WDT prescaler A count
0 WDT prescaler B count

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1111

CLRWDT

1110

Description:

Clear the contents of the Watchdog Timer count register and the
prescaler count registers. The Watchdog Prescaler A and Prescaler B
settings, set by configuration fuses in the FWDT, are not changed.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CLRWDT

Before
Instruction
SR 0000

DS70157E-page 192

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

; Clear Watchdog Timer

After
Instruction
SR 0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

COM

Complement f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:
Description:

COM{.B}

1110

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

1BDf

ffff

Compute the 1s complement of the contents of the file register and place
the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand
determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is
stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file
register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

COM.b

RAM200

Before
Instruction
RAM200 80FF
SR 0000
Example 2:

COM

; COM RAM200 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
RAM200 8000
SR 0002 (Z)

RAM400, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG
1211
RAM400
0823
SR
0000

; COM RAM400 and store to WREG

; (Word mode)

After
Instruction
WREG F7DC
RAM400
0823
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 193

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

COM

Complement Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

COM{.B}

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Ws) Wd

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

1110

Description:

1010

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

1Bqq

qddd

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Compute the 1s complement of the contents of the source register Ws

and place the result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for both Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

COM.B

[W0++], [W1++]

Before
Instruction
W0
2301
W1
2400
Data 2300
5607
Data 2400
ABCD
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 194

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; COM [W0] and store to [W1] (Byte mode)

; Post-increment W0, W1

After
Instruction
W0
2302
W1
2401
Data 2300
5607
Data 2400
ABA9
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

COM

W0, [W1++]

Before
Instruction
W0
D004
W1
1000
Data 1000
ABA9
SR
0000

; COM W0 and store to [W1] (Word mode)

; Post-increment W1

After
Instruction
W0
D004
W1
1002
Data 1000
2FFB
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 195

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Compare f with WREG, Set Status Flags

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0B0f

ffff

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ...8191]

Operation:

(f) (WREG)

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

CP{.B}

1110

Description:

0011

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Compute (f) (WREG) and update the STATUS register. This instruction
is equivalent to the SUBWF instruction, but the result of the subtraction is
not stored.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CP.B

RAM400

Before
Instruction
WREG
8823
RAM400
0823
SR
0000
Example 2:

0x1200

Before
Instruction
WREG
2377
Data 1200
2277
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 196

; Compare RAM400 with WREG (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
WREG
8823
RAM400
0823
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
; Compare (0x1200) with WREG (Word mode)

After
Instruction
WREG
2377
Data 1200
2277
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Compare Wb with lit5, Set Status Flags

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 ... 31]

Operation:

(Wb) lit5

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

CP{.B}

1110

Description:

0001

PIC24E

Wb,

0www

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

wB00

011k

#lit5

kkkk

Compute (Wb) lit5, and update the STATUS register. This instruction is
equivalent to the SUB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not
stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
The w bits select the address of the Wb base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CP.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W4, #0x12

Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0000
Example 2:

W4, #0x12

Before
Instruction
W4
7713
SR
0000

; Compare W4 with 0x12 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W4 with 0x12 (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W4
7713
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 197

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Compare Wb with lit8, Set Status Flags

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit8 ... 255]

Operation:

(Wb) lit8

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

CP{.B}

1110

Description:

0001

Wb,

0www

X
#lit8

wBkk

k11k

kkkk

Compute (Wb) lit8, and update the STATUS register. This instruction is
equivalent to the SUB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not
stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
The w bits select the address of the Wb base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CP.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W4, #0x12

Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0000
Example 2:

W4, #0x12

Before
Instruction
W4
7713
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 198

; Compare W4 with 0x12 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W4 with 0x12 (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W4
7713
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Compare Wb with Ws, Set Status Flags

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

CP{.B}

Wb,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

0ppp

ssss

Ws
[Ws]
[Ws++]
[Ws--]
[++Ws]
[--Ws]

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Ws)

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

1110

Description:

0001

0www

wB00

Compute (Wb) (Ws), and update the STATUS register. This instruction is
equivalent to the SUB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not
stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the address of the Ws source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CP.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W0, [W1++]

Before
Instruction
W0 ABA9
W1
2000
Data 2000
D004
SR
0000
Example 2:

W5, W6

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W0 ABA9
W1
2001
Data 2000
D004
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W6 with W5 (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W5
2334
W6
8001
SR
000C (N, OV = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W5
2334
W6
8001
SR
0000

; Compare [W1] with W0 (Byte mode)

; Post-increment W1

DS70157E-page 199

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CP0

Compare f with 0x0, Set Status Flags

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0B0f

ffff

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) 0x0

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

CP0{.B}

1110

Description:

0010

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Compute (f) 0x0 and update the STATUS register. The result of the
subtraction is not stored.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CP0.B

RAM100

Before
Instruction
RAM100
44C3
SR
0000
Example 2:

CP0

0x1FFE

Before
Instruction
Data 1FFE
0001
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 200

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; Compare RAM100 with 0x0 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
RAM100
44C3
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare (0x1FFE) with 0x0 (Word mode)

After
Instruction
Data 1FFE
0001
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CP0

Compare Ws with 0x0, Set Status Flags

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0B00

0ppp

ssss

{label:}

CP0{.B}

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Ws
[Ws]
[Ws++]
[Ws--]
[++Ws]
[--Ws]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Ws) 0x0000

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

1110

Description:

0000

Compute (Ws) 0x0000 and update the STATUS register. The result of
the subtraction is not stored. Register direct or indirect addressing may be
used for Ws.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the address of the Ws source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CP0.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

[W4--]

Before
Instruction
W4
1001
Data 1000
0034
SR
0000
Example 2:

CP0

[--W5]

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W4
1000
Data 1000
0034
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
; Compare [--W5] with 0 (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W5
23FE
Data 23FE
9000
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W5
2400
Data 23FE
9000
SR
0000

; Compare [W4] with 0 (Byte mode)

; Post-decrement W4

DS70157E-page 201

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CPB

Compare f with WREG using Borrow, Set Status Flags

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

1B0f

ffff

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ...8191]

Operation:

(f) (WREG) (C)

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

CPB{.B}

1110

0011

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Compute (f) (WREG) (C), and update the STATUS register. This
instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the
subtraction is not stored.

Description:

The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.
Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CPB.B

RAM400

Before
Instruction
WREG
8823
RAM400
0823
SR
0000
Example 2:

CPB

0x1200

; Compare RAM400 with WREG using C (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
WREG
8823
RAM400
0823
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare (0x1200) with WREG using C (Word mode)

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG
2377
WREG
2377
Data 1200
2377
Data 1200
2377
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 202

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CPB

Compare Wb with lit5 using Borrow, Set Status Flags

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 ... 31]

Operation:

(Wb) lit5 (C)

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

CPB{.B}

1110

Description:

0001

PIC24E

Wb,

1www

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

wB00

011k

#lit5

kkkk

Compute (Wb) lit5 (C), and update the STATUS register. This
instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the
subtraction is not stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five bit integer number.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CPB.B

W4, #0x12

Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Example 2:

CPB.B

W4, #0x12

Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0000
Example 3:

CPB

W12, #0x1F

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W4 with 0x12 using C (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W12 with 0x1F using C (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)

Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0002 (Z = 1)

; Compare W4 with 0x12 using C (Byte mode)

DS70157E-page 203

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 4:

CPB

W12, #0x1F

Before
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)

DS70157E-page 204

; Compare W12 with 0x1F using C (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CPB

Compare Wb with lit8 using Borrow, Set Status Flags

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit8 ... 255]

Operation:

(Wb) lit8 (C)

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

CPB{.B}

1110

Description:

0001

Wb,

1www

X
#lit8

wBkk

k11k

kkkk

Compute (Wb) lit8 (C), and update the STATUS register. This
instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the
subtraction is not stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five bit integer number.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CPB.B

W4, #0x12

Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Example 2:

CPB.B

W4, #0x12

Before
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0000
Example 3:

CPB

W12, #0x1F

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W4 with 0x12 using C (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W4
7711
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Compare W12 with 0x1F using C (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)

Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0002 (Z = 1)

; Compare W4 with 0x12 using C (Byte mode)

DS70157E-page 205

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 4:

CPB

W12, #0x1F

Before
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)

DS70157E-page 206

; Compare W12 with 0x1F using C (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W12
0020
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CPB

Compare Ws with Wb using Borrow, Set Status Flags

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

0ppp

ssss

{label:}

CPB{.B}

Wb,

Ws
[Ws]
[Ws++]
[Ws--]
[++Ws]
[--Ws]

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Ws) (C)

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

1110

0001

1www

wB00

Compute (Wb) (Ws) (C), and update the STATUS register. This
instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the
subtraction is not stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the address of the Ws source register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These
instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

CPB.B

W0, [W1++]

; Compare [W1] with W0 using C (Byte mode)

; Post-increment W1

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0 ABA9
W0 ABA9
W1
1000
W1
1001
Data 1000 D0A9
Data 1000 D0A9
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 207

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

CPB.B

W0, [W1++]

; Compare [W1] with W0 using C (Byte mode)

; Post-increment W1

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0 ABA9
W0 ABA9
W1
1000
W1
1001
Data 1000 D0A9
Data 1000 D0A9
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Example 3:

CPB

W4, W5

Before
Instruction
W4
4000
W5
3000
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 208

; Compare W5 with W4 using C (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W4
4000
W5
3000
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CPBEQ

Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Equal (Wb = Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
If (Wb) = (Wn), [(PC+2) + 2 * Expr] PC and NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSEQ{.B}

1110

Description:

0111

Wb,

1www

Wn, Expr

wBnn

nnnn

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded, the PC is recalculated based on the 6-bit signed offset specified by Expr, and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If (Wb)
(Wn), the next instruction is executed as normal (branch is not taken).
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The s bits select the address of the Ws source register.
The n bits select the offset of the branch destination.
Note:

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (5 if branch taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:CPBEQ.B W0, W1, BYPASS; If W0 = W1 (Byte mode),

002002 ADD W2, W3, W4; Perform branch to BYPASS
002004
. . .
002006
. . .
002008 BYPASS: . . .
00200A
. . .

PC
W0
W1
SR

Before
Instruction
00 2000
1000
1000
0000

PC
W0
W1
SR

After
Instruction
00 2008
1000
1000
0002 (z = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 209

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CPBGT

Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Greater Than (Wb > Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
If (Wb) = (Wn), [(PC+2) + 2 * Expr] PC and NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSGT{.B}

1110

Description:

0110

Wb,

0www

Wn, Expr

wBnn

nnnn

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

Words:

Cycles:

1 (5 if branch taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE: CPBGT.B W0, W1, BYPASS ; If W0 > W1 (Byte mode),

002002
ADD
W2, W3, W4
; Perform branch to BYPASS
002004
. . .
002006
. . .
002008 BYPASS . . .
00200A
. . .

PC
W0
W1
SR

DS70157E-page 210

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Before
Instruction
00 2000
30FF
26FE
0000

PC
W0
W1
SR

After
Instruction
00 2008
00FF
26FE
0000 (N, C = 0)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CPBLT

Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Less Than (Wb < Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
If (Wb) = (Wn), [(PC+2) + 2 * Expr] PC and NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSLT{.B}

1110

Description:

0110

Wb,

1www

Wn, Expr

wBnn

nnnn

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded, the PC is recalculated based on the 6-bit signed offset specified
by Expr, and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If (Wb) (Wn),
the next instruction is executed as normal (branch is not taken).
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The s bits select the address of the Ws source register.
The n bits select the offset of the branch destination.
Note:

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (5 if branch taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A

PC
W8
W9
SR

Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0000

CPBLT.B W8, W9, BYPASS; If W8 < W9 (Byte mode),

ADD W2, W3, W4; Perform branch to BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

PC
W8
W9
SR

After
Instruction
00 2008
00FF
26FE
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 211

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CPBNE

Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Not Equal (Wb Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
If (Wb) = (Wn), [(PC+2) + 2 * Expr] PC and NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSNE{.B}

1110

Description:

0111

Wb,

0www

Wn, Expr

wBnn

nnnn

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the next
instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded,
the PC is recalculated based on the 6-bit signed offset specified by Expr,
and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If (Wb) (Wn), the next
instruction is executed as normal (branch is not taken).
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The s bits select the address of the Ws source register.
The n bits select the offset of the branch destination.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

1 (5 if branch taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002004
002006
002008 BYPASS:
00200A

PC
W2
W3
SR

DS70157E-page 212

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0000

CPBNE.B W2, W3, BYPASS ; If W2 != W3 (Byte mode),

ADD W2, W3, W4 ; Perform branch to BYPASS
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

PC
W2
W3
SR

After
Instruction
00 200A
00FF
26FE
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CPSEQ

Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Equal (Wb = Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) = (Wn)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSEQ{.B}

1110

Description:

0111

PIC24E

Wb,

1www

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

wB00

0000

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If
(Wb) (Wn), the next instruction is executed as normal.
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The s bits select the address of the Ws source register.
Note:

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:CPSEQ.BW0, W1; If W0 = W1 (Byte mode),

002002GOTOBYPASS; skip the GOTO
002004
. . .
002006
. . .
002008 BYPASS: . . .
00200A
. . .

PC
W0
W1
SR
Example 2:

018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008

PC
W0
W1
SR
CPSEQ
CALL
...
...

Before
Instruction
01 8000
3344
3344
0002 (Z = 1)

After
Instruction
00 2002
1001
1000
0000

W4, W8; If W4 = W8 (Word mode),

_FIR; skip the subroutine call

PC
W4
W8
SR

5
Instruction
Descriptions

PC
W4
W8
SR

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Before
Instruction
00 2000
1001
1000
0000

After
Instruction
01 8006
3344
3344
0002 (Z = 1)

DS70157E-page 213

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CPSEQ

Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Equal (Wb = Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) = (Wn)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSEQ{.B}

1110

Description:

0111

Wb,

1www

X
Wn

wB00

0001

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:CPSEQ.BW0, W1; If W0 = W1 (Byte mode),

002002GOTOBYPASS; skip the GOTO
002004
. . .
002006
. . .
002008 BYPASS: . . .
00200A
. . .

PC
W0
W1
SR

DS70157E-page 214

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Before
Instruction
00 2000
1001
1000
0000

PC
W0
W1
SR

After
Instruction
00 2002
1001
1000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008

PC
W4
W8
SR

CPSEQ
CALL
...
...

Before
Instruction
01 8000
3344
3344
0002 (Z = 1)

W4, W8; If W4 = W8 (Word mode),

_FIR; skip the subroutine call

PC
W4
W8
SR

After
Instruction
01 8006
3344
3344
0002 (Z = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 215

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CPSGT

Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Greater Than (Wb > Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) > (Wn)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSGT{.B}

1110

Description:

PIC24E

Wb,

0110

0www

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

wB00

0000

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) > (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise,
the next instruction is executed as normal.
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The s bits select the address of the Ws source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS
00200C

PC
W0
W1
SR
Example 2:

CPSGT.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

W0, W1; If W0 > W1 (Byte mode),

BYPASS; skip the GOTO

Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0009 (N, C = 1)

018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008

PC
W4
W5
SR

DS70157E-page 216

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

CPSGT
CALL
...
...

Before
Instruction
01 8000
2600
2600
0004 (OV = 1)

PC
W0
W1
SR

After
Instruction
00 2006
00FF
26FE
0009 (N, C = 1)

W4, W5; If W4 > W5 (Word mode),

_FIR; skip the subroutine call

PC
W4
W5
SR

After
Instruction
01 8002
2600
2600
0004 (OV = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CPSGT

Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Greater Than (Wb > Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) > (Wn)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSGT{.B}

1110

Description:

Wb,

0110

0www

X
Wn

wB00

0001

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS
00200C

PC
W0
W1
SR
Example 2:

CPSGT
CALL
...
...

Before
Instruction
01 8000
2600
2600
0004 (OV = 1)

PC
W0
W1
SR

After
Instruction
00 2006
00FF
26FE
0009 (N, C = 1)

W4, W5; If W4 > W5 (Word mode),

_FIR; skip the subroutine call

PC
W4
W5
SR

After
Instruction
01 8002
2600
2600
0004 (OV = 1)

DS70157E-page 217

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

W0, W1; If W0 > W1 (Byte mode),

BYPASS; skip the GOTO

Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0009 (N, C = 1)

018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008

PC
W4
W5
SR

CPSGT.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CPSLT

Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Less Than (Wb < Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) < (Wn)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSLT{.B}

1110

Description:

0110

PIC24E

Wb,

1www

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

wB00

0000

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) < (Wn), the
next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is
discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise, the
next instruction is executed as normal.
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The s bits select the address of the Ws source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS:
00200C

PC
W8
W9
SR
Example 2:

CPSLT.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0008 (N = 1)

018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008

PC
W3
W6
SR

DS70157E-page 218

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

CPSLT
CALL
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
01 8000
2600
3000
0000

W8, W9; If W8 < W9 (Byte mode),

BYPASS; skip the GOTO

PC
W8
W9
SR

After
Instruction
00 2002
00FF
26FE
0008 (N = 1)

W3, W6; If W3 < W6 (Word mode),

_FIR; skip the subroutine call

PC
W3
W6
SR

After
Instruction
01 8006
2600
3000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CPSLT

Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Less Than (Wb < Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) < (Wn)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSLT{.B}

1110

Description:

0110

Wb,

1www

X
Wn

wB00

0001

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS:
00200C

PC
W8
W9
SR
Example 2:

CPSLT
CALL
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
01 8000
2600
3000
0000

W8, W9; If W8 < W9 (Byte mode),

BYPASS; skip the GOTO

PC
W8
W9
SR

After
Instruction
00 2002
00FF
26FE
0008 (N = 1)

W3, W6; If W3 < W6 (Word mode),

_FIR; skip the subroutine call

PC
W3
W6
SR

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0008 (N = 1)

018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008

PC
W3
W6
SR

CPSLT.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

After
Instruction
01 8006
2600
3000
0000

DS70157E-page 219

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

CPSNE

Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Not Equal (Wb Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) (Wn)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSNE{.B}

1110

Description:

PIC24E

0111

Wb,

0www

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

wB00

0000

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) (Wn), the next
instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded
and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise, the next
instruction is executed as normal.
The w bits select the address of the Wb source register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The s bits select the address of the Ws source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS:
00200C

PC
W2
W3
SR
Example 2:

CPSNE.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0001 (C = 1)

018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008

PC
W0
W8
SR

DS70157E-page 220

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Before
Instruction
01 8000
3000
3000
0000

CPSNE
CALL
...
...

W2, W3 ; If W2 != W3 (Byte mode),

BYPASS ; skip the GOTO

PC
W2
W3
SR

After
Instruction
00 2006
00FF
26FE
0001 (C = 1)

W0, W8 ; If W0 != W8 (Word mode),

_FIR ; skip the subroutine call

PC
W0
W8
SR

After
Instruction
01 8002
3000
3000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

CPSNE

Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Not Equal (Wb Wn)

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Wn)
Skip if (Wb) (Wn)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

CPSNE{.B}

1110

Description:

0111

Wb,

0www

X
Wn

wB00

0001

ssss

Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

Words:

Cycles:

1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)

Example 1:

002000 HERE:
002002
002006
002008
00200A BYPASS:
00200C

PC
W2
W3
SR
Example 2:

Before
Instruction
01 8000
3000
3000
0000

CPSNE
CALL
...
...

W2, W3 ; If W2 != W3 (Byte mode),

BYPASS ; skip the GOTO

PC
W2
W3
SR

After
Instruction
00 2006
00FF
26FE
0001 (C = 1)

W0, W8 ; If W0 != W8 (Word mode),

_FIR ; skip the subroutine call

PC
W0
W8
SR

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Before
Instruction
00 2000
00FF
26FE
0001 (C = 1)

018000 HERE:
018002
018006
018008

PC
W0
W8
SR

CPSNE.B
GOTO
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .

After
Instruction
01 8002
3000
3000
0000

DS70157E-page 221

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

DAW.B

Decimal Adjust Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0100

0000

ssss

Syntax:

{label:}

DAW.B

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

If (Wn<3:0> > 9) or (DC = 1)

(Wn<3:0>) + 6 Wn<3:0>
Else
(Wn<3:0>) Wn<3:0>

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

If (Wn<7:4> > 9) or (C = 1)
(Wn<7:4>) + 6 Wn<7:4>
Else
(Wn<7:4>) Wn<7:4>
Status Affected:

Encoding:
Description:

1111

1101

Adjust the Least Significant Byte in Wn to produce a binary coded decimal

(BCD) result. The Most Significant Byte of Wn is not changed, and the
Carry flag is used to indicate any decimal rollover. Register direct
addressing must be used for Wn.
The s bits select the source/destination register.
Note 1: This instruction is used to correct the data format after two
packed BCD bytes have been added.
2: This instruction operates in Byte mode only and the .B
extension must be included with the opcode.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

DAW.B

; Decimal adjust W0

Before
Instruction
W0 771A
SR
0002 (DC = 1)
Example 2:

DAW.B

Before
Instruction
W3 77AA
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 222

After
Instruction
W0
7720
SR
0002 (DC = 1)

; Decimal adjust W3

After
Instruction
W3
7710
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

DEC

Decrement f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) 1 destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

DEC{.B}

1110

Description:

1101

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

0BDf

ffff

Subtract one from the contents of the file register and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If
WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

DEC.B

0x200

Before
Instruction
Data 200 80FF
SR
0000
Example 2:

DEC

; Decrement (0x200) (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
Data 200 80FE
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

RAM400, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG
1211
RAM400
0823
SR
0000

; Decrement RAM400 and store to WREG

; (Word mode)

After
Instruction
WREG
0822
RAM400
0823
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 223

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

DEC

Decrement Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

DEC{.B}

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

dppp

ssss

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operands:
Operation:

(Ws) 1 Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

1110

1001

0Bqq

qddd

Subtract one from the contents of the source register Ws and place the
result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used by Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

DEC.B

[W7++], [W8++]

Before
Instruction
W7
2301
W8
2400
Data 2300
5607
Data 2400 ABCD
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 224

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; DEC [W7] and store to [W8] (Byte mode)

; Post-increment W7, W8

After
Instruction
W7
2302
W8
2401
Data 2300
5607
Data 2400
AB55
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

DEC

W5, [W6++]

Before
Instruction
W5
D004
W6
2000
Data 2000 ABA9
SR
0000

; Decrement W5 and store to [W6] (Word mode)

; Post-increment W6

After
Instruction
W5
D004
W6
2002
Data 2000
D003
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 225

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

DEC2

Decrement f by 2

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) 2 destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

DEC2{.B}

1110

Description:

1101

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

1BDf

ffff

Subtract two from the contents of the file register and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If
WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

DEC2.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

0x200

Before
Instruction
Data 200 80FF
SR
0000
Example 2:

DEC2

After
Instruction
Data 200 80FD
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

RAM400, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG
1211
RAM400
0823
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 226

; Decrement (0x200) by 2 (Byte mode)

; Decrement RAM400 by 2 and

; store to WREG (Word mode)

After
Instruction
WREG
0821
RAM400
0823
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

DEC2

Decrement Ws by 2

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

DEC2{.B}

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Ws) 2 Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

1110

Description:

1001

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

1Bqq

qddd

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Subtract two from the contents of the source register Ws and place the
result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used by Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

DEC2.B [W7--], [W8--]; DEC [W7] by 2, store to [W8] (Byte mode)

; Post-decrement W7, W8

Before
Instruction
W7
2301
W8
2400
Data 2300
0107
Data 2400 ABCD
SR
0000
Example 2:

DEC2

W5, [W6++]

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

; DEC W5 by 2, store to [W6] (Word mode)

; Post-increment W6

After
Instruction
W5
D004
W6
1002
Data 1000
D002
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W5
D004
W6
1000
Data 1000 ABA9
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W7
2300
W8
23FF
Data 2300
0107
Data 2400
ABFF
SR
0008 (N = 1)

DS70157E-page 227

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

DISI

Disable Interrupts Temporarily

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

kkkk

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit14 ... 16383]

Operation:

lit14 DISICNT
1 DISI
Disable interrupts for (lit14 + 1) cycles

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1111

Description:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

#lit14

1100

00kk

Disable interrupts of priority 0 through priority 6 for (lit14 + 1) instruction

cycles. Priority 0 through priority 6 interrupts are disabled starting in the
cycle that DISI executes, and remain disabled for the next (lit 14) cycles.
The lit14 value is written to the DISICNT register, and the DISI flag
(INTCON2<14>) is set to 1. This instruction can be used before
executing time critical code, to limit the effects of interrupts.
Note:

This instruction does not prevent priority 7 interrupts and traps

from running. See the specific device family reference manual
for details.

002000 HERE:
002002
002004

PC
DISICNT
INTCON2
SR

DS70157E-page 228

DISI

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
0000
0000

DISI

#100

; Disable interrupts for 101 cycles

; next 100 cycles protected by DISI

. . .

PC
DISICNT
INTCON2
SR

After
Instruction
00 2002
0100
4000 (DISI = 1)
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

DIV.S
Implemented in:

Syntax:

Signed Integer Divide

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

DIV.S{W}

Wm, Wn

DIV.SD

Wm, Wn

Operands:

Wm W0 ... W15] for word operation

Wm W0, W2, W4 ... W14] for double operation
Wn W2 ... W15]

Operation:

For word operation (default):

Wm W0
If (Wm<15> = 1):
0xFFFF W1
Else:
0x0 W1
W1:W0 / Wn W0
Remainder W1

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

vW00

ssss

For double operation (DIV.SD):

Wm + 1:Wm W1:W0
W1:W0 / Wn W0
Remainder W1
Status Affected:
Encoding:
Description:

N, OV, Z, C
1101

1000

0ttt

tvvv

Iterative, signed integer divide, where the dividend is stored in Wm (for a

16-bit by 16-bit divide) or Wm + 1:Wm (for a 32-bit by 16-bit divide) and
the divisor is stored in Wn. In the default word operation, Wm is first
copied to W0 and sign-extended through W1 to perform the operation. In
the double operation, Wm + 1:Wm is first copied to W1:W0. The 16-bit
quotient of the divide operation is stored in W0, and the 16-bit remainder
is stored in W1.
This instruction must be executed 18 times using the REPEAT instruction
(with an iteration count of 17) to generate the correct quotient and
remainder. The N flag will be set if the remainder is negative and cleared
otherwise. The OV flag will be set if the divide operation resulted in an
overflow and cleared otherwise. The Z flag will be set if the remainder is
0 and cleared otherwise. The C flag is used to implement the divide
algorithm and its final value should not be used.
The t bits select the most significant word of the dividend for the double
operation. These bits are clear for the word operation.
The v bits select the least significant word of the dividend.
The W bit selects the dividend size (0 for 16-bit, 1 for 32-bit).
The s bits select the divisor register.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 229

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Note 1: The extension .D in the instruction denotes a double word

(32-bit) dividend rather than a word dividend. You may use a
.W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: Unexpected results will occur if the quotient can not be
represented in 16 bits. When this occurs for the double
operation (DIV.SD), the OV Status bit will be set and the
quotient and remainder should not be used. For the word
operation (DIV.S), only one type of overflow may occur
(0x8000/0xFFFF = + 32768 or 0x00008000), which allows the
OV Status bit to interpret the result.
3: Dividing by zero will initiate an arithmetic error trap during the
first cycle of execution.
4: This instruction is interruptible on each instruction cycle
boundary.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Words:

Cycles:

18 (plus 1 for REPEAT execution)

Example 1:

REPEAT #17
DIV.S W3, W4

Before
Instruction
W0
5555
W1
1234
W3
3000
W4
0027
SR
0000
Example 2:

REPEAT
DIV.SD

#17
W0, W12

Before
Instruction
W0
2500
W1
FF42
W12
2200
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 230

; Execute DIV.S 18 times

; Divide W3 by W4
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1

After
Instruction
W0
013B
W1
0003
W3
3000
W4
0027
SR
0000
; Execute DIV.SD 18 times
; Divide W1:W0 by W12
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1

After
Instruction
W0
FA6B
W1
EF00
W12
2200
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

DIV.U

Unsigned Integer Divide

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

DIV.U{W}

Wm, Wn

DIV.UD

Wm, Wn

Operands:

Wm W0 ... W15] for word operation

Wm W0, W2, W4 ... W14] for double operation
Wn W2 ... W15]

Operation:

For word operation (default):

Wm W0
0x0 W1
W1:W0/Wn W0
Remainder W1

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

vW00

ssss

For double operation (DIV.UD):

Wm + 1:Wm W1:W0
W1:W0/Wns W0
Remainder W1
Status Affected:

N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

1101

1000

1ttt

tvvv

Iterative, unsigned integer divide, where the dividend is stored in Wm (for

a 16-bit by 16-bit divide), or Wm + 1:Wm (for a 32-bit by 16-bit divide) and
the divisor is stored in Wn. In the word operation, Wm is first copied to W0
and W1 is cleared to perform the divide. In the double operation,
Wm + 1:Wm is first copied to W1:W0. The 16-bit quotient of the divide
operation is stored in W0, and the 16-bit remainder is stored in W1.
This instruction must be executed 18 times using the REPEAT instruction
(with an iteration count of 17) to generate the correct quotient and
remainder. The N flag will always be cleared. The OV flag will be set if the
divide operation resulted in an overflow and cleared otherwise. The Z flag
will be set if the remainder is 0 and cleared otherwise. The C flag is used
to implement the divide algorithm and its final value should not be used.
The t bits select the most significant word of the dividend for the double
operation. These bits are clear for the word operation.
The v bits select the least significant word of the dividend.
The W bit selects the dividend size (0 for 16-bit, 1 for 32-bit).
The s bits select the divisor register.

Words:

Cycles:

18 (plus 1 for REPEAT execution)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 231

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Note 1: The extension .D in the instruction denotes a double word

(32-bit) dividend rather than a word dividend. You may use a .W
extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: Unexpected results will occur if the quotient can not be
represented in 16 bits. This may only occur for the double
operation (DIV.UD). When an overflow occurs, the OV Status
bit will be set and the quotient and remainder should not be
used.
3: Dividing by zero will initiate an arithmetic error trap during the
first cycle of execution.
4: This instruction is interruptible on each instruction cycle
boundary.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 1:

REPEAT #17
DIV.U W2, W4

Before
Instruction
W0
5555
W1
1234
W2
8000
W4
0200
SR
0000
Example 2:

REPEAT
DIV.UD

#17
W10, W12

Before
Instruction
W0
5555
W1
1234
W10
2500
W11
0042
W12
2200
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 232

; Execute DIV.U 18 times

; Divide W2 by W4
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1

After
Instruction
W0
0040
W1
0000
W2
8000
W4
0200
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
; Execute DIV.UD 18 times
; Divide W11:W10 by W12
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1

After
Instruction
W0
01F2
W1
0100
W10
2500
W11
0042
W12
2200
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

DIVF

Fractional Divide

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wm W0 ... W15]
Wn W2 ... W15]

Operation:

0x0 W0
Wm W1
W1:W0/Wn W0
Remainder W1

Status Affected:

N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

1101

DIVF

1001

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

t000

0000

ssss

Wm, Wn

0ttt

Iterative, signed fractional 16-bit by 16-bit divide, where the dividend is

stored in Wm and the divisor is stored in Wn. To perform the operation,
W0 is first cleared and Wm is copied to W1. The 16-bit quotient of the
divide operation is stored in W0, and the 16-bit remainder is stored in W1.
The sign of the remainder will be the same as the sign of the dividend.
This instruction must be executed 18 times using the REPEAT instruction
(with an iteration count of 17) to generate the correct quotient and
remainder. The N flag will be set if the remainder is negative and cleared
otherwise. The OV flag will be set if the divide operation resulted in an
overflow and cleared otherwise. The Z flag will be set if the remainder is
0 and cleared otherwise. The C flag is used to implement the divide
algorithm and its final value should not be used.
The t bits select the dividend register.
The s bits select the divisor register.
Note 1: For the fractional divide to be effective, Wm must be less than
Wn. If Wm is greater than or equal to Wn, unexpected results
will occur because the fractional result will be greater than or
equal to 1.0. When this occurs, the OV Status bit will be set and
the quotient and remainder should not be used.
2: Dividing by zero will initiate an arithmetic error trap during the
first cycle of execution.
3: This instruction is interruptible on each instruction cycle
boundary.

Words:

Cycles:

18 (plus 1 for REPEAT execution)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 233

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 1:

REPEAT
DIVF

#17
W8, W9

Before
Instruction
W0
8000
W1
1234
W8
1000
W9
4000
SR
0000
Example 2:

REPEAT #17
DIVF
W8, W9

Before
Instruction
W0
8000
W1
1234
W8
1000
W9
8000
SR
0000
Example 3:

REPEAT #17
DIVF
W0, W1

Before
Instruction
W0
8002
W1
8001
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 234

; Execute DIVF 18 times

; Divide W8 by W9
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1

After
Instruction
W0
2000
W1
0000
W8
1000
W9
4000
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
; Execute DIVF 18 times
; Divide W8 by W9
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1

After
Instruction
W0
F000
W1
0000
W8
1000
W9
8000
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
; Execute DIVF 18 times
; Divide W0 by W1
; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1

After
Instruction
W0
7FFE
W1
8002
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

DO
Implemented in:

Initialize Hardware Loop Literal

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit14 [0 ... 16383]

Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

PUSH DO shadows (DCOUNT, DOEND, DOSTART)

(lit14) DCOUNT
(PC) + 4 PC
(PC) DOSTART
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) DOEND
Increment DL<2:0> (CORCON<10:8>)

Status Affected:

Encoding:
Description:

#lit14,

Expr

0000

1000

00kk

kkkk

0000

nnnn

Initiate a no overhead hardware DO loop, which is executed (lit14 + 1)

times. The DO loop begins at the address following the DO instruction, and
ends at the address 2 * Slit16 instruction words away. The 14-bit count
value (lit14) supports a maximum loop count value of 16384, and the 16-bit
offset value (Slit16) supports offsets of 32K instruction words in both
directions.
When this instruction executes, DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND are first
PUSHed into their respective shadow registers, and then updated with the
new DO loop parameters specified by the instruction. The DO level count,
DL<2:0> (CORCON<8:10>), is then incremented. After the DO loop
completes execution, the PUSHed DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND
registers are restored, and DL<2:0> is decremented.
The k bits specify the loop count.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions that
are offset from the PC to the last instruction executed in the loop.
Special Features, Restrictions:
The following features and restrictions apply to the DO instruction.
1. Using a loop count of 0 will result in the loop being executed one
time.
2. Using a loop size of -2, -1 or 0 is invalid. Unexpected results may
occur if these offsets are used.
3. The very last two instructions of the DO loop can NOT be:
an instruction which changes program control flow
a DO or REPEAT instruction
Unexpected results may occur if any of these instructions are used.
4.

DS70157E-page 235

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

If a hard trap occurs in the second to last instruction or third to last

instruction of a DO loop, the loop will not function properly. The hard
trap includes exceptions of priority level 13 through level 15,
inclusive.
Note 1: The DO instruction is interruptible and supports 1 level of
hardware nesting. Nesting up to an additional 5 levels may be
provided in software by the user. See the specific device family
reference manual for details.
2: The linker will convert the specified expression into the offset to
be used.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

002000 LOOP6:
002004
002006
002008
00200A END6:
00200C

PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0001 (C = 1)

PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
00 2004
0005
00 2004
00 200A
0100 (DL = 1)
0201 (DA, C = 1)

01C000 LOOP12: DO #0x160, END12; Init DO loop (353 reps)

01C004
DEC W1, W2; First instruction in loop
01C006
. . .
01C008
. . .
01C00A
. . .
01C00C
. . .
01C00E
CALL _FIR88; Call the FIR88 subroutine
01C012
NOP
01C014 END12: NOP; Last instruction in loop
; (Required NOP filler)

PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR

DS70157E-page 236

DO
#5, END6; Initiate DO loop (6 reps)
ADD
W1, W2, W3; First instruction in loop
. . .
. . .
SUB
W2, W3, W4; Last instruction in loop
. . .

Before
Instruction
01 C000
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0008 (N = 1)

PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
01 C004
0160
01 C004
01 C014
0100 (DL = 1)
0208 (DA, N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

DO
Implemented in:

Initialize Hardware Loop Literal

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E
X

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit15 [0 ... 32767]

Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

PUSH DO shadows (DCOUNT, DOEND, DOSTART)

(lit15) DCOUNT
(PC) + 4 PC
(PC) DOSTART
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) DOEND
Increment DL<2:0> (CORCON<10:8>)

Status Affected:

Encoding:
Description:

#lit15,

Expr

0000

1000

0kkk

kkkk

0000

nnnn

Initiate a no overhead hardware DO loop, which is executed (lit15 + 1) times.

The DO loop begins at the address following the DO instruction, and ends at
the address 2 * Slit16 instruction words away. The 15-bit count value (lit15)
supports a maximum loop count value of 32768, and the 16-bit offset value
(Slit16) supports offsets of 32K instruction words in both directions.
When this instruction executes, DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND are first
PUSHed into their respective shadow registers, and then updated with the
new DO loop parameters specified by the instruction. The DO level count,
DL<2:0> (CORCON<8:10>), is then incremented. After the DO loop
completes execution, the PUSHed DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND
registers are restored, and DL<2:0> is decremented.
The k bits specify the loop count.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions that
are offset from the PC to the last instruction executed in the loop.
Special Features, Restrictions:
The following features and restrictions apply to the DO instruction.
1. Using a loop count of 0 will result in the loop being executed one
time.
2. Using a loop size of -2, -1 or 0 is invalid. Unexpected results may
occur if these offsets are used.
3. The very last two instructions of the DO loop can NOT be:
an instruction which changes program control flow
a DO or REPEAT instruction
Unexpected results may occur if any of these instructions are used.
4.

Note 1: The DO instruction is interruptible and supports 1 level of

hardware nesting. Nesting up to an additional 5 levels may be
provided in software by the user. See the specific device family
reference manual for details.
2: The linker will convert the specified expression into the offset to
be used.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 237

5
Instruction
Descriptions

If a hard trap occurs in the second to last instruction or third to last

instruction of a DO loop, the loop will not function properly. The hard
trap includes exceptions of priority level 13 through level 15, inclusive.
The first instruction of the DO loop cannot be a PSV read or Table read.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

002000 LOOP6:
002004
002006
002008
00200A END6:
00200C

PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0001 (C = 1)

PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
00 2004
0005
00 2004
00 200A
0100 (DL = 1)
0201 (DA, C = 1)

01C000 LOOP12: DO #0x160, END12; Init DO loop (353 reps)

PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR

DS70157E-page 238

DO
#5, END6; Initiate DO loop (6 reps)
ADD
W1, W2, W3; First instruction in loop
. . .
. . .
SUB
W2, W3, W4; Last instruction in loop
. . .

Before
Instruction
01 C000
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0008 (N = 1)

PC
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
01 C004
0160
01 C004
01 C014
0100 (DL = 1)
0208 (DA, N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Initialize Hardware Loop Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

PUSH Shadows (DCOUNT, DOEND, DOSTART)

(Wn<13:0>) DCOUNT
(PC) + 4 PC
(PC) DOSTART
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) DOEND
Increment DL<2:0> (CORCON<10:8>)

Status Affected:

Description:

Wn,

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

Encoding:

PIC24E

Expr

0000

1000

0000

ssss

0000

nnnn

Initiate a no overhead hardware DO loop, which is executed (Wn + 1) times.

The DO loop begins at the address following the DO instruction, and ends at
the address 2 * Slit16 instruction words away. The lower 14 bits of Wn
support a maximum count value of 16384, and the 16-bit offset value
(Slit16) supports offsets of 32K instruction words in both directions.
When this instruction executes, DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND are first
PUSHed into their respective shadow registers, and then updated with the
new DO loop parameters specified by the instruction. The DO level count,
DL<2:0> (CORCON<8:10>), is then incremented. After the DO loop
completes execution, the PUSHed DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND
registers are restored, and DL<2:0> is decremented.
The s bits specify the register Wn that contains the loop count.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions that
are offset from (PC + 4), which is the last instruction executed in the loop.
Special Features, Restrictions:
The following features and restrictions apply to the DO instruction.
1. Using a loop count of 0 will result in the loop being executed one
time.
2. Using an offset of -2, -1 or 0 is invalid. Unexpected results may occur
if these offsets are used.
3. The very last two instructions of the DO loop can NOT be:
an instruction which changes program control flow
a DO or REPEAT instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these last instructions are used.

2: The linker will convert the specified expression into the offset to
be used.
Words:

Cycles:

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 239

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Note 1: The DO instruction is interruptible and supports 1 level of nesting.

Nesting up to an additional 5 levels may be provided in software
by the user. See the specific device family reference manual for
details.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 1:

002000 LOOP6:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C
00200E
002010 END6:

PC
W0
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

DS70157E-page 240

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0012
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0000

002000 LOOPA:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
002010 ENDA:

PC
W7
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR

DO
ADD
. . .
. . .
. . .
REPEAT
SUB
NOP

Before
Instruction
00 2000
E00F
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0000

W0, END6
; Initiate DO loop (W0 reps)
W1, W2, W3 ; First instruction in loop

#6
W2, W3, W4
; Last instruction in loop
; (Required NOP filler)

PC
W0
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
DO
SWAP
. . .
. . .
. . .
MOV

W7, ENDA
W0

After
Instruction
00 2004
0012
0012
00 2004
00 2010
0100 (DL = 1)
0080 (DA = 1)
; Initiate DO loop (W7 reps)
; First instruction in loop

W1, [W2++] ; Last instruction in loop

PC
W7
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
00 2004
E00F
200F
00 2004
00 2010
0100 (DL = 1)
0080 (DA = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Initialize Hardware Loop Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E
X

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.
Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767].

Operation:

PUSH Shadows (DCOUNT, DOEND, DOSTART)

(Wn) DCOUNT
(PC) + 4 PC
(PC) DOSTART
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) DOEND
Increment DL<2:0> (CORCON<10:8>)

Status Affected:

Encoding:
Description:

Wn,

Expr

0000

1000

0000

ssss

0000

nnnn

Initiate a no overhead hardware DO loop, which is executed (Wn + 1) times.

The DO loop begins at the address following the DO instruction, and ends at
the address 2 * Slit16 instruction words away. The 16 bits of Wn support a
maximum count value of 65536, and the 16-bit offset value (Slit16) supports
offsets of 32K instruction words in both directions.
When this instruction executes, DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND are first
PUSHed into their respective shadow registers, and then updated with the
new DO loop parameters specified by the instruction. The DO level count,
DL<2:0> (CORCON<8:10>), is then incremented. After the DO loop
completes execution, the PUSHed DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND
registers are restored, and DL<2:0> is decremented.
The s bits specify the register Wn that contains the loop count.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions that
are offset from (PC + 4), which is the last instruction executed in the loop.
Special Features, Restrictions:
The following features and restrictions apply to the DO instruction.
1. Using a loop count of 0 will result in the loop being executed one
time.
2. Using an offset of -2, -1 or 0 is invalid. Unexpected results may occur
if these offsets are used.
3. The very last two instructions of the DO loop can NOT be:
an instruction which changes program control flow
a DO or REPEAT instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these last instructions are used.
4.

Cycles:

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 241

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Words:

The first instruction of the DO loop cannot be a PSV read or Table read.
Note 1: The DO instruction is interruptible and supports 1 level of nesting.
Nesting up to an additional 5 levels may be provided in software
by the user. See the specific device family reference manual for
details.
2: The linker will convert the specified expression into the offset to
be used.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 1:

002000 LOOP6:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
00200C
00200E
002010 END6:

PC
W0
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

DS70157E-page 242

Before
Instruction
00 2000
0012
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0000

002000 LOOPA:
002004
002006
002008
00200A
002010 ENDA:

PC
W7
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR

DO
ADD
. . .
. . .
. . .
REPEAT
SUB
NOP

Before
Instruction
00 2000
E00F
0000
FF FFFF
FF FFFF
0000
0000

W0, END6
; Initiate DO loop (W0 reps)
W1, W2, W3 ; First instruction in loop

#6
W2, W3, W4
; Last instruction in loop
; (Required NOP filler)

PC
W0
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR
DO
SWAP
. . .
. . .
. . .
MOV

W7, ENDA
W0

After
Instruction
00 2004
0012
0012
00 2004
00 2010
0100 (DL = 1)
0080 (DA = 1)
; Initiate DO loop (W7 reps)
; First instruction in loop

W1, [W2++] ; Last instruction in loop

PC
W7
DCOUNT
DOSTART
DOEND
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
00 2004
E00F
200F
00 2004
00 2010
0100 (DL = 1)
0080 (DA = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Euclidean Distance (No Accumulate)

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

{label:} ED

PIC24H

PIC24E

Wm * Wm, Acc,

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

[Wx],

[Wy],

Wxd

[Wx] + = kx, [Wy] + = ky,

[Wx] = kx, [Wy] = ky,
[W9 +
W12],

[W11 +
W12],

Operands:

Acc [A,B]
Wm * Wm [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7]
Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]
Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]
Wxd [W4 ... W7]

Operation:

(Wm) * (Wm) Acc(A or B)

([Wx] [Wy]) Wxd
(Wx) + kx Wx
(Wy) + ky Wy

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:

1111

Description:

00mm

A1xx

00ii

iijj

jj11

Compute the square of Wm, and optionally compute the difference of the
prefetch values specified by [Wx] and [Wy]. The results of Wm * Wm are
sign-extended to 40 bits and stored in the specified accumulator. The
results of [Wx] [Wy] are stored in Wxd, which may be the same as Wm.
Operands Wx, Wxd and Wyd specify the prefetch operations which
support indirect and register offset addressing as described in
Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches.
The m bits select the operand register Wm for the square.
The A bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The x bits select the prefetch difference Wxd destination.
The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Before
Instruction
009A
1100
2300
00 3D0A 0000
007F
0028
0000

W4
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1100
Data 2300
SR

;
;
;
;

Square W4 to ACCA
[W8]-[W10] to W4
Post-increment W8
Post-decrement W10

After
Instruction
0057
1102
22FE
00 0000 5CA4
007F
0028
0000

DS70157E-page 243

5
Instruction
Descriptions

W4
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1100
Data 2300
SR

W4*W4, A, [W8]+=2, [W10]-=2, W4

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

W5
W9
W11
W12
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2508
SR

DS70157E-page 244

W5*W5, B, [W9]+=2, [W11+W12], W5 ; Square W5 to ACCB

; [W9]-[W11+W12] to W5
; Post-increment W9

Before
Instruction
43C2
1200
2500
0008
00 28E3 F14C
6A7C
2B3D
0000

W5
W9
W11
W12
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2508
SR

After
Instruction
3F3F
1202
2500
0008
00 11EF 1F04
6A7C
2B3D
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

EDAC

Euclidean Distance

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

{label:} EDAC

PIC24H

PIC24E

Wm * Wm, Acc,

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

[Wx],

[Wy],

[Wx] + =
kx,

[Wy] + = ky,

Wxd

[Wx] = kx, [Wy] = ky,

[W9 +
W12],

[W11 +
W12],

Operands:

Acc [A,B]
Wm * Wm [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7]
Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]
Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]
Wxd [W4 ... W7]

Operation:

(Acc(A or B)) + (Wm) * (Wm) Acc(A or B)

([Wx] [Wy]) Wxd
(Wx) + kx Wx
(Wy) + ky Wy

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:

1111

Description:

00mm

A1xx

00ii

iijj

jj10

Compute the square of Wm, and also the difference of the prefetch
values specified by [Wx] and [Wy]. The results of Wm * Wm are
sign-extended to 40 bits and added to the specified accumulator. The
results of [Wx] [Wy] are stored in Wxd, which may be the same as Wm.
Operands Wx, Wxd and Wyd specify the prefetch operations which
support indirect and register offset addressing as described in
Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches.
The m bits select the operand register Wm for the square.
The A bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The x bits select the prefetch difference Wxd destination.
The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

EDAC

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Before
Instruction
009A
1100
2300
00 3D0A 3D0A
007F
0028
0000

W4
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1100
Data 2300
SR

;
;
;
;
;

Square W4 and
add to ACCA
[W8]-[W10] to W4
Post-increment W8
Post-decrement W10

After
Instruction
0057
1102
22FE
00 3D0A 99AE
007F
0028
0000

Instruction
Descriptions

W4
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1100
Data 2300
SR

W4*W4, A, [W8]+=2, [w10]-=2, W4

DS70157E-page 245

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

EDAC W5*W5, B, [w9]+=2, [W11+W12], W5

W5
W9
W11
W12
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2508
SR

DS70157E-page 246

Before
Instruction
43C2
1200
2500
0008
00 28E3 F14C
6A7C
2B3D
0000

W5
W9
W11
W12
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2508
SR

;
;
;
;

Square W5 and
add to ACCB
[W9]-[W11+W12] to W5
Post-increment W9

After
Instruction
3F3F
1202
2500
0008
00 3AD3 1050
6A7C
2B3D
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

EXCH

Exchange Wns and Wnd

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0ddd

d000

ssss

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wns [W0 ... W15]

Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wns) (Wnd)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

EXCH

1111

Description:

1101

Wns,

0000

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wnd

Exchange the word contents of two working registers. Register direct

addressing must be used for Wns and Wnd.
The d bits select the address of the first register.
The s bits select the address of the second register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

EXCH

W1
W9
SR
Example 2:

EXCH

W4
W5
SR

This instruction only executes in Word mode.

W1, W9

Before
Instruction
55FF
A3A3
0000
W4, W5

Before
Instruction
ABCD
4321
0000

; Exchange the contents of W1 and W9

After
Instruction
W1
A3A3
W9
55FF
SR
0000
; Exchange the contents of W4 and W5

After
Instruction
W4
4321
W5
ABCD
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 247

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

FBCL

Find First Bit Change from Left

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

{label:}

FBCL

Ws,

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

Max_Shift = 15
Sign = (Ws) & 0x8000
Temp = (Ws) << 1
Shift = 0
While ( (Shift < Max_Shift) && ( (Temp & 0x8000) == Sign) )
Temp = Temp << 1
Shift = Shift + 1
-Shift (Wnd)

Status Affected:

Encoding:
Description:

1101

1111

0000

0ddd

dppp

ssss

Find the first occurrence of a one (for a positive value), or zero (for a
negative value), starting from the Most Significant bit after the sign bit of
Ws and working towards the Least Significant bit of the word operand. The
bit number result is sign-extended to 16 bits and placed in Wnd.
The next Most Significant bit after the sign bit is allocated bit number 0 and
the Least Significant bit is allocated bit number -14. This bit ordering
allows for the immediate use of Wd with the SFTAC instruction for scaling
values up. If a bit change is not found, a result of -15 is returned and the C
flag is set. When a bit change is found, the C flag is cleared.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

FBCL

W1, W9

Before
Instruction
W1
55FF
W9
FFFF
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 248

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

; Find 1st bit change from left in W1

; and store result to W9

After
Instruction
W1
55FF
W9
0000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

FBCL

W1, W9

Before
Instruction
W1 FFFF
W9 BBBB
SR
0000
Example 3:

FBCL

[W1++], W9

Before
Instruction
W1
2000
W9 BBBB
Data 2000
FF0A
SR
0000

; Find 1st bit change from left in W1

; and store result to W9

After
Instruction
W1 FFFF
W9 FFF1
SR 0001 (C = 1)
; Find 1st bit change from left in [W1]
; and store result to W9
; Post-increment W1

After
Instruction
W1 2002
W9 FFF9
Data 2000 FF0A
SR 0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 249

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

FF1L

Find First One from Left

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

FF1L

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

Max_Shift = 17
Temp = (Ws)
Shift = 1
While ( (Shift < Max_Shift) && !(Temp & 0x8000) )
Temp = Temp << 1
Shift = Shift + 1
If (Shift == Max_Shift)
0 (Wnd)
Else
Shift (Wnd)

Status Affected:

Encoding:
Description:

1100

1111

1000

0ddd

Finds the first occurrence of a 1 starting from the Most Significant bit of
Ws and working towards the Least Significant bit of the word operand.
The bit number result is zero-extended to 16 bits and placed in Wnd.
Bit numbering begins with the Most Significant bit (allocated number 1)
and advances to the Least Significant bit (allocated number 16). A result
of zero indicates a 1 was not found, and the C flag will be set. If a 1 is
found, the C flag is cleared.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

FF1L

W2, W5

Before
Instruction
W2
000A
W5 BBBB
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 250

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

; Find the 1st one from the left in W2

; and store result to W5

After
Instruction
W2
000A
W5
000D
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

FF1L

[W2++], W5

Before
Instruction
W2
2000
W5 BBBB
Data 2000
0000
SR
0000

; Find the 1st one from the left in [W2]

; and store the result to W5
; Post-increment W2

After
Instruction
W2
2002
W5
0000
Data 2000
0000
SR
0001 (C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 251

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

FF1R

Find First One from Right

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

FF1R

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

Max_Shift = 17
Temp = (Ws)
Shift = 1
While ( (Shift < Max_Shift) && !(Temp & 0x1) )
Temp = Temp >> 1
Shift = Shift + 1
If (Shift == Max_Shift)
0 (Wnd)
Else
Shift (Wnd)

Status Affected:

Encoding:
Description:

1100

1111

0000

0ddd

Finds the first occurrence of a 1 starting from the Least Significant bit of
Ws and working towards the Most Significant bit of the word operand. The
bit number result is zero-extended to 16 bits and placed in Wnd.
Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (allocated number 1)
and advances to the Most Significant bit (allocated number 16). A result of
zero indicates a 1 was not found, and the C flag will be set. If a 1 is
found, the C flag is cleared.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

FF1R

W1, W9

Before
Instruction
W1
000A
W9 BBBB
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 252

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

; Find the 1st one from the right in W1

; and store the result to W9

After
Instruction
W1
000A
W9
0002
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

FF1R

[W1++], W9

Before
Instruction
W1
2000
W9 BBBB
Data 2000
8000
SR
0000

; Find the 1st one from the right in [W1]

; and store the result to W9
; Post-increment W1

After
Instruction
W1
2002
W9
0010
Data 2000
8000
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 253

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

GOTO

Unconditional Jump

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

Syntax:

{label:}

GOTO

Operands:

Expr may be label or expression (but not a literal).

Expr is resolved by the linker to a lit23, where lit23 [0 ... 8388606].

Operation:

lit23 PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Expr

Encoding:
1st word

0000

0100

nnnn

nnn0

2nd word

0000

0nnn

nnnn

Description:

Unconditional jump to anywhere within the 4M instruction word program

memory range. The PC is loaded with the 23-bit literal specified in the
instruction. Since the PC must always reside on an even address boundary,
lit23<0> is ignored.
The n bits form the target address.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

2 (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F)

4 (PIC24E, dsPIC33E)

Example 1:

026000
GOTO
026004
MOV
.
...
.
...
027844 _THERE: MOV
027846
...

PC
SR
Example 2:

_THERE
W0, W1

Before
Instruction
02 6000
0000

; Jump to _THERE

#0x400, W2

Before
Instruction
02 6000
0000

000100 _code:
.
026000
026004

PC
SR

DS70157E-page 254

The linker will resolve the specified expression into the lit23 to be
used.

PC
SR
...
...
GOTO
...

; Code execution
; resumes here

After
Instruction
02 7844
0000
; start of code

_code+2

; Jump to _code+2

PC
SR

After
Instruction
00 0102
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

GOTO

Unconditional Indirect Jump

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

{label:}

GOTO

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

0 PC<22:16>
(Wn<15:1>) PC<15:1>
0 PC<0>
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None
0000

Description:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Syntax:

Encoding:

dsPIC30F

0001

0100

0000

ssss

Unconditional indirect jump within the first 32K words of program memory.
Zero is loaded into PC<22:16> and the value specified in (Wn) is loaded
into PC<15:1>. Since the PC must always reside on an even address
boundary, Wn<0> is ignored.
The s bits select the source register.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

006000
GOTO
006002
MOV
.
...
.
...
007844 _THERE: MOV
007846
...

W4
PC
SR

Before
Instruction
7844
00 6000
0000

W4
W0, W1

; Jump unconditionally
; to 16-bit value in W4

#0x400, W2

W4
PC
SR

; Code execution
; resumes here

After
Instruction
7844
00 7844
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 255

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

GOTO

Unconditional Indirect Jump

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

0 PC<22:16>
(Wn<15:1>) PC<15:1>
0 PC<0>
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

GOTO

0000

Description:

0001

0000

0100

0000

ssss

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

006000
GOTO
006002
MOV
.
...
.
...
007844 _THERE: MOV
007846
...

W4
PC
SR

DS70157E-page 256

Before
Instruction
7844
00 6000
0000

W4
W0, W1

; Jump unconditionally
; to 16-bit value in W4

#0x400, W2

W4
PC
SR

; Code execution
; resumes here

After
Instruction
7844
00 7844
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

GOTO.L

Unconditional Indirect Jump Long

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0, W2, W4, W6, W8, W10, W12]

Operation:

PC<23> PC<23> (see text); (Wn+1)<6:0> PC<22:16>; (Wn)

PC<15:0>r

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

GOTO.L

0001

1www

w100

0000

ssss

Unconditional indirect jump to any user program memory address.

The LS 7-bits of (Wn+1) are loaded in PC<22:16>, and the 16-bit value
(Wn) is loaded into PC<15:0>.
PC<23> is not modified by this instruction.
The contents of (Wn+1)<15:7> are ignored.
The value of Wn<0> is also ignored and PC<0> is always set to 0.
GOTO is a two-cycle instruction.
The s bits select the address of the Wn source register.
The w bits specify the address of the Wn+1 source register.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

026000
026004
.
.
026844 _FIR:
026846

PC
W4
W5
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR

Before
Instruction
02 6000
6844
0002
A268
FFFF
FFFF
0000

GOTO.L W4
MOV
W0, W1
...
...
MOV
#0x400, W2
...

PC
W4
W5
W15
Data A268
Data A26A
SR

; Call _FIR subroutine

; _FIR subroutine start

After
Instruction
02 6844
6844
0002
A26C
6004
0002
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 257

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

INC

Increment f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) + 1 destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

1110

Description:

INC{.B}

1100

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

0BDf

ffff

Add one to the contents of the file register, and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If
WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

INC.B

0x1000

; Increment 0x1000 (Byte mode)

Before
Instruction
Data 1000
8FFF
SR
0000
Example 2:

INC

0x1000, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG ABCD
Data 1000 8FFF
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 258

After
Instruction
Data 1000
8F00
SR
0101 (DC, C = 1)
; Increment 0x1000 and store to WREG
; (Word mode)

After
Instruction
WREG
9000
Data 1000
8FFF
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

INC

Increment Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

INC{.B}

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operands:
Operation:

(Ws) + 1 Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

1110

Description:

1000

0Bqq

qddd

Add 1 to the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the
destination register Wd. Register direct or indirect addressing may be
used for Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

INC.B

W1, [++W2]

Before
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2000
Data 2000 ABCD
SR
0000
Example 2:

INC

W1, W2

; Pre-increment W2
; Increment W1 and store to W2
; (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2001
Data 2000
80CD
SR
010C (DC, N, OV = 1)

; Increment W1 and store to W2

; (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
FF80
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)

DS70157E-page 259

Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

INC2

Increment f by 2

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) + 2 destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

INC2{.B}

1110

1100

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

1BDf

ffff

Add 2 to the contents of the file register and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If
WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

INC2.B

0x1000

Before
Instruction
Data 1000
8FFF
SR
0000
Example 2:

INC2

; Increment 0x1000 by 2
; (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
Data 1000
8F01
SR
0101 (DC, C = 1)

0x1000, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG ABCD
Data 1000
8FFF
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 260

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; Increment 0x1000 by 2 and store to WREG

; (Word mode)

After
Instruction
WREG
9001
Data 1000
8FFF
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

INC2

Increment Ws by 2

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

dppp

ssss

{label:}

Operands:

INC2{.B}

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Ws) + 2 Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

Ws,

1110

1000

1Bqq

qddd

Add 2 to the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the
destination register Wd. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used
for Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

INC2.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W1, [++W2]

Before
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2000
Data 2000 ABCD
SR
0000
Example 2:

INC2

W1, W2

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2001
Data 2000
81CD
SR
010C (DC, N, OV = 1)

; Increment W1 by 2 and store to W2

; (word mode)

After
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
FF81
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)

DS70157E-page 261

Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W1
FF7F
W2
2000
SR
0000

; Pre-increment W2
; Increment by 2 and store to W1
; (Byte mode)

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

IOR

Inclusive OR f and WREG

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f).IOR.(WREG) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

1011

Description:

IOR{.B}

0111

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

0BDf

ffff

Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the contents of the working

register WREG and the contents of the file register and place the result in
the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If
WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

IOR.B

0x1000

Before
Instruction
WREG
1234
Data 1000
FF00
SR
0000
Example 2:

IOR

0x1000, WREG

; IOR WREG to (0x1000) (Byte mode)

; (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
WREG
1234
Data 1000
FF34
SR
0000
; IOR (0x1000) to WREG
; (Word mode)

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG
1234
WREG
1FBF
Data 1000
0FAB
Data 1000
0FAB
SR
0008 (N = 1)
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 262

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

IOR

Inclusive OR Literal and Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

kkkk

dddd

Syntax:

{label:}

IOR{.B}

Operands:

lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation

lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit10.IOR.(Wn) Wn

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

1011

Description:

0011

#lit10,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0Bkk

Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the 10-bit literal operand

and the contents of the working register Wn and place the result back into
the working register Wn.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits specify the literal operand.
The d bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned
value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands
for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

IOR.B #0xAA, W9

Before
Instruction
W9
1234
SR
0000
Example 2:

IOR

#0x2AA, W4

Before
Instruction
W4
A34D
SR
0000

; IOR 0xAA to W9
; (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W9
12BE
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; IOR 0x2AA to W4
; (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W4
A3EF
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 263

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

IOR

Inclusive OR Wb and Short Literal

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

IOR{.B}

Wb,

#lit5,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb).IOR.lit5 Wd

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:
Description:

0111

0www

wBqq

qddd

d11k

kkkk

Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the contents of the base

register Wb and the 5-bit literal operand and place the result in the
destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

IOR.B

W1, #0x5, [W9++]

Before
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W9
2000
Data 2000
0000
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 264

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; IOR W1 and 0x5 (Byte mode)

; Store to [W9]
; Post-increment W9

After
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W9
2001
Data 2000
00AF
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

IOR

W1, #0x0, W9

Before
Instruction
W1
0000
W9
A34D
SR
0000

; IOR W1 with 0x0 (Word mode)

; Store to W9

After
Instruction
W1
0000
W9
0000
SR
0002 (Z = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 265

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

IOR

Inclusive OR Wb and Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

{label:}

IOR{.B}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb).IOR.(Ws) Wd

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:
Description:

0111

Wb,

0www

wBqq

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

qddd

dppp

ssss

Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the contents of the source

register Ws and the contents of the base register Wb, and place the result in
the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

IOR.B

W1, [W5++], [W9++]

Before
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W5
2000
W9
2400
Data 2000
1155
Data 2400
0000
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 266

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; IOR W1 and [W5] (Byte mode)

; Store result to [W9]
; Post-increment W5 and W9

After
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W5
2001
W9
2401
Data 2000
1155
Data 2400
00FF
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

IOR

W1
W5
W9
SR

W1, W5, W9

Before
Instruction
AAAA
5555
A34D
0000

; IOR W1 and W5 (Word mode)

; Store the result to W9

After
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W5
5555
W9
FFFF
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 267

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

LAC

Load Accumulator

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

{label:}

PIC24H

LAC

PIC24E

Ws,

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

rggg

ssss

{#Slit4,}

Acc

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[--Ws],
[++Ws],
[Ws+Wb],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wb [W0 ... W15]
Slit4 [-8 ... +7]
Acc [A,B]

Operation:

ShiftSlit4(Extend(Ws)) Acc(A or B)

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:
Description:

1100

1010

Awww

wrrr

Read the contents of the source register, optionally perform a signed 4-bit
shift and store the result in the specified accumulator. The shift range is -8:7,
where a negative operand indicates an arithmetic left shift and a positive
operand indicates an arithmetic right shift. The data stored in the source
register is assumed to be 1.15 fractional data and is automatically
sign-extended (through bit 39) and zero-backfilled (bits [15:0]), prior to
shifting.
The A bit specifies the destination accumulator.
The w bits specify the offset register Wb.
The r bits encode the accumulator pre-shift.
The g bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits specify the source register Ws.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

LAC

W4
ACCB
Data 2000
SR

DS70157E-page 268

If the operation moves more than sign-extension data into the

upper Accumulator register (AccxU), or causes a saturation, the
appropriate overflow and saturation bits will be set.

[W4++], #-3, B

Before
Instruction
2000
00 5125 ABCD
1221
0000

;
;
;
;
;

Load ACCB with [W4] << 3

Contents of [W4] do not change
Post increment W4
Assume saturation disabled
(SATB = 0)

W4
ACCB
Data 2000
SR

After
Instruction
2002
FF 9108 0000
1221
4800 (OB, OAB = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

LAC

[--W2], #7, A

W2
ACCA
Data 4000
Data 4002
SR

Before
Instruction
4002
00 5125 ABCD
9108
1221
0000

;
;
;
;
;

Pre-decrement W2
Load ACCA with [W2] >> 7
Contents of [W2] do not change
Assume saturation disabled
(SATA = 0)

W2
ACCA
Data 4000
Data 4002
SR

After
Instruction
4000
FF FF22 1000
9108
1221
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 269

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

LNK

Allocate Stack Frame

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit14 [0 ... 16382]

Operation:

(W14) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
(W15) W14
(W15) + lit14 W15

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1111

Description:

LNK

1010

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

kkkk

#lit14

00kk

kkk0

This instruction allocates a Stack Frame of size lit14 bytes for a

subroutine calling sequence. The Stack Frame is allocated by PUSHing
the contents of the Frame Pointer (W14) onto the stack, storing the
updated Stack Pointer (W15) to the Frame Pointer and then incrementing
the Stack Pointer by the unsigned 14-bit literal operand. This instruction
supports a maximum Stack Frame of 16382 bytes.
The k bits specify the size of the Stack Frame.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

LNK

W14
W15
Data 2000
SR

DS70157E-page 270

#0xA0

Since the Stack Pointer can only reside on a word boundary,

lit14 must be even.

; Allocate a stack frame of 160 bytes

Before
Instruction
2000
2000
0000
0000

W14
W15
Data 2000
SR

After
Instruction
2002
20A2
2000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

LNK

Allocate Stack Frame

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit14 [0 ... 16382]

Operation:

(W14) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
(W15) W14
1 SFA bit
(W15) + lit14 W15

Status Affected:

SFA

Encoding:

1111

Description:

LNK

1010

#lit14

00kk

kkkk

kkk0

This instruction allocates a Stack Frame of size lit14 bytes for a

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

LNK

W14
W15
Data 2000
SR
CORCON

#0xA0

Since the Stack Pointer can only reside on a word boundary,

lit14 must be even.

; Allocate a stack frame of 160 bytes

Before
Instruction
2000
2000
0000
0000
0000

W14
W15
Data 2000
SR
CORCON

After
Instruction
2002
20A2
2000
0000
0004

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 271

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

LSR

Logical Shift Right f

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

ffff

{label:}

LSR{.B}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

For byte operation:

0 Dest<7>
(f<7:1>) Dest<6:0>
(f<0>) C
For word operation:
0 Dest<15>
(f<15:1>) Dest<14:0>
(f<0>) C
C

Status Affected:

N, Z, C

Encoding:

1101

Description:

{,WREG}

0101

0BDf

ffff

Shift the contents of the file register one bit to the right and place the result
in the destination register. The Least Significant bit of the file register is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register. Zero is shifted into the
Most Significant bit of the destination register.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG
is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the
result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

LSR.B

0x600

Before
Instruction
Data 600
55FF
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 272

; Logically shift right (0x600) by one

; (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
Data 600
557F
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

LSR

0x600, WREG

Before
Instruction
Data 600
55FF
WREG
0000
SR
0000

; Logically shift right (0x600) by one

; Store to WREG
; (Word mode)

After
Instruction
Data 600
55FF
WREG
2AFF
SR
0001 (C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 273

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

LSR

Logical Shift Right Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

LSR{.B}

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

0 Wd<7>
(Ws<7:1>) Wd<6:0>
(Ws<0>) C
For word operation:
0 Wd<15>
(Ws<15:1>) Wd<14:0>
(Ws<0>) C

dppp

ssss

N, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

Status Affected:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

1101

0001

0Bqq

qddd

Shift the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right, and place
the result in the destination register Wd. The Least Significant bit of Ws is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register. Zero is shifted into the
Most Significant bit of Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing
may be used for Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

LSR.B

W0, W1

Before
Instruction
W0
FF03
W1
2378
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 274

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; LSR W0 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W1

After
Instruction
W0
FF03
W1
2301
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

LSR

W0, W1

Before
Instruction
W0
8000
W1
2378
SR
0000

; LSR W0 (Word mode)

; Store the result to W1

After
Instruction
W0
8000
W1
4000
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 275

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

LSR

Logical Shift Right by Short Literal

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit4 [0 ... 15]
Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit4<3:0> Shift_Val
0 Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1>
Wb<15:Shift_Val> Wnd<15-Shift_Val:0>

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

1101

Description:

LSR

1110

Wb,

0www

#lit4,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

d100

kkkk

Wnd

wddd

Logical shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 4-bit
unsigned literal and store the result in the destination register Wnd. Direct
addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

LSR

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

W4, #14, W5

Before
Instruction
W4
C800
W5
1200
SR
0000
Example 2:

LSR

W4, #1, W5

Before
Instruction
W4
0505
W5
F000
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 276

; LSR W4 by 14
; Store result to W5

After
Instruction
W4
C800
W5
0003
SR
0000
; LSR W4 by 1
; Store result to W5

After
Instruction
W4
0505
W5
0282
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

LSR

Logical Shift Right by Wns

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wns [W0 ...W15]
Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

Wns<4:0> Shift_Val
0 Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1>
Wb<15:Shift_Val> Wnd<15 - Shift_Val:0>

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

1101

Description:

LSR

1110

Wb,

0www

Wns,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

d000

ssss

Wnd

wddd

Logical shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 5 Least
Significant bits of Wns (only up to 15 positions) and store the result in the
destination register Wnd. Direct addressing must be used for Wb and
Wnd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the destination register.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: If Wns is greater than 15, Wnd will be loaded with 0x0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

LSR

W0, W1, W2

Before
Instruction
W0
C00C
W1
0001
W2
2390
SR
0000
Example 2:

LSR

W5, W4, W3

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W0
C00C
W1
0001
W2
6006
SR
0000
; LSR W5 by W4
; Store result to W3

After
Instruction
W3
0000
W4
000C
W5
0800
SR
0002 (Z = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W3
DD43
W4
000C
W5
0800
SR
0000

; LSR W0 by W1
; Store result to W2

DS70157E-page 277

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MAC

Multiply and Accumulate

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

{label:} MAC

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

{,[Wy], Wyd}

{,AWB}

Wm*Wn, Acc {,[Wx], Wxd}

{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}

{,[Wx] = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] = ky, Wyd}

{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}

{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}

Operands:

Wm * Wn [W4 * W5, W4 * W6, W4 * W7, W5 * W6, W5 * W7, W6 * W7]

Acc [A,B]
Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7]
Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7]
AWB [W13, [W13] + = 2]

Operation:

(Acc(A or B)) (Wm) * (Wn) Acc(A or B)

([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx
([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy
(Acc(B or A)) rounded AWB

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:
Description:

1100

0mmm

A0xx

yyii

iijj

jjaa

Multiply the contents of two working registers, optionally prefetch operands

in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the
unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is
sign-extended to 40 bits and added to the specified accumulator.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations,
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in
Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. Operand AWB specifies the optional
store of the other accumulator, as described in
Section 4.14.4 MAC Write Back.
The m bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply.
The A bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
The a bits select the accumulator Write Back destination.
Note:

DS70157E-page 278

Words:

Cycles:

The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is

fractional or an integer.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 1:

MAC W4*W5, A, [W8]+=6, W4, [W10]+=2, W5

; Multiply W4*W5 and add to ACCA
; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 6
; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2
; CORCON = 0x00C0 (fractional multiply, normal saturation)

W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0A00
Data 1800
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

Before
Instruction
A022
B900
0A00
1800
00 1200 0000
2567
909C
00C0
0000

W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0A00
Data 1800
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
2567
909C
0A06
1802
00 472D 2400
2567
909C
00C0
0000

MAC W4*W5, A, [W8]-=2, W4, [W10]+=2, W5, W13

; Multiply W4*W5 and add to ACCA
; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-decrement W8 by 2
; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2
; Write Back ACCB to W13
; CORCON = 0x00D0 (fractional multiply, super saturation)

W4
W5
W8
W10
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 0A00
Data 1800
CORCON
SR

Before
Instruction
1000
3000
0A00
1800
2000
23 5000 2000
00 0000 8F4C
5BBE
C967
00D0
0000

W4
W5
W8
W10
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 0A00
Data 1800
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
5BBE
C967
09FE
1802
0001
23 5600 2000
00 0000 1F4C
5BBE
C967
00D0
8800 (OA, OAB = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 279

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MAC

Square and Accumulate

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

{label:} MAC

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

Wm*Wm, Acc {,[Wx], Wxd}

{,[Wy], Wyd}

{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}

{,[Wx] = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] = ky, Wyd}

{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}

{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}

Operands:

Wm * Wm [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7]

Acc [A,B]
Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7]
Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7]

Operation:

(Acc(A or B)) (Wm) * (Wm) Acc(A or B)

([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx
([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:
Description:

1111

00mm

A0xx

yyii

iijj

jj00

Square the contents of a working register, optionally prefetch operands in

preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the
unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is
sign-extended to 40 bits and added to the specified accumulator.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations,
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in
Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches.
The m bits select the operand register Wm for the square.
The A bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Note:

DS70157E-page 280

Words:

Cycles:

The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is fractional

or an integer.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 1:

MAC W4*W4, B, [W9+W12], W4, [W10]-=2, W5

; Square W4 and add to ACCB
; Fetch [W9+W12] to W4
; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-decrement W10 by 2
; CORCON = 0x00C0 (fractional multiply, normal saturation)

W4
W5
W9
W10
W12
ACCB
Data 0C20
Data 1900
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

Before
Instruction
A022
B200
0C00
1900
0020
00 2000 0000
A230
650B
00C0
0000

W4
W5
W9
W10
W12
ACCB
Data 0C20
Data 1900
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
A230
650B
0C00
18FE
0020
00 67CD 0908
A230
650B
00C0
0000

MAC W7*W7, A, [W11]-=2, W7

; Square W7 and add to ACCA
; Fetch [W11] to W7, Post-decrement W11 by 2
; CORCON = 0x00D0 (fractional multiply, super saturation)

W7
W11
ACCA
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

Before
Instruction
76AE
2000
FE 9834 4500
23FF
00D0
0000

W7
W11
ACCA
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
23FF
1FFE
FF 063E 0188
23FF
00D0
8800 (OA, OAB = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 281

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MOV

Move f to Destination

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

ffff

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

1011

Description:

MOV{.B}

1111

{,WREG}

1BDf

ffff

Move the contents of the specified file register to the destination register.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored back to the file register and the only effect is
to modify the STATUS register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
3: When moving word data from file register memory, the MOV f
to Wnd (page 5-147) instruction allows any working register
(W0:W15) to be the destination register.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOV.B

TMR0, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
9080
TMR0
2355
SR
0000
Example 2:

MOV

0x800

Before
Instruction
Data 0800 B29F
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 282

; move (TMR0) to WREG (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
9055
TMR0
2355
SR
0000
; update SR based on (0x800) (Word mode)

After
Instruction
Data 0800 B29F
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MOV

Move WREG to f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

ffff

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(WREG) f

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1011

Description:

MOV{.B}

0111

WREG,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

1B1f

Move the contents of the default working register WREG into the
specified file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
3: When moving word data from the working register array to file
register memory, the MOV Wns to f (page 5-148) instruction
allows any working register (W0:W15) to be the source register.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOV.B

WREG, 0x801

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
98F3
Data 0800
4509
SR
0000
Example 2:

MOV

After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
98F3
Data 0800
F309
SR
0008 (N = 1)

WREG, DISICNT

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
00A0
DISICNT
0000
SR
0000

; move WREG to 0x801 (Byte mode)

; move WREG to DISICNT

After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
00A0
DISICNT
00A0
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 283

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MOV

Move f to Wnd

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

ffff

dddd

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 65534]
Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(f) Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1000

Description:

MOV

0fff

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wnd

ffff

Move the word contents of the specified file register to Wnd. The file
register may reside anywhere in the 32K words of data memory, but must
be word-aligned. Register direct addressing must be used for Wnd.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
The d bits select the destination register.
Note 1: This instruction operates on word operands only.
2: Since the file register address must be word-aligned, only the
upper 15 bits of the file register address are encoded (bit 0 is
assumed to be 0).
3: To move a byte of data from file register memory, the MOV f
to Destination instruction (page 5-145) may be used.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOV

CORCON, W12

Before
Instruction
W12
78FA
CORCON
00F0
SR
0000
Example 2:

MOV

DS70157E-page 284

After
Instruction
W12
00F0
CORCON
00F0
SR
0000

0x27FE, W3

Before
Instruction
W3
0035
Data 27FE ABCD
SR
0000

; move CORCON to W12

; move (0x27FE) to W3

After
Instruction
W3 ABCD
Data 27FE ABCD
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MOV

Move Wns to f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

ffff

ssss

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 65534]
Wns [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wns) f

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1000

Description:

MOV

1fff

Wns,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

ffff

Move the word contents of the working register Wns to the specified file
register. The file register may reside anywhere in the 32K words of data
memory, but must be word-aligned. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wn.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates on word operands only.
2: Since the file register address must be word-aligned, only the
upper 15 bits of the file register address are encoded (bit 0 is
assumed to be 0).
3: To move a byte of data to file register memory, the MOV WREG
to f instruction (page 5-146) may be used.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOV

W4, XMDOSRT

Before
Instruction
W4
1200
XMODSRT
1340
SR
0000
Example 2:

MOV

After
Instruction
W4
1200
XMODSRT
1200
SR
0000

W8, 0x1222

Before
Instruction
W8
F200
Data 1222
FD88
SR
0000

; move W4 to XMODSRT

; move W8 to data address 0x1222

After
Instruction
W8
F200
Data 1222
F200
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 285

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MOV.B

Move 8-bit Literal to Wnd

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

kkkk

dddd

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit8 [0 ... 255]

Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit8 Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

MOV.B

0011

#lit8,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wnd

1100

The unsigned 8-bit literal k is loaded into the lower byte of Wnd. The
upper byte of Wnd is not changed. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wnd.
The k bits specify the value of the literal.
The d bits select the address of the working register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOV.B

This instruction operates in Byte mode and the .B extension

must be provided.

#0x17, W5

Before
Instruction
W5
7899
SR
0000
Example 2:

MOV.B

#0xFE, W9

Before
Instruction
W9
AB23
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 286

; load W5 with #0x17 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W5
7817
SR
0000
; load W9 with #0xFE (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
W9
ABFE
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MOV

Move 16-bit Literal to Wnd

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

kkkk

dddd

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit16 [-32768 ... 65535]

Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit16 Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

MOV

0010

Description:

kkkk

#lit16,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wnd

kkkk

The 16-bit literal k is loaded into Wnd. Register direct addressing must
be used for Wnd.
The k bits specify the value of the literal.
The d bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: This instruction operates only in Word mode.
2: The literal may be specified as a signed value [-32768:32767],
or unsigned value [0:65535].

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOV

#0x4231, W13

Before
Instruction
W13
091B
SR
0000
Example 2:

Example 3:

MOV

#0x4, W2

; load W13 with #0x4231

After
Instruction
W13
4231
SR
0000
; load W2 with #0x4

Before
Instruction
W2
B004
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W2
0004
SR
0000

MOV

; load W8 with #-1000

#-1000, W8

Before
Instruction
W8
23FF
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W8
FC18
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 287

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MOV

Move [Ws with offset] to Wnd

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dkkk

ssss

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Slit10 [-512 ... 511] for byte operation
Slit10 [-1024 ... 1022] (even only) for word operation
Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

[Ws + Slit10] Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1001

Description:

MOV{.B}

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0kkk

[Ws + Slit10], Wnd

kBkk

kddd

The contents of [Ws + Slit10] are loaded into Wnd. In Word mode, the
range of Slit10 is increased to [-1024 ... 1022] and Slit10 must be even to
maintain word address alignment. Register indirect addressing must be
used for the source, and direct addressing must be used for Wnd.
The k bits specify the value of the literal.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The d bits select the destination register.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.
2: In Byte mode, the range of Slit10 is not reduced as specified in
Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands, since the literal
represents an address offset from Ws.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOV.B

[W8+0x13], W10

Before
Instruction
W8
1008
W10
4009
Data 101A
3312
SR
0000
Example 2:

MOV

DS70157E-page 288

After
Instruction
W8
1008
W10
4033
Data 101A
3312
SR
0000

[W4+0x3E8], W2

Before
Instruction
W2
9088
W4
0800
Data 0BE8
5634
SR
0000

; load W10 with [W8+0x13]

; (Byte mode)

; load W2 with [W4+0x3E8]

; (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W2
5634
W4
0800
Data 0BE8
5634
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MOV

Move Wns to [Wd with offset]

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wns [W0 ... W15]

Slit10 [-512 ... 511] in Byte mode
Slit10 [-1024 ... 1022] (even only) in Word mode
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wns) [Wd + Slit10]

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1001

Description:

MOV{.B}

1kkk

Wns,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dkkk

ssss

[Wd + Slit10]

kBkk

kddd

The contents of Wns are stored to [Wd + Slit10]. In Word mode, the range
of Slit10 is increased to [-1024 ... 1022] and Slit10 must be even to
maintain word address alignment. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wns, and indirect addressing must be used for the destination.
The k bits specify the value of the literal.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The d bits select the destination register.
The s bits select the address of the destination register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.
2: In Byte mode, the range of Slit10 is not reduced as specified in
Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands, since the literal
represents an address offset from Wd.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOV.B

W0, [W1+0x7]

Before
Instruction
W0
9015
W1
1800
Data 1806
2345
SR
0000
Example 2:

MOV

; store W11 to [W1-0x400]

; (Word mode)

After
Instruction
W1
1000
W11
8813
Data 0C00
8813
SR
0000

Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W0
9015
W1
1800
Data 1806
1545
SR
0000

W11, [W1-0x400]

Before
Instruction
W1
1000
W11
8813
Data 0C00
FFEA
SR
0000

; store W0 to [W1+0x7]
; (Byte mode)

DS70157E-page 289

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MOV

Move Ws to Wd

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

MOV{.B}

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dggg

ssss

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[Ws + Wb], [Wd + Wb]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wb [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Ws) Wd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

0111

1www

wBhh

hddd

Move the contents of the source register into the destination register.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The w bits define the offset register Wb.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The h bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The g bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.
2: When Register Offset Addressing mode is used for both the
source and destination, the offset must be the same because
the w encoding bits are shared by Ws and Wd.
3: The instruction PUSH Ws translates to MOV Ws, [W15++].
4: The instruction POP Wd translates to MOV [--W15], Wd.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOV.B

[W0--], W4

Before
Instruction
W0
0A01
W4
2976
Data 0A00
8988
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 290

; Move [W0] to W4 (Byte mode)

; Post-decrement W0

After
Instruction
W0
0A00
W4
2989
Data 0A00
8988
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

MOV

[W6++], [W2+W3]

Before
Instruction
W2
0800
W3
0040
W6
1228
Data 0840
9870
Data 1228
0690
SR
0000

; Move [W6] to [W2+W3] (Word mode)

; Post-increment W6

After
Instruction
W2
0800
W3
0040
W6
122A
Data 0840
0690
Data 1228
0690
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 291

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MOV.D

Double Word Move from Source to Wnd

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

MOV.D

0ddd

0ppp

ssss

Wns,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wns [W0, W2, W4 ... W14]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W14]

Operation:

For direct addressing of source:

Wns Wnd
Wns + 1 Wnd + 1
For indirect addressing of source:
See Description

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1110

0000

Move the double word specified by the source to a destination working

register pair (Wnd:Wnd + 1). If register direct addressing is used for the
source, the contents of two successive working registers (Wns:Wns + 1)
are moved to Wnd:Wnd + 1. If indirect addressing is used for the source,
Ws specifies the effective address for the least significant word of the
double word. Any pre/post-increment or pre/post-decrement will adjust Ws
by 4 bytes to accommodate for the double word.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the address of the first source register.
Note 1: This instruction only operates on double words. See Figure 4-3
for information on how double words are aligned in memory.
2: Wnd must be an even working register.
3: The instruction POP.D Wnd translates to MOV.D [--W15],
Wnd.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOV.D

W2, W6

Before
Instruction
W2
12FB
W3
9877
W6
9833
W7
FCC6
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 292

; Move W2 to W6 (Double mode)

After
Instruction
W2
12FB
W3
9877
W6
12FB
W7
9877
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

MOV.D

[W7--], W4

Before
Instruction
W4
B012
W5
FD89
W7
0900
Data 0900
A319
Data 0902
9927
SR
0000

; Move [W7] to W4 (Double mode)

; Post-decrement W7

After
Instruction
W4
A319
W5
9927
W7
08FC
Data 0900
A319
Data 0902
9927
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 293

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MOVPAG

Move Literal to Page Register

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

MOVPAG

#lit10,

DSRPAG

#lit9,

DSWPAG

#lit8,

TBLPAG

Operands:

lit10 [0 ... 1023], lit9 [0 ... 511], lit8 [0 ... 255]

Operation:

lit10 DSRPAG or lit9 DSWPAG or lit8 TBLPAG

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1111

Description:

1110

1100

PPkk

kkkk

The appropriate number of bits from the unsigned literal k are loaded
into the DSRPAG, DSWPAG, or TBLPAG register. The assembler
restricts the literal to a 9-bit unsigned value when the destination is DSWPAG, and an 8-bit unsigned value when the destination is TBLPAG.
The P bits select the destination register.
The k bits specify the value of the literal.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MOVPAG #0x02, DSRPAG

Before
Instruction
DSRPAG
0000

DS70157E-page 294

This instruction operates in word mode only.

After
Instruction
DSRPAG
0002

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MOVPAGW
Implemented in:

Move Ws to Page Register

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

MOVPAGW Ws,

X
DSRPAG
DSWPAG
TBLPAG

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

Ws<9:0> DSRPAG or Ws<8:0> DSWPAG or Ws<7:0> TBLPAG

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1111

Description:

1110

1101

PP00

0000

ssss

The appropriate number of bits from the register Ws are loaded into the
DSRPAG, DSWPAG, or TBLPAG register. The assembler restricts the literal to a 9-bit unsigned value when the destination is DSWPAG, and an
8-bit unsigned value when the destination is TBLPAG.
The P bits select the destination register.
The s bits specify the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

This instruction operates in word mode only.

MOVPAG W2, DSRPAG

Before
Instruction
DSRPAG
0000
W2
0002

After
Instruction
DSRPAG
0002
W2
0002

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 295

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MOVSAC

Prefetch Operands and Store Accumulator

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

{label:} MOVSAC Acc {,[Wx], Wxd}

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

{,[Wy], Wyd}

{,AWB}

{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}

{,[Wx] = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] = ky, Wyd}

{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}

{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}

Operands:

Acc [A,B]
Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7]
Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7]
AWB [W13, [W13] + = 2]

Operation:

([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx

([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy
(Acc(B or A)) rounded AWB

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1100

0111

A0xx

yyii

iijj

jjaa

Optionally prefetch operands in preparation for another MAC type

instruction and optionally store the unspecified accumulator results. Even
though an accumulator operation is not performed in this instruction, an
accumulator must be specified to designate which accumulator to write
back.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. Operand AWB specifies the optional
store of the other accumulator, as described in
Section 4.14.4 MAC Write Back.
The A bit selects the other accumulator used for write back.
The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
The a bits select the accumulator Write Back destination.

DS70157E-page 296

Words:

Cycles:

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 1:

MOVSAC
; Fetch
; Fetch
; Store

W6
W7
W9
W11
W13
ACCA
Data 0800
Data 1900
SR
Example 2:

Before
Instruction
A022
B200
0800
1900
0020
00 3290 5968
7811
B2AF
0000

MOVSAC
; Fetch
; Fetch
; Store

W4
W6
W9
W11
W12
W13
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2024
Data 2300
SR

B, [W9], W6, [W11]+=4, W7, W13

[W9] to W6
[W11] to W7, Post-increment W11 by 4
ACCA to W13

W6
W7
W9
W11
W13
ACCA
Data 0800
Data 1900
SR

After
Instruction
7811
B2AF
0800
1904
3290
00 3290 5968
7811
B2AF
0000

A, [W9]-=2, W4, [W11+W12], W6, [W13]+=2

[W9] to W4, Post-decrement W9 by 2
[W11+W12] to W6
ACCB to [W13], Post-increment W13 by 2

Before
Instruction
76AE
2000
1200
2000
0024
2300
00 9834 4500
BB00
52CE
23FF
0000

W4
W6
W9
W11
W12
W13
ACCB
Data 1200
Data 2024
Data 2300
SR

After
Instruction
BB00
52CE
11FE
2000
0024
2302
00 9834 4500
BB00
52CE
9834
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 297

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MPY

Multiply Wm by Wn to Accumulator

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

{label:} MPY

PIC24H

Wm * Wn, Acc

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

{,[Wx], Wxd}

{,[Wy], Wyd}

{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}

{,[Wx] = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] = ky, Wyd}

{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}

{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}

Operands:

Wm * Wn [W4 * W5, W4 * W6, W4 * W7, W5 * W6, W5 * W7, W6 * W7]

Acc [A,B]
Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7]
Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7]
AWB [W13], [W13] + = 2

Operation:

(Wm) * (Wn) Acc(A or B)

([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx
([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:
Description:

1100

0mmm

A0xx

yyii

iijj

jj11

Multiply the contents of two working registers, optionally prefetch

operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally
store the unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed
multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and stored to the specified
accumulator.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in
Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches.
The m bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply:
The A bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Note:

DS70157E-page 298

Words:

Cycles:

The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is

fractional or an integer.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 1:

MPY
;
;
;
;

W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1780
Data 2400
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

W4*W5, A, [W8]+=2, W6, [W10]-=2, W7

Multiply W4*W5 and store to ACCA

Fetch [W8] to W6, Post-increment W8 by 2
Fetch [W10] to W7, Post-decrement W10 by 2
CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)

Before
Instruction
C000
9000
0800
B200
1780
2400
FF F780 2087
671F
E3DC
0000
0000

W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 1780
Data 2400
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
C000
9000
671F
E3DC
1782
23FE
00 3800 0000
671F
E3DC
0000
0000

MPY W6*W7, B, [W8]+=2, W4, [W10]-=2, W5

; Multiply W6*W7 and store to ACCB
; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 2
; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-decrement W10 by 2
; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)

W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCB
Data 1782
Data 23FE
CORCON
SR

Before
Instruction
C000
9000
671F
E3DC
1782
23FE
00 9834 4500
8FDC
0078
0000
0000

W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCB
Data 1782
Data 23FE
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
8FDC
0078
671F
E3DC
1784
23FC
FF E954 3748
8FDC
0078
0000
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 299

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MPY

Square to Accumulator

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

{label:} MPY Wm * Wm, Acc

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

{,[Wx], Wxd}

{,[Wy], Wyd}

{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}

{,[Wx] = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] = ky, Wyd}

{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}

{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}

Operands:

Wm * Wm [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7]

Acc [A,B]
Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7]
Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7]

Operation:

(Wm) * (Wm) Acc(A or B)

([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx
([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:

1111

Description:

00mm

A0xx

yyii

iijj

jj01

Square the contents of a working register, optionally prefetch operands in

preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the
unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is
sign-extended to 40 bits and stored in the specified accumulator.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations
which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches.
The m bits select the operand register Wm for the square.
The A bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MPY

The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is

fractional or an integer.

W6*W6, A, [W9]+=2, W6

; Square W6 and store to ACCA

; Fetch [W9] to W6, Post-increment W9 by 2
; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)

W6
W9
ACCA
Data 0900
CORCON
SR

DS70157E-page 300

Before
Instruction
6500
0900
00 7C80 0908
B865
0000
0000

W6
W9
ACCA
Data 0900
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
B865
0902
00 4FB2 0000
B865
0000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

MPY W4*W4, B, [W9+W12], W4, [W10]+=2, W5

; Square W4 and store to ACCB
; Fetch [W9+W12] to W4
; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2
; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)

W4
W5
W9
W10
W12
ACCB
Data 1600
Data 1B00
CORCON
SR

Before
Instruction
E228
9000
1700
1B00
FF00
00 9834 4500
8911
F678
0000
0000

W4
W5
W9
W10
W12
ACCB
Data 1600
Data 1B00
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
8911
F678
1700
1B02
FF00
00 06F5 4C80
8911
F678
0000
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 301

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MPY.N

Multiply -Wm by Wn to Accumulator

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

{label:} MPY.N Wm * Wn, Acc

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

{,[Wx], Wxd}

{,[Wy], Wyd}

{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}

{,[Wx] = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] = ky, Wyd}

{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}

{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}

Operands:

Wm * Wn [W4 * W5; W4 * W6; W4 * W7; W5 * W6; W5 * W7; W6 * W7]

Acc [A,B]
Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7]
Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7]

Operation:

-(Wm) * (Wn) Acc(A or B)

([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx
([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB

Encoding:
Description:

1100

0mmm

A1xx

yyii

iijj

jj11

Multiply the contents of a working register by the negative of the contents

of another working register, optionally prefetch operands in preparation for
another MAC type instruction and optionally store the unspecified
accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is
sign-extended to 40 bits and stored to the specified accumulator.
The m bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply.
The A bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Note:

DS70157E-page 302

Words:

Cycles:

The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is fractional

or an integer.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 1:

MPY.N
;
;
;
;

W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0B00
Data 2000
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

MPY.N
;
;
;
;

W4*W5, A, [W8]+=2, W4, [W10]+=2, W5

Multiply W4*W5, negate the result and store to ACCA

Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 2
Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2
CORCON = 0x0001 (integer multiply, no saturation)

Before
Instruction
3023
1290
0B00
2000
00 0000 2387
0054
660A
0001
0000

W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0B00
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
0054
660A
0B02
2002
FF FC82 7650
0054
660A
0001
0000

W4*W5, A, [W8]+=2, W4, [W10]+=2, W5

Multiply W4*W5, negate the result and store to ACCA

Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 2
Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2
CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)

W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0B00
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

Before
Instruction
3023
1290
0B00
2000
00 0000 2387
0054
660A
0000
0000

W4
W5
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0B00
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
0054
660A
0B02
2002
FF F904 ECA0
0054
660A
0000
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 303

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MSC

Multiply and Subtract from Accumulator

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

{label:} MSC Wm * Wn, Acc

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F

dsPIC33E

{,[Wx], Wxd}

{,[Wy], Wyd}

{,AWB}

{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}

{,[Wx] = kx, Wxd}

{,[Wy] = ky, Wyd}

{,[W9 + W12], Wxd}

{,[W11 + W12], Wyd}

Operands:

Wm * Wn [W4 * W5, W4 * W6, W4 * W7, W5 * W6, W5 * W7, W6 * W7]

Acc [A,B]
Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7]
Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7]
AWB [W13, [W13] + = 2]

Operation:

(Acc(A or B)) (Wm) * (Wn) Acc(A or B)

([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx
([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy
(Acc(B or A)) rounded AWB

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:
Description:

1100

0mmm

A1xx

yyii

iijj

jjaa

Multiply the contents of two working registers, optionally prefetch

operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally
store the unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed
multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and subtracted from the specified
accumulator.
Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations
which support indirect and register offset addressing as described in
Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. Operand AWB specifies the optional
store of the other accumulator as described in
Section 4.14.4 MAC Write Back.
The m bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply.
The A bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination.
The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination.
The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation.
The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
The a bits select the accumulator Write Back destination.
Note:

DS70157E-page 304

Words:

Cycles:

The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is

fractional or an integer.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 1:

MSC
;
;
;
;

W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0C00
Data 1C00
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

MSC
;
;
;
;

W6*W7, A, [W8]-=4, W6, [W10]-=4, W7

Multiply W6*W7 and subtract the result from ACCA

Fetch [W8] to W6, Post-decrement W8 by 4
Fetch [W10] to W7, Post-decrement W10 by 4
CORCON = 0x0001 (integer multiply, no saturation)

Before
Instruction
9051
7230
0C00
1C00
00 0567 8000
D309
100B
0001
0000

W6
W7
W8
W10
ACCA
Data 0C00
Data 1C00
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
D309
100B
0BFC
1BFC
00 3738 5ED0
D309
100B
0001
0000

W4*W5, B, [W11+W12], W5, W13

Multiply W4*W5 and subtract the result from ACCB

Fetch [W11+W12] to W5
Write Back ACCA to W13
CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)

W4
W5
W11
W12
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

Before
Instruction
0500
2000
1800
0800
6233
00 3738 5ED0
00 1000 0000
3579
0000
0000

W4
W5
W11
W12
W13
ACCA
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
0500
3579
1800
0800
3738
00 3738 5ED0
00 0EC0 0000
3579
0000
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 305

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MUL

Integer Unsigned Multiply f and WREG

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

ffff

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

For byte operation:

(WREG)<7:0> * (f)<7:0> W2
For word operation:
(WREG) * (f) W2:W3

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1011

Description:

MUL{.B}

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

1100

0B0f

Multiply the default working register WREG with the specified file
register and place the result in the W2:W3 register pair. Both operands
and the result are interpreted as unsigned integers. If this instruction is
executed in Byte mode, the 16-bit result is stored in W2. In Word mode,
the most significant word of the 32-bit result is stored in W3, and the
least significant word of the 32-bit result is stored in W2.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
3: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.
4: This is the only instruction, which provides for an 8-bit
multiply.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.B

0x800

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
9823
W2
FFFF
W3
FFFF
Data 0800
2690
SR
0000
Example 2:

MUL

TMR1

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
F001
W2
0000
W3
0000
TMR1
3287
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 306

; Multiply (0x800)*WREG (Byte mode)

WREG (W0)
W2
W3
Data 0800
SR

After
Instruction
9823
13B0
FFFF
2690
0000

; Multiply (TMR1)*WREG (Word mode)

WREG (W0)
W2
W3
TMR1
SR

After
Instruction
F001
C287
2F5E
3287
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MUL.SS

Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

MUL.SS

Wb,

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

Operation:

signed (Wb) * signed (Ws) Wnd:Wnd + 1

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1001

1www

wddd

Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in
Wnd + 1. Both source operands and the result Wnd are interpreted as
twos complement signed integers. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wb and Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing
may be used for Ws.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-2 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.SS

W0, W1, W12

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W0
9823
W1
67DC
W12
D314
W13 D5DC
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W0
9823
W1
67DC
W12
FFFF
W13
FFFF
SR
0000

; Multiply W0*W1
; Store the result to W12:W13

DS70157E-page 307

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

MUL.SS

W2, [--W4], W0

Before
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W1
FFFF
W2
0045
W4
27FE
Data 27FC
0098
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 308

; Pre-decrement W4
; Multiply W2*[W4]
; Store the result to W0:W1

After
Instruction
W0
28F8
W1
0000
W2
0045
W4
27FC
Data 27FC
0098
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MUL.SS

Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply with Accumulator

Destination

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Syntax:

{label:}

MUL.SS

Wb,

Ws,
[Ws],

[Ws++],

[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
ACC [A, B]

Operation:

signed (Wb) * signed (Ws) ACC(A or B)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1011

Description:

1001

1www

w111

Appp

ssss

Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit signed multiply with a 32-bit result, which is

stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is sign extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the
target accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by the IF bit
in CORCON<0>). Both source operands are treated as signed values.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the source register.
The p bits select source Address mode 2.
The A bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.SS

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Before
Instruction
9823
67DC
00 0000 0000
0000

W0
W1
Acc A
SR

After
Instruction
9823
67DC
FF D5DC D314
0000

Instruction
Descriptions

W0
W1
Acc A
SR

W0, W1, A

DS70157E-page 309

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MUL.SU

Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

MUL.SU

Wb,

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

#lit5,

signed (Wb) * unsigned lit5 Wnd:Wnd + 1

Status Affected:

None

Description:

1011

1001

0www

d11k

kkkk

Wnd

Operation:
Encoding:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

wddd

Multiply the contents of Wb with the 5-bit literal, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1.
The Wb operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a twos
complement signed integer. The literal is interpreted as an unsigned integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The k bits define a 5-bit unsigned integer literal.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-3 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.SU

W0, #0x1F, W2

Before
Instruction
W0
C000
W2
1234
W3
C9BA
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 310

; Multiply W0 by literal 0x1F

; Store the result to W2:W3

After
Instruction
W0
C000
W2
4000
W3
FFF8
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

MUL.SU

W2, #0x10, W0

Before
Instruction
W0 ABCD
W1
89B3
W2
F240
SR
0000

; Multiply W2 by literal 0x10

; Store the result to W0:W1

After
Instruction
W0
2400
W1
000F
W2
F240
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 311

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MUL.SU

Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

MUL.SU

Wb,

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

Operation:

signed (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) Wnd:Wnd + 1

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1001

0www

wddd

Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1.
The Wb operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a twos
complement signed integer. The Ws operand is interpreted as an
unsigned integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and
Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-3 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.SU

W8, [W9], W0

Before
Instruction
W0
68DC
W1
AA40
W8
F000
W9
178C
Data 178C
F000
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 312

; Multiply W8*[W9]
; Store the result to W0:W1

After
Instruction
W0
0000
W1
F100
W8
F000
W9
178C
Data 178C
F000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

MUL.SU

W2, [++W3], W4

Before
Instruction
W2
0040
W3
0280
W4
1819
W5
2021
Data 0282
0068
SR
0000

; Pre-Increment W3
; Multiply W2*[W3]
; Store the result to W4:W5

After
Instruction
W2
0040
W3
0282
W4
1A00
W5
0000
Data 0282
0068
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 313

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MUL.SU

Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply with

Accumulator Destination

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Syntax:

{label:}

MUL.SU

Wb,

Ws,
[Ws],

[Ws++],

[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
ACC [A, B]

Operation:

signed (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) ACC(A or B)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1011

Description:

1001

0www

w111

Appp

ssss

Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit signed multiply with a 32-bit result, which is

stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is sign extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the target
accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). The first source operand is interpreted as a
twos complement signed value and the second source operand is
interpreted as an unsigned value.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the source register.
The p bits select source Address mode 2.
The A bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.SU

W8
W9
Acc A
SR

DS70157E-page 314

W8, W9, A

Before
Instruction
F000
F000
00 0000 0000
0000

W8
W9
Acc A
SR

After
Instruction
F000
F000
FF F100 0000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MUL.SU

Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply

with Accumulator Destination

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Syntax:

{label:}

MUL.SU

Wb,

#lit5,

A
B

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
ACC [A, B]

Operation:

signed (Wb) * unsigned (lit5) ACC(A or B)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1011

Description:

1001

0www

w111

A11k

kkkk

Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit signed multiply with a 32-bit result, which is

stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is sign extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the target
accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). The first source operand is interpreted as a
twos complement signed value and the second source operand is
interpreted as an unsigned value.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The k bits select the 5-bit literal value.
The A bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.SU

W8
Acc A
SR

W8, #0x02, A

Before
Instruction
0042
00 0000 0000
0000

W8
Acc A
SR

After
Instruction
0042
00 0000 0084
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 315

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MUL.US

Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed Multiply

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

MUL.US

Wb,

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

Operation:

unsigned (Wb) * signed (Ws) Wnd:Wnd + 1

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1000

1www

wddd

Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1.
The Wb operand is interpreted as an unsigned integer. The Ws operand
and the result Wnd are interpreted as a twos complement signed
integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-3 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.US

W0, [W1], W2

Before
Instruction
W0
C000
W1
2300
W2
00DA
W3
CC25
Data 2300
F000
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 316

; Multiply W0*[W1] (unsigned-signed)

; Store the result to W2:W3

After
Instruction
W0
C000
W1
2300
W2
0000
W3
F400
Data 2300
F000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

MUL.US

W6, [W5++], W10 ; Mult. W6*[W5] (unsigned-signed)

; Store the result to W10:W11
; Post-Increment W5

Before
Instruction
W5
0C00
W6
FFFF
W10
0908
W11
6EEB
Data 0C00
7FFF
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W5
0C02
W6
FFFF
W10
8001
W11
7FFE
Data 0C00
7FFF
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 317

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MUL.US

Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed Multiply with

Accumulator Destination

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Syntax:

{label:}

MUL.US

Wb,

Ws,

[Ws],

[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
ACC [A, B]

Operation:

unsigned (Wb) * signed (Ws) ACC(A or B)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1011

Description:

1000

0www

w111

Appp

ssss

Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit signed multiply with a 32-bit result, which is

stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is sign extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the target
accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). The first source operand is interpreted as a
unsigned value and the second source operand is interpreted as a twos
complement signed value.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the source register.
The p bits select source Address mode 2.
The A bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.US

W0
W1
Acc B
SR

DS70157E-page 318

W0, W1, B

Before
Instruction
C000
F000
00 0000 0000
0000

W0
W1
Acc B
SR

After
Instruction
0000
F000
FF F400 0000
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MUL.UU

Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

MUL.UU

Wb,

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

#lit5,

Operation:

unsigned (Wb) * unsigned lit5 Wnd:Wnd + 1

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1000

0www

wddd

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

d11k

kkkk

Wnd

Multiply the contents of Wb with the 5-bit literal, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1.
Both operands and the result are interpreted as unsigned integers.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The k bits define a 5-bit unsigned integer literal.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-3 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.UU

W0, #0xF, W12

Before
Instruction
W0
2323
W12
4512
W13
7821
SR
0000
Example 2:

MUL.UU

W7, #0x1F, W0

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W0
2323
W12
0F0D
W13
0002
SR
0000
; Multiply W7 by literal 0x1F
; Store the result to W0:W1

After
Instruction
W0
55C0
W1
001D
W7
F240
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W0
780B
W1
3805
W7
F240
SR
0000

; Multiply W0 by literal 0xF

; Store the result to W12:W13

DS70157E-page 319

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MUL.UU

Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

MUL.UU

Wb,

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

Operation:

unsigned (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) Wnd:Wnd + 1

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1000

0www

wddd

Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit
result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of
the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working
register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in
Wnd + 1. Both source operands and the result are interpreted as
unsigned integers. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and
Wnd. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be
an even working register. See Figure 4-3 for information on
how double words are aligned in memory.
3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.UU

W4, W0, W2

Before
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W2
2300
W3
00DA
W4
FFFF
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 320

; Multiply W4*W0 (unsigned-unsigned)

; Store the result to W2:W3

After
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W2
0001
W3
FFFE
W4
FFFF
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

MUL.UU W0, [W1++], W4

Before
Instruction
W0
1024
W1
2300
W4
9654
W5 BDBC
Data 2300
D625
SR
0000

; Mult. W0*[W1] (unsigned-unsigned)

; Store the result to W4:W5
; Post-Increment W1

After
Instruction
W0
1024
W1
2302
W4
6D34
W5
0D80
Data 2300
D625
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 321

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MUL.UU

Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply with Accumulator

Destination

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Syntax:

{label:}

MUL.UU

Wb,

Ws,

[Ws],

[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
ACC [A, B]

Operation:

unsigned (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) ACC(A or B)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1011

Description:

1000

0www

w111

Appp

ssss

Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit unsigned multiply with a 32-bit result, which is

stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is zero extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the
target accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). Both source operands are treated as
unsigned values.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the source register.
The p bits select source Address mode 2.
The A bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.UU

W0
W4
Acc B
SR

DS70157E-page 322

W4, W0, B

Before
Instruction
FFFFF
FFFFF
00 0000 0000
0000

W0
W4
Acc B
SR

After
Instruction
FFFFF
FFFFF
FF FFFE 0001
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MUL.UU

Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply with

Accumulator Destination

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Syntax:

{label:}

MUL.UU

Wb,

#lit5,

A
B

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
ACC [A, B]

Operation:

unsigned (Wb) * unsigned (lit5) ACC(A or B)

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1011

Description:

1000

0www

w111

A11k

kkkk

Performs a 16-bit x 16-bit signed multiply with a 32-bit result, which is

stored in one of the DSP engine accumulators, ACCA or ACCB. The
32-bit result is zero extended to bit 39 prior to being loaded into the
target accumulator.
The source operands are treated as integer or fractional values
depending upon the operating mode of the DSP engine (as defined by
the IF bit in CORCON<0>). Both source operands are treated as
unsigned values.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The k bits select the 5-bit literal.
The A bit selects the destination accumulator for the product.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: The state of the multiplier mode bits (US<1:0> in CORCON)
have no effect upon the operation of this instruction.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MUL.UU

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Before
Instruction
0042
00 0000 0000
0000

W8
Acc A
SR

After
Instruction
0042
00 0000 0084
0000

Instruction
Descriptions

W8
Acc A
SR

W8, #0x02, A

DS70157E-page 323

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MULW.SS

Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply with 16-bit Result

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Syntax:

{label:}

MULW.SS

Wb,

Ws,

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

Operation:

signed (Wb) * signed (Ws) Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1001

1www

wddd

dppp

ssss

Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the result
in a working register, which must be an even numbered working register.
Both source operands and the result Wnd are interpreted as twos
complement signed integers. Register direct addressing must be used
for Wb and Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing may be
used for Ws.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MULW.SS

W0, W1, W12

Before
Instruction
W0
9823
W1
67DC
W12
FFFF
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 324

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

; Multiply W0*W1
; Store the result to W12

After
Instruction
W0
9823
W1
67DC
W12
D314
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

MULW.SS

W2, [--W4], W0

Before
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W2
0045
W4
27FE
Data 27FC
0098
SR
0000

; Pre-decrement W4
; Multiply W2*[W4]
; Store the result to W0

After
Instruction
W0
28F8
W2
0045
W4
27FC
Data 27FC
0098
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 325

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MULW.SU

Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply with 16-bit

Result

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

MUL.SU

Wb,

X
Ws,

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

Operation:

signed (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1001

0www

wddd

dppp

ssss

Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the result
in a working register, which must be an even numbered working register.
The Wb operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a twos
complement signed integer. The Ws operand is interpreted as an
unsigned integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and
Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MULW.SU

W8, [W9], W0

Before
Instruction
W0
68DC
W8
F000
W9
178C
Data 178C
F000
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 326

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

; Multiply W8*[W9]
; Store the result to W0

After
Instruction
W0
0000
W8
F000
W9
178C
Data 178C
F000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

MULW.SU

W2, [++W3], W4 ; Pre-Increment W3

; Multiply W2*[W3]
; Store the result to W4

Before
Instruction
W2
0040
W3
0280
W4
1819
Data 0282
0068
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W2
0040
W3
0282
W4
1A00
Data 0282
0068
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 327

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MULW.SU

Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply

with 16-bit Result

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

Operation:

signed (Wb) * unsigned (lit5) Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

MULW.SU

1001

Wb,

0www

X
#lit5,

Wnd

wddd

d11k

kkkk

Multiply the contents of Wb with a 5-bit literal value, and store the result
in a working register, which must be an even numbered working register.
The Wb operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a twos
complement signed integer. Register direct addressing must be used for
Wb and Wnd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The k bits select the 5-bit literal value.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MULW.SU

W8, #0x04, W0

Before
Instruction
W0
68DC
W8
1000
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 328

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

; Multiply W8 * #0x04
; Store the result to W0

After
Instruction
W0
4000
W8
1000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MULW.US

Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed Multiply with 16-bit Result

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

MULW.US

Wb,

X
Ws,

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

Operation:

unsigned (Wb) * signed (Ws) Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1000

1www

wddd

dppp

ssss

Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the result
in a working register, which must be an even numbered working register.
The Wb operand is interpreted as an unsigned integer. The Ws operand
and the result Wnd are interpreted as a twos complement signed
integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MULW.US

W0, [W1], W2 ; Multiply W0*[W1] (unsigned-signed)

; Store the result to W2

After
Instruction
W0
C000
W1
2300
W2
0000
Data 2300
F000
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W0
C000
W1
2300
W2
00DA
Data 2300
F000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

DS70157E-page 329

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

MULW.US

W6, [W5++], W10

Before
Instruction
W5
0C00
W6
FFFF
W10
0908
Data 0C00
7FFF
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 330

; Mult. W6*[W5] (unsigned-signed)

; Store the result to W10
; Post-Increment W5

After
Instruction
W5
0C02
W6
FFFF
W10
8001
Data 0C00
7FFF
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

MULW.UU

Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply with 16-bit Result

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

MULW.UU

Wb,

X
Ws,

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

Operation:

unsigned (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1000

0www

wddd

dppp

ssss

Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the result
in a working registers, which must be an even numbered working register). Both source operands and the result are interpreted as unsigned
integers. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MULW.UU

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

W4, W0, W2 ; Multiply W4*W0 (unsigned-unsigned)

; Store the result to W2

Before
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W2
2300
W4
FFFF
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W0
FFFF
W2
0001
W4
FFFF
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 331

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

MULW.UU

Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply with

16-bit Result

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

MULW.UU

Wb,

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12]

Operation:

unsigned (Wb) * unsigned Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1000

0www

X
#lit5,

Wnd

wddd

d11k

kkkk

Multiply the contents of Wb with a 5-bit literal value, and store the result
in a working registers, which must be an even numbered working register). Both source operands and the result are interpreted as unsigned
integers. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the address of the lower destination register.
The k bits select the 5-bit literal value.
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

MULW.UU

W4, #0x04, W2 ; Multiply W4*W0 (unsigned-unsigned)

; Store the result to W2

Before
Instruction
W2
2300
W4
1000
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 332

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

Wnd must be an even working register.
Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero.
The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.

After
Instruction
W2
4000
W4
1000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

NEG

Negate f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) + 1 destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

1110

Description:

NEG{.B}

1110

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

0BDf

ffff

Compute the twos complement of the contents of the file register and
place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand
determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is
stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file
register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

NEG.B

0x880, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
9080
Data 0880
2355
SR
0000
Example 2:

NEG

0x1200

Before
Instruction
Data 1200
8923
SR
0000

; Negate (0x880) (Byte mode)

; Store result to WREG

After
Instruction
WREG (W0) 90AB
Data 0880
2355
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Negate (0x1200) (Word mode)

After
Instruction
Data 1200 76DD
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 333

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

NEG

Negate Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

NEG{.B}

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Ws) + 1 Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

1110

Description:

1010

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

0Bqq

qddd

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Compute the twos complement of the contents of the source register Ws

and place the result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct
or indirect addressing may be used for both Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

NEG.B

W3, [W4++]

Before
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
1005
Data 1004
2355
SR
0000
Example 2:

NEG

; Negate W3 and store to [W4] (Byte mode)

; Post-increment W4

After
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
1006
Data 1004 C755
SR
0008 (N = 1)

[W2++], [--W4]

Before
Instruction
W2
0900
W4
1002
Data 0900
870F
Data 1000
5105
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 334

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; Pre-decrement W4 (Word mode)

ACCA
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
FF CD6F A638
0000
0000

; Negate ACCB
; Store result to ACCB
; CORCON = 0x00C0 (normal saturation)

Before
Instruction
FF F230 10DC
00C0
0000

ACCB
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
00 0DCF EF24
00C0
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 335

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

NOP

No Operation

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0000

xxxx

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

No Operation

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

NOP

No Operation is performed.
The x bits can take any value.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

NOP

PC
SR
Example 2:

DS70157E-page 336

Before
Instruction
00 1092
0000

NOP

PC
SR

; execute no operation

After
Instruction
PC
00 1094
SR
0000

; execute no operation

Before
Instruction
00 08AE
0000

After
Instruction
PC
00 08B0
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

NOPR

No Operation

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

xxxx

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

No Operation

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1111

Description:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

NOPR

1111

No Operation is performed.
The x bits can take any value.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

NOPR

PC
SR
Example 2:

Before
Instruction
00 2430
0000

NOPR

PC
SR

; execute no operation

After
Instruction
PC
00 2432
SR
0000

; execute no operation

Before
Instruction
00 1466
0000

After
Instruction
PC
00 1468
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 337

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

POP

Pop TOS to f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

ffff

fff0

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 65534]

Operation:

(W15) 2 W15
(TOS) f

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1111

Description:

POP

1001

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

The Stack Pointer (W15) is pre-decremented by 2 and the Top-of-Stack

(TOS) word is written to the specified file register, which may reside
anywhere in the lower 32K words of data memory.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: The file register address must be word-aligned.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

POP

0x1230

Before
Instruction
W15
1006
Data 1004 A401
Data 1230
2355
SR
0000
Example 2:

POP

0x880

Before
Instruction
W15
2000
Data 0880 E3E1
Data 1FFE A090
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 338

; Pop TOS to 0x1230

After
Instruction
W15
1004
Data 1004 A401
Data 1230 A401
SR
0000
; Pop TOS to 0x880

After
Instruction
W15 1FFE
Data 0880 A090
Data 1FFE A090
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

POP

Pop TOS to Wd

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

hddd

d100

1111

{label:}

POP

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[--Wd]
[++Wd]
[Wd+Wb]

Operands:

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(W15) 2 W15
(TOS) Wd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0111

Description:

1www

w0hh

The Stack Pointer (W15) is pre-decremented by 2 and the Top-of-Stack

(TOS) word is written to Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing
may be used for Wd.
The w bits define the offset register Wb.
The h bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: This instruction is a specific version of the MOV Ws, Wd
instruction (MOV [--W15], Wd). It reverse assembles as
MOV.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

POP

Before
Instruction
W4 EDA8
W15
1008
Data 1006 C45A
SR
0000
Example 2:

After
Instruction
W4 C45A
W15
1006
Data 1006 C45A
SR
0000

[++W10]

; Pre-increment W10
; Pop TOS to [W10]

Before
Instruction
W10 0E02
W15
1766
Data 0E04 E3E1
Data 1764 C7B5
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W10 0E04
W15
1764
Data 0E04 C7B5
Data 1764 C7B5
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

POP

; Pop TOS to W4

DS70157E-page 339

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

POP.D

Double Pop TOS to Wnd:Wnd+1

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0ddd

0100

1111

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wnd [W0, W2, W4, ... W14]

Operation:

(W15) 2 W15
(TOS) Wnd + 1
(W15) 2 W15
(TOS) Wnd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1011

Description:

POP.D

1110

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wnd

0000

A double word is POPped from the Top-of-Stack (TOS) and stored to

Wnd:Wnd + 1. The most significant word is stored to Wnd + 1, and the
least significant word is stored to Wnd. Since a double word is POPped,
the Stack Pointer (W15) gets decremented by 4.
The d bits select the address of the destination register pair.
Note 1: This instruction operates on double words. See Figure 4-3 for
information on how double words are aligned in memory.
2: Wnd must be an even working register.
3: This instruction is a specific version of the MOV.D Ws, Wnd
instruction (MOV.D [--W15], Wnd). It reverse assembles as
MOV.D.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

POP.D

Before
Instruction
W6 07BB
W7 89AE
W15
0850
Data 084C
3210
Data 084E
7654
SR
0000
Example 2:

POP.D

Before
Instruction
W0 673E
W1 DD23
W15 0BBC
Data 0BB8 791C
Data 0BBA D400
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 340

; Double pop TOS to W6

After
Instruction
W6
3210
W7
7654
W15 084C
Data 084C
3210
Data 084E
7654
SR
0000
; Double pop TOS to W0

After
Instruction
W0 791C
W1 D400
W15 0BB8
Data 0BB8 791C
Data 0BBA D400
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

POP.S

Pop Shadow Registers

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

1000

0000

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

POP shadow registers

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

1111

Description:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

POP.S

1110

The values in the shadow registers are copied into their respective
primary registers. The following registers are affected: W0-W3, and the
C, Z, OV, N and DC STATUS register flags.
Note 1: The shadow registers are not directly accessible. They may
only be accessed with PUSH.S and POP.S.
2: The shadow registers are only one-level deep.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

POP.S

; Pop the shadow registers

; (See PUSH.S Example 1 for contents of shadows)

Before
Instruction
W0 07BB
W1 03FD
W2
9610
W3
7249
SR 00E0 (IPL = 7)
Note:

After
Instruction
W0
0000
W1
1000
W2
2000
W3
3000
SR 00E1 (IPL = 7, C = 1)

After instruction execution, contents of shadow registers are NOT modified.

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 341

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

PUSH

Push f to TOS

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

ffff

fff0

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 65534]

Operation:

(f) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1111

Description:

PUSH

1000

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

The contents of the specified file register are written to the Top-of-Stack
(TOS) location and then the Stack Pointer (W15) is incremented by 2.
The file register may reside anywhere in the lower 32K words of data
memory.
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: The file register address must be word-aligned.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

PUSH

0x2004

Before
Instruction
W15 0B00
Data 0B00 791C
Data 2004 D400
SR
0000
Example 2:

PUSH

0xC0E

Before
Instruction
W15
0920
Data 0920
0000
Data 0C0E 67AA
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 342

; Push (0x2004) to TOS

After
Instruction
W15 0B02
Data 0B00 D400
Data 2004 D400
SR
0000
; Push (0xC0E) to TOS

After
Instruction
W15
0922
Data 0920 67AA
Data 2004 67AA
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

PUSH

Push Ws to TOS

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

{label:}

PUSH

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

1111

1ggg

ssss

Ws
[Ws]
[Ws++]
[Ws--]
[--Ws]
[++Ws]
[Ws+Wb]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Ws) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0111

Description:

1www

w001

The contents of Ws are written to the Top-of-Stack (TOS) location and

then the Stack Pointer (W15) is incremented by 2.
The w bits define the offset register Wb.
The g bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: This instruction is a specific version of the MOV Ws, Wd
instruction (MOV Ws, [W15++]). It reverse assembles as
MOV.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

PUSH

Before
Instruction
W2
6889
W15
1566
Data 1566
0000
SR
0000

; Push W2 to TOS

After
Instruction
W2
6889
W15
1568
Data 1566
6889
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 343

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

PUSH

[W5+W10]

Before
Instruction
W5
1200
W10
0044
W15
0806
Data 0806
216F
Data 1244 B20A
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 344

; Push [W5+W10] to TOS

After
Instruction
W5
1200
W10
0044
W15
0808
Data 0806 B20A
Data 1244 B20A
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

PUSH.D

Double Push Wns:Wns+1 to TOS

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

1001

1111

1000

sss0

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wns [W0, W2, W4 ... W14]

Operation:

(Wns) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
(Wns + 1) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

PUSH.D

1110

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wns

A double word (Wns:Wns + 1) is PUSHed to the Top-of-Stack (TOS).

The least significant word (Wns) is PUSHed to the TOS first, and the
most significant word (Wns + 1) is PUSHed to the TOS last. Since a
double word is PUSHed, the Stack Pointer (W15) gets incremented by 4.
The s bits select the address of the source register pair.
Note 1: This instruction operates on double words. See Figure 4-3 for
information on how double words are aligned in memory.
2: Wns must be an even working register.
3: This instruction is a specific version of the MOV.D Wns, Wd
instruction (MOV.D Wns, [W15++]). It reverse assembles as
MOV.D.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

PUSH.D

Before
Instruction
W6 C451
W7
3380
W15
1240
Data 1240 B004
Data 1242
0891
SR
0000
Example 2:

PUSH.D

W10

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W6 C451
W7
3380
W15
1244
Data 1240 C451
Data 1242
3380
SR
0000
; Push W10:W11 to TOS

After
Instruction
W10 80D3
W11
4550
W15 0C0C
Data 0C08 80D3
Data 0C0A
4550
SR
0000

Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W10 80D3
W11
4550
W15 0C08
Data 0C08 79B5
Data 0C0A 008E
SR
0000

; Push W6:W7 to TOS

DS70157E-page 345

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

PUSH.S

Push Shadow Registers

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

1010

0000

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

PUSH shadow registers

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

PUSH.S

1111

Description:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

1110

The contents of the primary registers are copied into their respective
shadow registers. The following registers are shadowed: W0-W3, and
the C, Z, OV, N and DC STATUS register flags.
Note 1: The shadow registers are not directly accessible. They may
only be accessed with PUSH.S and POP.S.
2: The shadow registers are only one-level deep.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

PUSH.S

; Push primary registers into shadow registers

Before
Instruction
W0
0000
W1
1000
W2
2000
W3
3000
SR
0001 (C = 1)
Note:

DS70157E-page 346

After
Instruction
W0
0000
W1
1000
W2
2000
W3
3000
SR
0001 (C = 1)

After an instruction execution, contents of the shadow registers are updated.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

PWRSAV

Enter Power Saving Mode

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0100

0000

000k

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit1 [0,1]

Operation:

0 WDT count register

0 WDT prescaler A count
0 WDT prescaler B count
0 WDTO (RCON<4>)
0 SLEEP (RCON<3>)
0 IDLE (RCON<2>)
If (lit1 = 0):
Enter Sleep mode
Else:
Enter Idle mode

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1111

PWRSAV

1110

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

#lit1

Place the processor into the specified Power Saving mode. If lit1 = 0,
Sleep mode is entered. In Sleep mode, the clock to the CPU and
peripherals are shutdown. If an on-chip oscillator is being used, it is also
shutdown. If lit1 = 1, Idle mode is entered. In Idle mode, the clock to the
CPU shuts down, but the clock source remains active and the
peripherals continue to operate.
This instruction resets the Watchdog Timer Count register and the
Prescaler Count registers. In addition, the WDTO, Sleep and Idle flags of
the Reset System and Control (RCON) register are reset.
Note 1: The processor will exit from Idle or Sleep through an interrupt,
processor Reset or Watchdog Time-out. See the specific
device data sheet for details.
2: If awakened from Idle mode, Idle (RCON<2>) is set to 1 and
the clock source is applied to the CPU.
3: If awakened from Sleep mode, Sleep (RCON<3>) is set to 1
and the clock source is started.
4: If awakened from a Watchdog Time-out, WDTO (RCON<4>)
is set to 1.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

PWRSAV

; Enter SLEEP mode

Before
Instruction
SR
0040 (IPL = 2)
PWRSAV

; Enter IDLE mode

Before
Instruction
SR
0020 (IPL = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Instruction
Descriptions

Example 2:

After
Instruction
SR
0040 (IPL = 2)

After
Instruction
SR
0020 (IPL = 1)

DS70157E-page 347

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RCALL

Relative Call

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

RCALL

Operands:

Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... 32767].

Operation:

(PC) + 2 PC
(PC<15:0>) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
(PC<22:16>) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

0111

PIC24E

dsPIC30F
X

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Expr

nnnn

Relative subroutine call with a range of 32K program words forward or back
from the current PC. Before the call is made, the return address (PC + 2) is
PUSHed onto the stack. After the return address is stacked, the
sign-extended 17-bit value (2 * Slit16) is added to the contents of the PC
and the result is stored in the PC.
The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the size of the relative call (in
program words) from (PC + 2).
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

012004
012006
.
.
012458 _Task1:
01245A

PC
W15
Data 0810
Data 0812
SR

DS70157E-page 348

When possible, this instruction should be used instead of CALL,

since it only consumes one word of program memory.

Before
Instruction
01 2004
0810
FFFF
FFFF
0000

RCALL
ADD
...
...
SUB
...

_Task1
W0, W1, W2

; Call _Task1

W0, W2, W3

; _Task1 subroutine

After
Instruction
PC
01 2458
W15
0814
Data 0810
2006
Data 0812
0001
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

00620E
006210
.
.
007000 _Init:
007002

PC
W15
Data 0C50
Data 0C52
SR

Before
Instruction
00 620E
0C50
FFFF
FFFF
0000

RCALL
MOV
...
...
CLR
...

_Init
W0, [W4++]

; Call _Init

; _Init subroutine

After
Instruction
PC
00 7000
W15
0C54
Data 0C50
6210
Data 0C52
0000
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 349

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RCALL

Relative Call

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression.

Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... 32767].

Operation:

(PC) + 2 PC
(PC<15:1>) TOS<15:1>, SFA bit TOS<0>
(W15) + 2 W15
(PC<22:16>) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
0 SFA bit
(PC) + (2 * Slit16) PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

SFA

Encoding:

RCALL

0000

Description:

0111

Expr

nnnn

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

012004
012006
.
.
012458 _Task1:
01245A

PC
W15
Data 0810
Data 0812
SR

DS70157E-page 350

When possible, this instruction should be used instead of CALL,

since it only consumes one word of program memory.

Before
Instruction
01 2004
0810
FFFF
FFFF
0000

RCALL
ADD
...
...
SUB
...

_Task1
W0, W1, W2

; Call _Task1

W0, W2, W3

; _Task1 subroutine

After
Instruction
PC
01 2458
W15
0814
Data 0810
2006
Data 0812
0001
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

00620E
006210
.
.
007000 _Init:
007002

PC
W15
Data 0C50
Data 0C52
SR

Before
Instruction
00 620E
0C50
FFFF
FFFF
0000

RCALL
MOV
...
...
CLR
...

_Init
W0, [W4++]

; Call _Init

; _Init subroutine

After
Instruction
PC
00 7000
W15
0C54
Data 0C50
6210
Data 0C52
0000
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 351

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RCALL

Computed Relative Call

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(PC) + 2 PC
(PC<15:0>) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
(PC<22:16>) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
(PC) + (2 * (Wn)) PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

RCALL

PIC24E

0001

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0000

0010

ssss

Computed, relative subroutine call specified by the working register Wn. The
range of the call is 32K program words forward or back from the current PC.
Before the call is made, the return address (PC + 2) is PUSHed onto the
stack. After the return address is stacked, the sign-extended 17-bit value (2 *
(Wn)) is added to the contents of the PC and the result is stored in the PC.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wn.
The s bits select the source register.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

00FF8C
00FF8E
.
.
010008
01000A
01000C

PC
W6
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR

DS70157E-page 352

EX1:

Before
Instruction
01 000A
FFC0
1004
98FF
2310
0000

INC
...
...
...

W2, W3

; Destination of RCALL

RCALL
MOVE

W6
W4, [W10]

; RCALL with W6

After
Instruction
PC
00 FF8C
W6
FFC0
W15
1008
Data 1004
000C
Data 1006
0001
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

000302
000304
.
.
000450
000452

PC
W2
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR

EX2:

Before
Instruction
00 0302
00A6
1004
32BB
901A
0000

RCALL
FF1L
...
...
CLR
...

W2
W0, W1

; RCALL with W2

; Destination of RCALL

After
Instruction
PC
00 0450
W2
00A6
W15
1008
Data 1004
0304
Data 1006
0000
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 353

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RCALL

Computed Relative Call

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(PC) + 2 PC
(PC<15:1>) TOS<15:1>, SFA bit TOS<0>
(W15) + 2 W15
(PC<22:16>) (TOS)
(W15) + 2 W15
0 SFA bit
(PC) + (2 * (Wn)) PC
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

SFA

Encoding:

0000

Description:

RCALL

0001

0000

0010

0000

ssss

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

00FF8C
00FF8E
.
.
010008
01000A
01000C

PC
W6
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR

DS70157E-page 354

EX1:

Before
Instruction
01 000A
FFC0
1004
98FF
2310
0000

INC
...
...
...

W2, W3

; Destination of RCALL

RCALL
MOVE

W6
W4, [W10]

; RCALL with W6

After
Instruction
PC
00 FF8C
W6
FFC0
W15
1008
Data 1004
000C
Data 1006
0001
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

000302
000304
.
.
000450
000452

PC
W2
W15
Data 1004
Data 1006
SR

EX2:

Before
Instruction
00 0302
00A6
1004
32BB
901A
0000

RCALL
FF1L
...
...
CLR
...

W2
W0, W1

; RCALL with W2

; Destination of RCALL

After
Instruction
PC
00 0450
W2
00A6
W15
1008
Data 1004
0304
Data 1006
0000
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 355

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

REPEAT

Repeat Next Instruction lit14 + 1 Times

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit14 [0 ... 16383]

Operation:

(lit14) RCOUNT
(PC) + 2 PC
Enable Code Looping

Status Affected:

Encoding:

0000

Description:

REPEAT

1001

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

kkkk

#lit14

00kk

kkkk

Repeat the instruction immediately following the REPEAT instruction

(lit14 + 1) times. The repeated instruction (or target instruction) is held in
the instruction register for all iterations and is only fetched once.
When this instruction executes, the RCOUNT register is loaded with the
repeat count value specified in the instruction. RCOUNT is decremented
with each execution of the target instruction. When RCOUNT equals
zero, the target instruction is executed one more time, and then normal
instruction execution continues with the instruction following the target
instruction.
The k bits are an unsigned literal that specifies the loop count.
Special Features, Restrictions:
1. When the repeat literal is 0, REPEAT has the effect of a NOP and
the RA bit is not set.
2. The target REPEAT instruction can NOT be:
an instruction that changes program flow
a DO, DISI, LNK, MOV.D, PWRSAV, REPEAT or UNLK
instruction
a 2-word instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these target instructions are used.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

000452
000454

PC
RCOUNT
SR

DS70157E-page 356

The REPEAT and target instruction are interruptible.

REPEAT #9
ADD
[W0++], W1, [W2++]

Before
Instruction
00 0452
0000
0000

; Execute ADD 10 times

; Vector update

After
Instruction
PC
00 0454
RCOUNT
0009
SR
0010 (RA = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

00089E
0008A0

PC
RCOUNT
SR

REPEAT
CLR

Before
Instruction
00 089E
0000
0000

#0x3FF
[W6++]

; Execute CLR 1024 times

; Clear the scratch space

After
Instruction
PC
00 08A0
RCOUNT
03FF
SR
0010 (RA = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 357

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

REPEAT

Repeat Next Instruction lit15 + 1 Times

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit15 [0 ... 32767]

Operation:

(lit15) RCOUNT
(PC) + 2 PC
Enable Code Looping

Status Affected:

Encoding:

0000

Description:

REPEAT

1001

#lit15

0kkk

kkkk

Repeat the instruction immediately following the REPEAT instruction

(lit15 + 1) times. The repeated instruction (or target instruction) is held in
the instruction register for all iterations and is only fetched once.
When this instruction executes, the RCOUNT register is loaded with the
repeat count value specified in the instruction. RCOUNT is decremented
with each execution of the target instruction. When RCOUNT equals
zero, the target instruction is executed one more time, and then normal
instruction execution continues with the instruction following the target
instruction.
The k bits are an unsigned literal that specifies the loop count.
Special Features, Restrictions:
1. When the repeat literal is 0, REPEAT has the effect of a NOP and
the RA bit is not set.
2. The target REPEAT instruction can NOT be:
an instruction that changes program flow
a DISI, LNK, MOV.D, PWRSAV, REPEAT or UNLK
instruction
a 2-word instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these target instructions are used.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

000452
000454

PC
RCOUNT
SR

DS70157E-page 358

The REPEAT and target instruction are interruptible.

REPEAT #9
ADD
[W0++], W1, [W2++]

Before
Instruction
00 0452
0000
0000

; Execute ADD 10 times

; Vector update

After
Instruction
PC
00 0454
RCOUNT
0009
SR
0010 (RA = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

00089E
0008A0

PC
RCOUNT
SR

REPEAT
CLR

Before
Instruction
00 089E
0000
0000

#0x3FF
[W6++]

; Execute CLR 1024 times

; Clear the scratch space

After
Instruction
PC
00 08A0
RCOUNT
03FF
SR
0010 (RA = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 359

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

REPEAT

Repeat Next Instruction Wn+1 Times

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wn<13:0>) RCOUNT
(PC) + 2 PC
Enable Code Looping

Status Affected:

Encoding:

0000

Description:

REPEAT

PIC24E

1001

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0000

1000

ssss

Repeat the instruction immediately following the REPEAT instruction

(Wn<13:0>) times. The instruction to be repeated (or target instruction)
is held in the instruction register for all iterations and is only fetched
once.
When this instruction executes, the RCOUNT register is loaded with the
lower 14 bits of Wn. RCOUNT is decremented with each execution of
the target instruction. When RCOUNT equals zero, the target instruction
is executed one more time, and then normal instruction execution
continues with the instruction following the target instruction.
The s bits specify the Wn register that contains the repeat count.
Special Features, Restrictions:
1. When (Wn) = 0, REPEAT has the effect of a NOP and the RA bit is
not set.
2. The target REPEAT instruction can NOT be:
an instruction that changes program flow
a DO, DISI, LNK, MOV.D, PWRSAV, REPEAT or ULNK
instruction
a 2-word instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these target instructions are used.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

000A26
000A28

PC
W4
RCOUNT
SR

DS70157E-page 360

REPEAT
COM

Before
Instruction
00 0A26
0023
0000
0000

The REPEAT and target instruction are interruptible.

W4
[W0++], [W2++]

; Execute COM (W4+1) times

; Vector complement

After
Instruction
PC
00 0A28
W4
0023
RCOUNT
0023
SR
0010 (RA = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

00089E
0008A0

PC
W10
RCOUNT
SR

REPEAT
TBLRDL

Before
Instruction
00 089E
00FF
0000
0000

W10
; Execute TBLRD (W10+1) times
[W2++], [W3++] ; Decrement (0x840)

After
Instruction
PC
00 08A0
W10
00FF
RCOUNT
00FF
SR
0010 (RA = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 361

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

REPEAT

Repeat Next Instruction Wn+1 Times

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wn) RCOUNT
(PC) + 2 PC
Enable Code Looping

Status Affected:

Encoding:

0000

Description:

REPEAT

1001

1000

0000

ssss

Repeat the instruction immediately following the REPEAT instruction

(Wn) times. The instruction to be repeated (or target instruction) is held
in the instruction register for all iterations and is only fetched once.
When this instruction executes, the RCOUNT register is loaded with Wn.
RCOUNT is decremented with each execution of the target instruction.
When RCOUNT equals zero, the target instruction is executed one more
time, and then normal instruction execution continues with the instruction following the target instruction.
The s bits specify the Wn register that contains the repeat count.
Special Features, Restrictions:
1. When (Wn) = 0, REPEAT has the effect of a NOP and the RA bit is
not set.
2. The target REPEAT instruction can NOT be:
an instruction that changes program flow
a DO, DISI, LNK, MOV.D, PWRSAV, REPEAT or ULNK
instruction
a 2-word instruction
Unexpected results may occur if these target instructions are used.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

000A26
000A28

PC
W4
RCOUNT
SR

DS70157E-page 362

REPEAT
COM

Before
Instruction
00 0A26
0023
0000
0000

The REPEAT and target instruction are interruptible.

W4
[W0++], [W2++]

; Execute COM (W4+1) times

; Vector complement

After
Instruction
PC
00 0A28
W4
0023
RCOUNT
0023
SR
0010 (RA = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

00089E
0008A0

PC
W10
RCOUNT
SR

REPEAT
TBLRDL

Before
Instruction
00 089E
00FF
0000
0000

W10
; Execute TBLRD (W10+1) times
[W2++], [W3++] ; Decrement (0x840)

After
Instruction
PC
00 08A0
W10
00FF
RCOUNT
00FF
SR
0010 (RA = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 363

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RESET

Reset

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

Force all registers that are affected by a MCLR Reset to their Reset
condition.
1 SWR (RCON<6>)
0 PC

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB, DA, DC, IPL<2:0>, RA, N, OV, Z, C, SFA

Encoding:
Description:

1111

RESET

1110

0000

This instruction provides a way to execute a software Reset. All core and
peripheral registers will take their power-on value. The PC will be set to
0, the location of the RESET GOTO instruction. The SWR bit,
RCON<6>, will be set to 1 to indicate that the RESET instruction was
executed.
Note:

DS70157E-page 364

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Words:

Cycles:

Refer to the specific device family reference manual for the

power-on value of all registers.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 1:

00202A

PC
W0
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14
W15
SPLIM
TBLPAG
PSVPAG
CORCON
RCON
SR

RESET

; Execute software RESET on dsPIC33F

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
00 202A
PC
00 0000
8901
W0
0000
08BB
W1
0000
B87A
W2
0000
872F
W3
0000
C98A
W4
0000
AAD4
W5
0000
981E
W6
0000
1809
W7
0000
C341
W8
0000
90F4
W9
0000
F409
W10
0000
1700
W11
0000
1008
W12
0000
6556
W13
0000
231D
W14
0000
1704
W15
0800
1800
SPLIM
0000
007F
TBLPAG
0000
0001
PSVPAG
0000
00F0
CORCON
0020 (SATDW = 1)
0000
RCON
0040 (SWR = 1)
0021 (IPL, C = 1)
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 365

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RETFIE

Return from Interrupt

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

(W15) - 2 W15
(TOS<15:8>) (SR<7:0>)
(TOS<7>) (IPL3, CORCON<3>)
(TOS<6:0>) (PC<22:16>)
(W15) - 2 W15
(TOS<15:0>) (PC<15:0>)
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

IPL<3:0>, RA, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

0000

Description:

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0000

RETFIE

0110

0100

0000

Return from Interrupt Service Routine. The stack is POPped, which

loads the low byte of the STATUS register, IPL<3> (CORCON<3>) and
the Most Significant Byte of the PC. The stack is POPped again, which
loads the lower 16 bits of the PC.
Note 1: Restoring IPL<3> and the low byte of the STATUS register
restores the Interrupt Priority Level to the level before the execution was processed.
2: Before RETFIE is executed, the appropriate interrupt flag
must be cleared in software to avoid recursive interrupts.

Words:

Cycles:

3 (2 if exception pending)

Example 1:

000A26

PC
W15
Data 0830
Data 0832
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

DS70157E-page 366

Before
Instruction
00 0A26
0834
0230
8101
0001
0000

008050

PC
W15
Data 0922
Data 0924
CORCON
SR

RETFIE

Before
Instruction
00 8050
0926
7008
0300
0000
0000

; Return from ISR

After
Instruction
PC
01 0230
W15
0830
Data 0830
0230
Data 0832
8101
CORCON
0001
SR
0081 (IPL = 4, C = 1)
; Return from ISR

After
Instruction
PC
00 7008
W15
0922
Data 0922
7008
Data 0924
0300
CORCON
0000
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

RETFIE

Return from Interrupt

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

(W15) - 2 W15
(TOS<15:8>) (SR<7:0>)
(TOS<7>) (IPL3, CORCON<3>)
(TOS<6:0>) (PC<22:16>)
(W15) - 2 W15
(TOS<15:1>) (PC<15:1>)
TOS<0> SFA bit
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

IPL<3:0>, RA, N, OV, Z, C, SFA

Encoding:

0000

Description:

RETFIE

0110

0100

0000

Return from Interrupt Service Routine. The stack is POPped, which

Words:

Cycles:

6 (5 if exception pending)

Example 1:

000A26

PC
W15
Data 0830
Data 0832
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

RETFIE

Before
Instruction
00 8050
0926
7008
0300
0000
0000

; Return from ISR

After
Instruction
PC
01 0230
W15
0830
Data 0830
0230
Data 0832
8101
CORCON
0001
SR
0081 (IPL = 4, C = 1)
; Return from ISR

After
Instruction
PC
00 7008
W15
0922
Data 0922
7008
Data 0924
0300
CORCON
0000
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)

DS70157E-page 367

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Before
Instruction
00 0A26
0834
0230
8101
0001
0000

008050

PC
W15
Data 0922
Data 0924
CORCON
SR

RETFIE

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RETLW

Return with Literal in Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation

lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(W15) 2 W15
TOS<15:8> SR<7:0>
TOS<7:0> IPL<3> : PC<22:16>
(W15) 2 W15
(TOS) (PC<15:0>)
lit10 Wn

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

RETLW{.B} #lit10,

0101

0Bkk

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

kkkk

dddd

Return from subroutine with the specified, unsigned 10-bit literal stored
in Wn. The software stack is POPped twice to restore the PC and the
signed literal is stored in Wn. Since two POPs are made, the Stack
Pointer (W15) is decremented by 4.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits specify the value of the literal.
The d bits select the destination register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned
value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands
for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.

Words:

Cycles:

3 (2 if exception pending)

Example 1:

000440

PC
W0
W15
Data 1984
Data 1986
SR

DS70157E-page 368

RETLW.B #0xA, W0

Before
Instruction
00 0440
9846
1988
7006
0000
0000

; Return with 0xA in W0

After
Instruction
PC
00 7006
W0
980A
W15
1984
Data 1984
7006
Data 1986
0000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

00050A

PC
W2
W15
Data 11FC
Data 11FE
SR

RETLW

Before
Instruction
00 050A
0993
1200
7008
0001
0000

#0x230, W2

; Return with 0x230 in W2

PC
W2
W15
Data 11FC
Data 11FE
SR

After
Instruction
01 7008
0230
11FC
7008
0001
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 369

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RETLW

Return with Literal in Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation

lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn [W0 ... W15]
(W15) 2 W15
TOS<15:8> SR<7:0>
TOS<7:0> IPL<3>: PC<22:16>
(W15) 2 W15
(TOS<15:1>) (PC<15:1>)
TOS<0> SFA bit
lit10 Wn

Operation:

RETLW{.B} #lit10,

X
Wn

Status Affected:
Encoding:

SFA
0000

Description:

0101

0Bkk

kkkk

dddd

The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits specify the value of the literal.
The d bits select the destination register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned
value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands
for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.
Words:
Cycles:

1
6 (5 if exception pending)

Example 1:

000440

PC
W0
W15
Data 1984
Data 1986
SR

DS70157E-page 370

RETLW.B #0xA, W0

Before
Instruction
00 0440
9846
1988
7006
0000
0000

; Return with 0xA in W0

After
Instruction
PC
00 7006
W0
980A
W15
1984
Data 1984
7006
Data 1986
0000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

00050A

PC
W2
W15
Data 11FC
Data 11FE
SR

RETLW

Before
Instruction
00 050A
0993
1200
7008
0001
0000

#0x230, W2

; Return with 0x230 in W2

PC
W2
W15
Data 11FC
Data 11FE
SR

After
Instruction
01 7008
0230
11FC
7008
0001
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 371

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RETURN

Return

Implemented in:

PIC24H

PIC24E

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

(W15) 2 W15
(TOS) (PC<22:16>)
(W15) 2 W15
(TOS) (PC<15:0>)
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

0000

Description:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0110

0000

Return from subroutine. The software stack is POPped twice to restore

the PC. Since two POPs are made, the Stack Pointer (W15) is
decremented by 4.
1

Cycles:

3 (2 if exception pending)
001A06

PC
W15
Data 1244
Data 1246
SR
Example 2:

dsPIC30F

RETURN

Words:

Example 1:

RETURN

Before
Instruction
00 1A06
1248
0004
0001
0000

005404

PC
W15
Data 0906
Data 0908
SR

DS70157E-page 372

PIC24F

RETURN

Before
Instruction
00 5404
090A
0966
0000
0000

; Return from subroutine

After
Instruction
PC
01 0004
W15
1244
Data 1244
0004
Data 1246
0001
SR
0000
; Return from subroutine

After
Instruction
PC
00 0966
W15
0906
Data 0906
0966
Data 0908
0000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

RETURN

Return

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

(W15) 2 W15
(TOS) (PC<22:16>)
(W15) 2 W15
(TOS<15:1) (PC<15:1>)
TOS<0> SFA bit
NOP Instruction Register

Status Affected:

SFA

Encoding:

0000

RETURN

0110

0000

Description:

Return from subroutine. The software stack is POPped twice to restore

the PC. Since two POPs are made, the Stack Pointer (W15) is
decremented by 4.

Words:

Cycles:

6 (5 if exception pending)

Example 1:

001A06

PC
W15
Data 1244
Data 1246
SR
Example 2:

Before
Instruction
00 1A06
1248
0004
0001
0000

005404

PC
W15
Data 0906
Data 0908
SR

RETURN

Before
Instruction
00 5404
090A
0966
0000
0000

; Return from subroutine

After
Instruction
PC
01 0004
W15
1244
Data 1244
0004
Data 1246
0001
SR
0000
; Return from subroutine

After
Instruction
PC
00 0966
W15
0906
Data 0906
0966
Data 0908
0000
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 373

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RLC

Rotate Left f through Carry

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

RLC{.B}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

For byte operation:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

Status Affected:

N, Z, C

Encoding:

1101

Description:

0110

1BDf

ffff

Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the left through the
Carry flag and place the result in the destination register. The Carry flag
of the STATUS Register is shifted into the Least Significant bit of the
destination, and it is then overwritten with the Most Significant bit of Ws.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for f, 1 for WREG).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

RLC.B

0x1233

Before
Instruction
Data 1232 E807
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 374

; Rotate Left w/ C (0x1233) (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
Data 1232 D007
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

RLC

0x820, WREG

; Rotate Left w/ C (0x820) (Word mode)

; Store result in WREG

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG (W0)
5601
WREG (W0) 42DD
Data 0820 216E
Data 0820 216E
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0000 (C = 0)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 375

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RLC

Rotate Left Ws through Carry

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

RLC{.B}

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Status Affected:

N, Z, C

Encoding:

1101

Description:

0010

1Bqq

qddd

Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the left through
the Carry flag and place the result in the destination register Wd. The
Carry flag of the STATUS register is shifted into the Least Significant bit
of Wd, and it is then overwritten with the Most Significant bit of Ws.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

RLC.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W0, W3

Before
Instruction
W0
9976
W3
5879
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 376

; Rotate Left w/ C (W0) (Byte mode)

; Store the result in W3

After
Instruction
W0
9976
W3 58ED
SR
0009 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

RLC

[W2++], [W8]

; Rotate Left w/ C [W2] (Word mode)

; Post-increment W2
; Store result in [W8]

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W2
2008
W2 200A
W8 094E
W8 094E
Data 094E
3689
Data 094E
8082
Data 2008 C041
Data 2008 C041
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 377

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RLNC

Rotate Left f without Carry

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

For byte operation:

(f<6:0>) Dest<7:1>
(f<7>) Dest<0>
For word operation:
(f<14:0>) Dest<15:1>
(f<15>) Dest<0>

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

RLNC{.B}

1101

Description:

0110

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

0BDf

ffff

Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the left and place the
result in the destination register. The Most Significant bit of f is stored in
the Least Significant bit of the destination, and the Carry flag is not
affected.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

RLNC.B

0x1233

Before
Instruction
Data 1232 E807
SR
0000
Example 2:

RLNC

; Rotate Left (0x1233) (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
Data 1233 D107
SR
0008 (N = 1)

0x820, WREG

; Rotate Left (0x820) (Word mode)

; Store result in WREG

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG (W0)
5601
WREG (W0) 42DC
Data 0820 216E
Data 0820 216E
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0000 (C = 0)

DS70157E-page 378

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

RLNC

Rotate Left Ws without Carry

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

RLNC{.B}

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

(Ws<6:0>) Wd<7:1>
(Ws<7>) Wd<0>
For word operation:
(Ws<14:0>) Wd<15:1>
(Ws<15>) Wd<0>

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:
Description:

1101

0010

0Bqq

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

qddd

dppp

ssss

Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the left and place
the result in the destination register Wd. The Most Significant bit of Ws is
stored in the Least Significant bit of Wd, and the Carry flag is not
affected. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws
and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for byte, 1 for word).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

RLNC.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W0, W3

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W0
9976
W3
5879
SR
0001 (C = 1)

; Rotate Left (W0) (Byte mode)

; Store the result in W3

After
Instruction
W0
9976
W3 58EC
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

DS70157E-page 379

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

RLNC

[W2++], [W8] ; Rotate Left [W2] (Word mode)

; Post-increment W2
; Store result in [W8]

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W2
2008
W2 200A
W8 094E
W8 094E
Data 094E
3689
Data 094E
8083
Data 2008 C041
Data 2008 C041
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

DS70157E-page 380

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

RRC

Rotate Right f through Carry

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

RRC{.B}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

For byte operation:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

Status Affected:

N, Z, C

Encoding:

1101

Description:

0111

1BDf

ffff

Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the right through the
Carry flag and place the result in the destination register. The Carry flag
of the STATUS Register is shifted into the Most Significant bit of the
destination, and it is then overwritten with the Least Significant bit of Ws.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for byte, 1 for word).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

RRC.B

0x1233

Before
Instruction
Data 1232 E807
SR
0000
RRC

0x820, WREG

After
Instruction
Data 1232
7407
SR
0000

; Rotate Right w/ C (0x820) (Word mode)

; Store result in WREG

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG (W0)
5601
WREG (W0) 90B7
Data 0820 216E
Data 0820 216E
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 381

Instruction
Descriptions

Example 2:

; Rotate Right w/ C (0x1233) (Byte mode)

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RRC

Rotate Right Ws through Carry

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

RRC{.B}

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Status Affected:

N, Z, C

Encoding:

1101

Description:

0011

1Bqq

qddd

Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right through
the Carry flag and place the result in the destination register Wd. The
Carry flag of the STATUS Register is shifted into the Most Significant bit
of Wd, and it is then overwritten with the Least Significant bit of Ws.
Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

RRC.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W0, W3

Before
Instruction
W0
9976
W3
5879
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 382

; Rotate Right w/ C (W0) (Byte mode)

; Store the result in W3

After
Instruction
W0
9976
W3 58BB
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

RRC

[W2++], [W8]

; Rotate Right w/ C [W2] (Word mode)

; Post-increment W2
; Store result in [W8]

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W2
2008
W2 200A
W8 094E
W8 094E
Data 094E
3689
Data 094E E020
Data 2008 C041
Data 2008 C041
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 383

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

RRNC

Rotate Right f without Carry

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

For byte operation:

(f<7:1>) Dest<6:0>
(f<0>) Dest<7>
For word operation:
(f<15:1>) Dest<14:0>
(f<0>) Dest<15>

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

RRNC{.B}

1101

Description:

0111

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

0BDf

ffff

Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the right and place the
result in the destination register. The Least Significant bit of f is stored in
the Most Significant bit of the destination, and the Carry flag is not
affected.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

RRNC.B

0x1233

Before
Instruction
Data 1232 E807
SR
0000
Example 2:

RRNC

; Rotate Right (0x1233) (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
Data 1232
7407
SR
0000

0x820, WREG

; Rotate Right (0x820) (Word mode)

; Store result in WREG

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG (W0)
5601
WREG (W0) 10B7
Data 0820 216E
Data 0820 216E
SR
0001 (C = 1)
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 384

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

RRNC

Rotate Right Ws without Carry

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

RRNC{.B}

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

(Ws<7:1>) Wd<6:0>
(Ws<0>) Wd<7>
For word operation:
(Ws<15:1>) Wd<14:0>
(Ws<0>) Wd<15>

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:
Description:

1101

0011

0Bqq

qddd

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right and
place the result in the destination register Wd. The Least Significant bit
of Ws is stored in the Most Significant bit of Wd, and the Carry flag is not
affected. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws
and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

RRNC.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W0, W3

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W0
9976
W3 583B
SR
0001 (C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W0
9976
W3
5879
SR
0001 (C = 1)

; Rotate Right (W0) (Byte mode)

; Store the result in W3

DS70157E-page 385

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

RRNC

[W2++], [W8]

Before
Instruction
W2
2008
W8 094E
Data 094E
3689
Data 2008 C041
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 386

; Rotate Right [W2] (Word mode)

; Post-increment W2
; Store result in [W8]

After
Instruction
W2 200A
W8 094E
Data 094E E020
Data 2008 C041
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SAC

Store Accumulator

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

SAC

Acc,

{#Slit4,}

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[--Wd]
[++Wd]
[Wd + Wb]

Operands:

Acc [A,B]
Slit4 [-8 ... +7]
Wb, Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

ShiftSlit4(Acc) (optional)
(Acc[31:16]) Wd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1100

Description:

1100

Awww

wrrr

rhhh

dddd

Perform an optional, signed 4-bit shift of the specified accumulator, then

store the shifted contents of ACCxH (Acc[31:16]) to Wd. The shift range
is -8:7, where a negative operand indicates an arithmetic left shift and a
positive operand indicates an arithmetic right shift. Either register direct
or indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The A bit specifies the source accumulator.
The w bits specify the offset register Wb.
The r bits encode the optional accumulator pre-shift.
The h bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits specify the destination register Wd.
Note 1: This instruction does not modify the contents of Acc.
2: This instruction stores the truncated contents of Acc. The
instruction SAC.R may be used to store the rounded
accumulator contents.
3: If Data Write saturation is enabled (SATDW, CORCON<5>,
= 1), the value stored to Wd is subject to saturation after the
optional shift is performed.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SAC A, #4, W5
; Right shift ACCA by 4
; Store result to W5
; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

W5
ACCA
CORCON
SR

Instruction
Descriptions

W5
ACCA
CORCON
SR

Before
Instruction
B900
00 120F FF00
0010
0000

5
After
Instruction
0120
00 120F FF00
0010
0000

DS70157E-page 387

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

SAC B, #-4, [W5++]

; Left shift ACCB by 4
; Store result to [W5], Post-increment W5
; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)

W5
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

DS70157E-page 388

Before
Instruction
2000
FF C891 8F4C
5BBE
0010
0000

W5
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
2002
FF C891 1F4C
8000
0010
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SAC.R

Store Rounded Accumulator

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

SAC.R

Acc,

{#Slit4,}

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[--Wd]
[++Wd]
[Wd + Wb]

Operands:

Acc [A,B]
Slit4 [-8 ... +7]
Wb [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

ShiftSlit4(Acc) (optional)
Round(Acc)
(Acc[31:16]) Wd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1100

1101

Awww

wrrr

rhhh

dddd

Perform an optional, signed 4-bit shift of the specified accumulator, then

store the rounded contents of ACCxH (Acc[31:16]) to Wd. The shift
range is -8:7, where a negative operand indicates an arithmetic left shift
and a positive operand indicates an arithmetic right shift. The Rounding
mode (Conventional or Convergent) is set by the RND bit,
CORCON<1>. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used
for Wd.
The A bit specifies the source accumulator.
The w bits specify the offset register Wb.
The r bits encode the optional accumulator pre-shift.
The h bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits specify the destination register Wd.
Note 1: This instruction does not modify the contents of the Acc.
2: This instruction stores the rounded contents of Acc. The
instruction SAC may be used to store the truncated
accumulator contents.
3: If Data Write saturation is enabled (SATDW, CORCON<5>,
= 1), the value stored to Wd is subject to saturation after the
optional shift is performed.

Words:

Cycles:

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 389

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 1:

SAC.R A, #4, W5
; Right shift ACCA by 4
; Store rounded result to W5
; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)

W5
ACCA
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

W5
ACCA
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
0121
00 120F FF00
0010
0000

SAC.R B, #-4, [W5++]

; Left shift ACCB by 4
; Store rounded result to [W5], Post-increment W5
; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)

W5
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

DS70157E-page 390

Before
Instruction
B900
00 120F FF00
0010
0000

Before
Instruction
2000
FF F891 8F4C
5BBE
0010
0000

W5
ACCB
Data 2000
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
2002
FF F891 8F4C
8919
0010
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Sign-Extend Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0ddd

dppp

ssss

{label:}

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

Ws<7:0> Wnd<7:0>
If (Ws<7> = 1):
0xFF Wnd<15:8>
Else:
0 Wnd<15:8>

Status Affected:

N, Z, C

Encoding:

1111

Description:

1011

0000

Sign-extend the byte in Ws and store the 16-bit result in Wnd. Either
register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws, and register
direct addressing must be used for Wnd. The C flag is set to the
complement of the N flag.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This operation converts a byte to a word, and it uses no .B or
.W extension.
2: The source Ws is addressed as a byte operand, so any
address modification is by 1.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

W3, W4

; Sign-extend W3 and store to W4

Before
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
1005
SR
0000
Example 2:

[W2++], W12

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

; Sign-extend [W2] and store to W12

; Post-increment W2

Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W2
0900
W12
1002
Data 0900
008F
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
0039
SR
0001 (C = 1)

After
Instruction
W2
0901
W12 FF8F
Data 0900
008F
SR
0008 (N = 1)

DS70157E-page 391

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SETM

Set f or WREG

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

SETM{.B}

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

f
WREG

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

For byte operation:

0xFF destination designated by D
For word operation:
0xFFFF destination designated by D

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1110

Description:

1111

1BDf

ffff

All the bits of the specified register are set to 1. If WREG is specified,
the bits of WREG are set. Otherwise, the bits of the specified file register
are set.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SETM.B

0x891

Before
Instruction
Data 0890
2739
SR
0000
Example 2:

SETM

WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
0900
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 392

; Set 0x891 (Byte mode)

After
Instruction
Data 0890 FF39
SR
0000
; Set WREG (Word mode)

After
Instruction
WREG (W0) FFFF
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SETM

Set Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

qddd

d000

0000

{label:}

SETM{.B}

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

0xFF Wd for byte operation
For word operation:
0xFFFF Wd for word operation

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1110

Description:

1011

1Bqq

All the bits of the specified register are set to 1. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The B bits selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SETM.B

Note:

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W13

; Set W13 (Byte mode)

Before
Instruction
W13
2739
SR
0000
Example 2:

SETM

[--W6]

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

; Pre-decrement W6 (Word mode)

; Set [W6]

After
Instruction
W6 124E
Data 124E FFFF
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W6
1250
Data 124E 3CD9
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W13 27FF
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 393

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SFTAC

Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Slit6

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Acc [A,B]
Slit6 [-16 ... 16]

Operation:

Shiftk(Acc) Acc

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:

1100

Description:

SFTAC

1000

Acc,

A000

01kk

kkkk

#Slit6

0000

Arithmetic shift the 40-bit contents of the specified accumulator by the

signed, 6-bit literal and store the result back into the accumulator. The
shift range is -16:16, where a negative operand indicates a left shift and a
positive operand indicates a right shift. Any bits which are shifted out of
the accumulator are lost.
The A bit selects the accumulator for the result.
The k bits determine the number of bits to be shifted.
Note 1: If saturation is enabled for the target accumulator (SATA,
CORCON<7> or SATB, CORCON<6>), the value stored to
the accumulator is subject to saturation.
2: If the shift amount is greater than 16 or less than -16, no
modification will be made to the accumulator, and an
arithmetic trap will occur.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SFTAC A, #12
; Arithmetic right shift ACCA by 12
; Store result to ACCA
; CORCON = 0x0080 (SATA = 1)

ACCA
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

ACCA
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
00 0001 20FF
0080
0000

SFTAC B, #-10
; Arithmetic left shift ACCB by 10
; Store result to ACCB
; CORCON = 0x0040 (SATB = 1)

ACCB
CORCON
SR

DS70157E-page 394

Before
Instruction
00 120F FF00
0080
0000

Before
Instruction
FF FFF1 8F4C
0040
0000

ACCB
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
FF C63D 3000
0040
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SFTAC

Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Wb

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Acc [A,B]
Wb [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

Shift(Wb)(Acc) Acc

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:

1100

Description:

SFTAC

PIC24E

1000

Acc,

A000

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0000

ssss

Arithmetic shift the 40-bit contents of the specified accumulator and store
the result back into the accumulator. The Least Significant 6 bits of Wb
are used to specify the shift amount. The shift range is -16:16, where a
negative value indicates a left shift and a positive value indicates a right
shift. Any bits which are shifted out of the accumulator are lost.
The A bit selects the accumulator for the source/destination.
The s bits select the address of the shift count register.
Note 1: If saturation is enabled for the target accumulator (SATA,
CORCON<7> or SATB, CORCON<6>), the value stored to
the accumulator is subject to saturation.
2: If the shift amount is greater than 16 or less than -16, no
modification will be made to the accumulator, and an
arithmetic trap will occur.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SFTAC A, W0
; Arithmetic shift ACCA by (W0)
; Store result to ACCA
; CORCON = 0x0000 (saturation disabled)

W0
ACCA
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

W0
ACCA
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
FFFC
03 20FA B090
0000
8800 (OA, OAB = 1)

SFTAC B, W12
; Arithmetic shift ACCB by (W12)
; Store result to ACCB
; CORCON = 0x0040 (SATB = 1)

Before
Instruction
000F
FF FFF1 8F4C
0040
0000

W12
ACCB
CORCON
SR

5
After
Instruction
000F
FF FFFF FFE3
0040
0000

Instruction
Descriptions

W12
ACCB
CORCON
SR

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Before
Instruction
FFFC
00 320F AB09
0000
0000

DS70157E-page 395

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Shift Left f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

SL{.B}

Operands:

f [0... 8191]

Operation:

For byte operation:

(f<7>) (C)
(f<6:0>) Dest<7:1>
0 Dest<0>
For word operation:
(f<15>) (C)
(f<14:0>) Dest<15:1>
0 Dest<0>
C

Status Affected:

ffff

{,WREG}

N, Z, C

Encoding:

1101

Description:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0100

0BDf

ffff

Shift the contents of the file register one bit to the left and place the result
in the destination register. The Most Significant bit of the file register is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register, and zero is shifted into
the Least Significant bit of the destination register.
The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If
WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not
specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SL.B

0x909

Before
Instruction
Data 0908
9439
SR
0000
Example 2:

After
Instruction
Data 0908
0839
SR
0001 (C = 1)

0x1650, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
0900
Data 1650
4065
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 396

; Shift left (0x909) (Byte mode)

; Shift left (0x1650) (Word mode)

; Store result in WREG

After
Instruction
WREG (W0) 80CA
Data 1650
4065
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Shift Left Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

SL{.B}

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

(Ws<7>) C
(Ws<6:0>) Wd<7:1>
0 Wd<0>
For word operation:
(Ws<15>) C
(Ws<14:0>) Wd<15:1>
0 Wd<0>
C

Status Affected:

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

N, Z, C

Encoding:

1101

Description:

0000

0Bqq

qddd

Shift the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the left and place
the result in the destination register Wd. The Most Significant bit of Ws is
shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register, and 0 is shifted into the
Least Significant bit of Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing
may be used for Ws and Wd.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SL.B

W3, W4

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

5
; Shift left W3 (Byte mode)
; Store result to W4

Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W3 78A9
W4
1005
SR
0000

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

After
Instruction
W3 78A9
W4
1052
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 397

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

[W2++], [W12]

Before
Instruction
W2
0900
W12
1002
Data 0900
800F
Data 1002
6722
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 398

; Shift left [W2] (Word mode)

; Store result to [W12]
; Post-increment W2

After
Instruction
W2
0902
W12
1002
Data 0900
800F
Data 1002 001E
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Shift Left by Short Literal

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit4 [0...15]
Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit4<3:0> Shift_Val
Wnd<15:Shift_Val> = Wb<15-Shift_Val:0>
Wd<Shift_Val 1:0> = 0

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

1101

Description:

Wb,

1101

#lit4,

0www

wddd

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

d100

kkkk

Wnd

Shift left the contents of the source register Wb by the 4-bit unsigned
literal and store the result in the destination register Wnd. Any bits
shifted out of the source register are lost. Direct addressing must be
used for Wb and Wnd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

W2, #4, W2

Before
Instruction
W2 78A9
SR
0000
Example 2:

W3, #12, W8

Before
Instruction
W3
0912
W8
1002
SR
0000

This instruction operates in Word mode only.

; Shift left W2 by 4
; Store result to W2

After
Instruction
W2 8A90
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Shift left W3 by 12
; Store result to W8

After
Instruction
W3
0912
W8
2000
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 399

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Shift Left by Wns

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Wns [W0 ...W15]
Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

Wns<4:0> Shift_Val
Wnd<15:Shift_Val> = Wb<15 Shift_Val:0>
Wd<Shift_Val 1:0> = 0

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

1101

Description:

Wb,

1101

0www

Wns,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

d000

ssss

Wnd

wddd

Shift left the contents of the source register Wb by the 5 Least Significant
bits of Wns (only up to 15 positions) and store the result in the destination register Wnd. Any bits shifted out of the source register are lost.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb, Wns and Wnd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The d bits select the destination register.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
2: If Wns is greater than 15, Wnd will be loaded with 0x0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

W0, W1, W2

Before
Instruction
W0 09A4
W1
8903
W2 78A9
SR
0000
Example 2:

W4, W5, W6

Before
Instruction
W4 A409
W5 FF01
W6
0883
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 400

; Shift left W0 by W1<0:4>

; Store result to W2

After
Instruction
W0 09A4
W1
8903
W2 4D20
SR
0000
; Shift left W4 by W5<0:4>
; Store result to W6

After
Instruction
W4 A409
W5 FF01
W6
4812
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SUB

Subtract WREG from f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) (WREG) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C
1011

Description:

0101

Syntax:

Encoding:

SUB{.B}

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

ffff

{,WREG}

0BDf

ffff

Subtract the contents of the default working register WREG from the
contents of the specified file register, and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG.
If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUB.B 0x1FFF

; Sub. WREG from (0x1FFF) (Byte mode)

; Store result to 0x1FFF

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9439
SR
0000
Example 2:

SUB

0xA04, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
6234
Data 0A04
4523
SR
0000

After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9039
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)
; Sub. WREG from (0xA04) (Word mode)
; Store result to WREG

After
Instruction
WREG (W0) E2EF
Data 0A04
4523
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 401

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SUB

Subtract Literal from Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

kkkk

dddd

Syntax:

{label:}

SUB{.B}

Operands:

lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation

lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wn) lit10 Wn

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

1011

Description:

0001

#lit10,

0Bkk

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Subtract the 10-bit unsigned literal operand from the contents of the
working register Wn, and store the result back in the working register
Wn. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn.
The B bit selects byte or word operation.
The k bits specify the literal operand.
The d bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned
value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte
mode.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUB.B

#0x23, W0

Before
Instruction
W0
7804
SR
0000
Example 2:

SUB

#0x108, W4

Before
Instruction
W4
6234
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 402

; Sub. 0x23 from W0 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W0

After
Instruction
W0 78E1
SR
0008 (N = 1)
; Sub. 0x108 from W4 (Word mode)
; Store result to W4

After
Instruction
W4 612C
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SUB

Subtract Short Literal from Wb

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

SUB{.B}

Wb,

#lit5,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operands:

Operation:

(Wb) lit5 Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

0101

Description:

0www

wBqq

qddd

d11k

kkkk

Subtract the 5-bit unsigned literal operand from the contents of the base
register Wb, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register
direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect
addressing must be used for Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUB.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W4, #0x10, W5

Before
Instruction
W4
1782
W5
7804
SR
0000
Example 2:

SUB

; Sub. 0x8 from W0 (Word mode)

; Store result to [W2]
; Post-increment W2

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W4
1782
W5
7872
SR
0005 (OV, C = 1)

W0, #0x8, [W2++]

Before
Instruction
W0
F230
W2
2004
Data 2004 A557
SR
0000

; Sub. 0x10 from W4 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W5

After
Instruction
W0
F230
W2
2006
Data 2004
F228
SR
0009 (N, C = 1)

DS70157E-page 403

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SUB

Subtract Ws from Wb

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

SUB{.B}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Ws) Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

0101

Description:

0www

Wb,

wBqq

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

qddd

dppp

ssss

Subtract the contents of the source register Ws from the contents of the
base register Wb and place the result in the destination register Wd.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUB.B

W0, W1, W0

Before
Instruction
W0
1732
W1
7844
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 404

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; Sub. W1 from W0 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W0

After
Instruction
W0 17EE
W1
7844
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

SUB

W7, [W8++], [W9++]

Before
Instruction
W7
2450
W8
1808
W9
2020
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2020 A557
SR
0000

;
;
;
;

Sub. [W8] from W7 (Word mode)

Store result to [W9]
Post-increment W8
Post-increment W9

After
Instruction
W7
2450
W8 180A
W9
2022
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2020 916C
SR 010C (DC, N, OV = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 405

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SUB

Subtract Accumulators

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Acc [A,B]

Operation:

If (Acc = A):
ACCA ACCB ACCA
Else:
ACCB ACCA ACCB

Status Affected:

OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB

Encoding:

SUB

PIC24E

1100

Description:

1011

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0000

Acc

A011

Subtract the contents of the unspecified accumulator from the contents

of Acc, and store the result back into Acc. This instruction performs a
40-bit subtraction.
The A bit specifies the destination accumulator.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUB

Before
Instruction
76 120F 098A
23 F312 BC17
0000
0000

ACCA
ACCB
CORCON
SR
Example 2:

SUB

ACCA
ACCB
CORCON
SR

DS70157E-page 406

; Subtract ACCB from ACCA

; Store the result to ACCA
; CORCON = 0x0000 (no saturation)

ACCA
ACCB
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
52 1EFC 4D73
23 F312 BC17
0000
1100 (OA, OB = 1)

; Subtract ACCA from ACCB

; Store the result to ACCB
; CORCON = 0x0040 (SATB = 1)

Before
Instruction
FF 9022 2EE1
00 2456 8F4C
0040
0000

ACCA
ACCB
CORCON
SR

After
Instruction
FF 9022 2EE1
00 7FFF FFFF
0040
1400 (SB, SAB = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SUBB

Subtract WREG and Carry bit from f

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f) (WREG) (C) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Description:

1011

0101

Syntax:

Encoding:

SUBB{.B}

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

ffff

{,WREG}

1BDf

ffff

Subtract the contents of the default working register WREG and the
Borrow flag (Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of the specified file
register and place the result in the destination register. The optional
WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is
specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the
result is stored in the file register
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUBB.B 0x1FFF

; Sub. WREG and C from (0x1FFF) (Byte mode)

; Store result to 0x1FFF

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9439
SR
0000
Example 2:

SUBB 0xA04, WREG

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

; Sub. WREG and C from (0xA04) (Word mode)

; Store result to WREG

After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
0000
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0001 (C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
6234
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0000

After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
8F39
SR
0008 (N = 1)

DS70157E-page 407

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SUBB

Subtract Wn from Literal with Borrow

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

kkkk

dddd

Syntax:

{label:}

SUBB{.B}

Operands:

lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation

lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wn) lit10 (C) Wn

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

1011

Description:

0001

#lit10,

1Bkk

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Subtract the unsigned 10-bit literal operand and the Borrow flag (Carry
flag inverse, C) from the contents of the working register Wn, and store
the result back in the working register Wn. Register direct addressing
must be used for Wn.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits specify the literal operand.
The d bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .w extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an
unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal
Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in
Byte mode.
3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUBB.B

#0x23, W0

Before
Instruction
W0
7804
SR
0000
Example 2:

SUBB

#0x108, W4

Before
Instruction
W4
6234
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 408

; Sub. 0x23 and C from W0 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W0

After
Instruction
W0 78E0
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)
; Sub. 0x108 and C from W4 (Word mode)
; Store result to W4

After
Instruction
W4 612C
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SUBB

Subtract Short Literal from Wb with Borrow

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

SUBB{.B}

Wb,

#lit5,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) lit5 (C)Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

0101

Description:

1www

wBqq

qddd

d11k

kkkk

Subtract the 5-bit unsigned literal operand and the Borrow flag (Carry
flag inverse, C) from the contents of the base register Wb and place the
result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for
Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUBB.B

W4, #0x10, W5

Before
Instruction
W4
1782
W5
7804
SR
0000

; Sub. 0x10 and C from W4 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W5

After
Instruction
W4
1782
W5
7871
SR
0005 (OV, C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 409

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

SUBB

W0, #0x8, [W2++]

; Sub. 0x8 and C from W0 (Word mode)

; Store result to [W2]
; Post-increment W2

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
0009
W0
0009
W2
2004
W2
2006
Data 2004 A557
Data 2004
0000
SR
0020 (Z = 1)
SR
0103 (DC, Z, C = 1)

DS70157E-page 410

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SUBB

Subtract Ws from Wb with Borrow

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

SUBB{.B}

Wb,

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb) (Ws) (C) Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

0101

Description:

1www

wBqq

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

qddd

dppp

ssss

Subtract the contents of the source register Ws and the Borrow flag
(Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of the base register Wb, and
place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing
must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used
for Ws and Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUBB.B

W0, W1, W0

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W0 17ED
W1
7844
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W0
1732
W1
7844
SR
0000

; Sub. W1 and C from W0 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W0

DS70157E-page 411

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

SUBB

W7,[W8++],[W9++] ;
;
;
;

Before
Instruction
W7
2450
W8
1808
W9
2022
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 A557
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 412

Sub. [W8] and C from W7 (Word mode)

Store result to [W9]
Post-increment W8
Post-increment W9

After
Instruction
W7
2450
W8 180A
W9
2024
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 916C
SR 010C (DC, N, OV = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SUBBR

Subtract f from WREG with Borrow

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(WREG) (f) (C) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:
Description:

1011

SUBBR{.B} f

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

1101

ffff

{,WREG}

1BDf

ffff

Subtract the contents of the specified file register f and the Borrow flag
(Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of WREG, and place the result
in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG.
If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUBBR.B 0x803

; Sub. (0x803) and C from WREG (Byte mode)

; Store result to 0x803

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 0802
9439
Data 0802
6F39
SR
0002 (Z = 1)
SR
0000
Example 2:

SUBBR 0xA04, WREG ; Sub. (0xA04) and C from WREG (Word mode)
; Store result to WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
6234
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0000

After
Instruction
WREG (W0) FFFE
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 413

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SUBBR

Subtract Wb from Short Literal with Borrow

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

SUBBR{.B} Wb,

#lit5,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit5 (Wb) (C) Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

0001

Description:

1www

wBqq

qddd

d11k

kkkk

Subtract the contents of the base register Wb and the Borrow flag (Carry
flag inverse, C) from the 5-bit unsigned literal and place the result in the
destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb.
Register direct or indirect addressing must be used for Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUBBR.B

W0, #0x10, W1 ; Sub. W0 and C from 0x10 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W1

Before
Instruction
W0
F310
W1 786A
SR
0003 (Z, C = 1)

DS70157E-page 414

After
Instruction
W0
F310
W1
7800
SR
0103 (DC, Z, C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

SUBBR

W0, #0x8, [W2++] ; Sub. W0 and C from 0x8 (Word mode)

; Store result to [W2]
; Post-increment W2

Before
After
Instruction
Instruction
W0
0009
W0
0009
W2
2004
W2
2006
Data 2004 A557
Data 2004 FFFE
SR
0020 (Z = 1)
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 415

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SUBBR

Subtract Wb from Ws with Borrow

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

SUBBR{.B} Wb,

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Ws) (Wb) (C) Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

0001

Description:

1www

wBqq

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

qddd

dppp

ssss

Subtract the contents of the base register Wb and the Borrow flag (Carry
flag inverse, C) from the contents of the source register Ws and place
the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must
be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for
Ws and Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR.
These instructions can only clear Z.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUBBR.B

W0, W1, W0

Before
Instruction
W0
1732
W1
7844
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 416

; Sub. W0 and C from W1 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W0

After
Instruction
W0
1711
W1
7844
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

SUBBR W7,[W8++],[W9++] ;
;
;
;

Before
Instruction
W7
2450
W8
1808
W9
2022
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 A557
SR
0000

Sub. W7 and C from [W8] (Word mode)

Store result to [W9]
Post-increment W8
Post-increment W9

After
Instruction
W7
2450
W8 180A
W9
2024
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 6E93
SR
0005 (OV, C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 417

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SUBR

Subtract f from WREG

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(WREG) (f) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

SUBR{.B} f

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

1011

Description:

1101

ffff

{,WREG}

0BDf

ffff

Subtract the contents of the specified file register from the contents of
the default working register WREG, and place the result in the
destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the
destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG.
If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUBR.B

0x1FFF

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9439
SR
0000
Example 2:

SUBR

After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
7039
SR
0000

0xA04, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
6234
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 418

; Sub. (0x1FFF) from WREG (Byte mode)

; Store result to 0x1FFF

; Sub. (0xA04) from WREG (Word mode)

; Store result to WREG

After
Instruction
WREG (W0) FFFF
Data 0A04
6235
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

SUBR

Subtract Wb from Short Literal

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

SUBR{.B}

Wb,

#lit5

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit5 (Wb) Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

0001

Description:

0www

wBqq

qddd

d11k

kkkk

Subtract the contents of the base register Wb from the unsigned 5-bit
literal operand, and place the result in the destination register Wd.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUBR.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W0, #0x10, W1

Before
Instruction
W0
F310
W1 786A
SR
0000
Example 2:

SUBR

; Sub. W0 from 0x8 (Word mode)

; Store result to [W2]
; Post-increment W2

After
Instruction
W0
0009
W2
2006
Data 2004 FFFF
SR
0108 (DC, N = 1)

DS70157E-page 419

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

After
Instruction
W0
F310
W1
7800
SR
0103 (DC, Z, C = 1)

W0, #0x8, [W2++]

Before
Instruction
W0
0009
W2
2004
Data 2004 A557
SR
0000

; Sub. W0 from 0x10 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W1

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SUBR

Subtract Wb from Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

SUBR{.B}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Ws) (Wb) Wd

Status Affected:

DC, N, OV, Z, C

Encoding:

0001

Description:

0www

Wb,

wBqq

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

qddd

dppp

ssss

Subtract the contents of the base register Wb from the contents of the
source register Ws and place the result in the destination register Wd.
Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SUBR.B

W0, W1, W0

Before
Instruction
W0
1732
W1
7844
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 420

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; Sub. W0 from W1 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W0

After
Instruction
W0
1712
W1
7844
SR
0001 (C = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Example 2:

SUBR

W7, [W8++], [W9++]

Before
Instruction
W7
2450
W8
1808
W9
2022
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 A557
SR
0000

;
;
;
;

Sub. W7 from [W8] (Word mode)

Store result to [W9]
Post-increment W8
Post-increment W9

After
Instruction
W7
2450
W8 180A
W9
2024
Data 1808 92E4
Data 2022 6E94
SR
0005 (OV, C = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 421

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

SWAP

Byte or Nibble Swap Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

1B00

0000

ssss

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

(Wn)<7:4> Wn)<3:0>
For word operation:
(Wn)<15:8> Wn)<7:0>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

SWAP{.B} Wn

1111

Description:

dsPIC30F dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

1101

Swap the contents of the working register Wn. In Word mode, the two
bytes of Wn are swapped. In Byte mode, the two nibbles of the Least
Significant Byte of Wn are swapped, and the Most Significant Byte of
Wn is unchanged. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The s bits select the address of the working register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

SWAP.B

Before
Instruction
W0 AB87
SR
0000
Example 2:

SWAP

Before
Instruction
W0
8095
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 422

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

; Nibble swap (W0)

After
Instruction
W0 AB78
SR
0000
; Byte swap (W0)

After
Instruction
W0
9580
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

TBLRDH

Table Read High

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

TBLRDH{.B} [Ws],

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

[Ws++],

[Wd]

[Ws--],

[Wd++]

[++Ws],

[Wd--]

[--Ws],

[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

If (LSB(Ws) = 1)
0 Wd
Else
Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <23:16>Wd
For word operation:
Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <23:16> Wd <7:0>
0 Wd <15:8>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1010

1Bqq

qddd

dppp

ssss

Read the contents of the most significant word of program memory and
store it to the destination register Wd. The target word address of program
memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register,
TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Ws. Indirect
addressing must be used for Ws, and either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Wd.
In Word mode, zero is stored to the Most Significant Byte of the destination
register (due to non-existent program memory) and the third program
memory byte (PM<23:16>) at the specified program memory address is
stored to the Least Significant Byte of the destination register.
In Byte mode, the source address depends on the contents of Ws. If Ws is
not word-aligned, zero is stored to the destination register (due to
non-existent program memory). If Ws is word-aligned, the third program
memory byte (PM<23:16>) at the specified program memory address is
stored to the destination register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather
than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.

Words:

Cycles:

2 (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F)

5 (PIC24E, dsPIC33E)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 423

Instruction
Descriptions

Note:

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 1:

TBLRDH.B

W0
W1
Data 0F70
Program 01 0812
TBLPAG
SR
Example 2:

DS70157E-page 424

Before
Instruction
0812
0F71
0944
EF 2042
0001
0000

TBLRDH

W6
W8
Program 00 3406
TBLPAG
SR

[W0], [W1++]

After
Instruction
W0
0812
W1
0F72
Data 0F70
EF44
Program 01 0812
EF 2042
TBLPAG
0001
SR
0000

[W6++], W8

Before
Instruction
3406
65B1
29 2E40
0000
0000

; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W0]) (Byte mode)

; Store to [W1]
; Post-increment W1

; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W6]) (Word mode)

; Store to W8
; Post-increment W6

After
Instruction
W6
3408
W8
0029
Program 00 3406
29 2E40
TBLPAG
0000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

TBLRDL

Table Read Low

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

TBLRDL{.B} [Ws],

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

[Ws++],

[Wd]

[Ws--],

[Wd++]

[++Ws],

[Wd--]

[--Ws],

[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

If (LSB(Ws) = 1)
Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <15:8> Wd
Else
Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <7:0> Wd
For word operation:
Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <15:0> Wd

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1010

0Bqq

qddd

Read the contents of the least significant word of program memory and
store it to the destination register Wd. The target word address of program
memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register,
TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Ws. Indirect
addressing must be used for Ws, and either register direct or indirect
addressing may be used for Wd.
In Word mode, the lower 2 bytes of program memory are stored to the
destination register. In Byte mode, the source address depends on the
contents of Ws. If Ws is not word-aligned, the second byte of the program
memory word (PM<15:7>) is stored to the destination register. If Ws is
word-aligned, the first byte of the program memory word (PM<7:0>) is
stored to the destination register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word mode, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather

than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a
word move, but it is not required.

Cycles:

2 (PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F)

5 (PIC24E, dsPIC33E)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Words:

DS70157E-page 425

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 1:

TBLRDL.B

W0
W1
Data 0F70
Program 01 0812
TBLPAG
SR
Example 2:

DS70157E-page 426

Before
Instruction
0813
0F71
0944
EF 2042
0001
0000

TBLRDL

W6
W8
Data 1202
Program 00 3406
TBLPAG
SR

[W0++], W1

After
Instruction
W0
0814
W1
0F20
Data 0F70
EF44
Program 01 0812
EF 2042
TBLPAG
0001
SR
0000

[W6], [W8++]

Before
Instruction
3406
1202
658B
29 2E40
0000
0000

; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W0]) (Byte mode)

; Store to W1
; Post-increment W0

; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W6]) (Word mode)

; Store to W8
; Post-increment W8

After
Instruction
W6
3408
W8
1204
Data 1202
2E40
Program 00 3406
29 2E40
TBLPAG
0000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

TBLWTH

Table Write High

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

TBLWTH{.B} Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

[Wd]

[Ws],

[Wd++]

[Ws++],

[Wd--]

[Ws--],

[++Wd]

[++Ws],

[--Wd]

[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

If (LSB(Wd) = 1)
NOP
Else
(Ws) Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)]<23:16>
For word operation:
(Ws)<7:0> Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <23:16>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

1Bqq

qddd

dppp

ssss

Store the contents of the working source register Ws to the most significant
word of program memory. The destination word address of program memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register,
TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Wd. Either direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws, and indirect addressing must be
used for Wd.
Since program memory is 24 bits wide, this instruction can only write to the
upper byte of program memory (PM<23:16>). This may be performed using
a Wd that is word-aligned in Byte mode or Word mode. If Byte mode is
used with a Wd that is not word-aligned, no operation is performed.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather

than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word
move, but it is not required.

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 427

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 1:

TBLWTH.B

W0
W1
Data 0812
Program 01 0F70
TBLPAG
SR

Before
Instruction
0812
0F70
0944
EF 2042
0001
0000

Note:

Example 2:

Note:

DS70157E-page 428

; Write [W0]... (Byte mode)

; to PM Latch High (TBLPAG:[W1])
; Post-increment W0

After
Instruction
W0
0812
W1
0F70
Data 0812
EF44
Program 01 0F70
44 2042
TBLPAG
0001
SR
0000

Only the Program Latch is written to. The contents of program memory
are not updated until the Flash memory is programmed using the
procedure described in the specific device family reference manual.

TBLWTH

W6
W8
Program 00 0870
TBLPAG
SR

[W0++], [W1]

W6, [W8++]

Before
Instruction
0026
0870
22 3551
0000
0000

; Write W6... (Word mode)

; to PM Latch High (TBLPAG:[W8])
; Post-increment W8

After
Instruction
W6
0026
W8
0872
Program 00 0870
26 3551
TBLPAG
0000
SR
0000

Only the Program Latch is written to. The contents of program memory
are not updated until the Flash memory is programmed using the
procedure described in the specific device family reference manual.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

TBLWTL

Table Write Low

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

TBLWTL{.B} Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

dppp

ssss

[Wd]

[Ws],

[Wd++]

[Ws++],

[Wd--]

[Ws--],

[++Wd]

[++Ws],

[--Wd]

[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

For byte operation:

If (LSB(Wd)=1)
(Ws) Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <15:8>
Else
(Ws) Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <7:0>
For word operation:
(Ws) Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <15:0>

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:
Description:

1011

0Bqq

qddd

Store the contents of the working source register Ws to the least significant
word of program memory. The destination word address of program
memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register,
TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Wd. Either direct or
indirect addressing may be used for Ws, and indirect addressing must be
used for Wd.
In Word mode, Ws is stored to the lower 2 bytes of program memory. In
Byte mode, the Least Significant bit of Wd determines the destination byte.
If Wd is not word-aligned, Ws is stored to the second byte of program
memory (PM<15:8>). If Wd is word-aligned, Ws is stored to the first byte of
program memory (PM<7:0>).
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather

than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word
move, but it is not required.

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 429

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 1:

TBLWTL.B

W0
W1
Program 00 1224
TBLPAG
SR

Before
Instruction
6628
1225
78 0080
0000
0000

Note:

Example 2:

Note:

DS70157E-page 430

; Write W0... (Byte mode)

; to PM Latch Low (TBLPAG:[W1])
; Post-increment W1

After
Instruction
W0
6628
W1
1226
Program 01 1224
78 2880
TBLPAG
0000
SR
0000

Only the Program Latch is written to. The contents of program memory
are not updated until the Flash memory is programmed using the
procedure described in the specific device family reference manual.

TBLWTL

W6
W8
Data 1600
Program 01 7208
TBLPAG
SR

W0, [W1++]

[W6], [W8]

Before
Instruction
1600
7208
0130
09 0002
0001
0000

; Write [W6]... (Word mode)

; to PM Latch Low (TBLPAG:[W8])
; Post-increment W8

After
Instruction
W6
1600
W8
7208
Data 1600
0130
Program 01 7208
09 0130
TBLPAG
0001
SR
0000

Only the Program Latch is written to. The contents of program memory
are not updated until the Flash memory is programmed using the
procedure described in the specific device family reference manual.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

ULNK

De-allocate Stack Frame

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

W14 W15
(W15) 2 W15
(TOS) W14

Status Affected:

None

Encoding:

1111

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

0000

ULNK

1010

1000

0000

Description:

This instruction de-allocates a Stack Frame for a subroutine calling

sequence. The Stack Frame is de-allocated by setting the Stack Pointer
(W15) equal to the Frame Pointer (W14), and then POPping the stack
to reset the Frame Pointer (W14).

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ULNK

; Unlink the stack frame

Before
Instruction
W14
2002
W15
20A2
Data 2000
2000
SR
0000
Example 2:

ULNK

After
Instruction
W14
2000
W15
2000
Data 2000
2000
SR
0000

; Unlink the stack frame

Before
Instruction
W14
0802
W15
0812
Data 0800
0800
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W14
0800
W15
0800
Data 0800
0800
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 431

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

ULNK

De-allocate Stack Frame

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

X
Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

None

Operation:

W14 W15
(W15) 2 W15
(TOS) W14
0 SFA bit

Status Affected:

SFA

Encoding:

1111

ULNK

1010

1000

0000

Description:

This instruction de-allocates a Stack Frame for a subroutine calling

sequence. The Stack Frame is de-allocated by setting the Stack Pointer
(W15) equal to the Frame Pointer (W14), and then POPping the stack
to reset the Frame Pointer (W14).

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

ULNK

; Unlink the stack frame

Before
Instruction
W14
2002
W15
20A2
Data 2000
2000
SR
0000
Example 2:

ULNK

After
Instruction
W14
2000
W15
2000
Data 2000
2000
SR
0000

; Unlink the stack frame

Before
Instruction
W14
0802
W15
0812
Data 0800
0800
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 432

After
Instruction
W14
0800
W15
0800
Data 0800
0800
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

XOR

Exclusive OR f and WREG

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

f [0 ... 8191]

Operation:

(f).XOR.(WREG) destination designated by D

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

XOR{.B}

1011

Description:

0110

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

ffff

{,WREG}

1BDf

ffff

Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the contents of the

default working register WREG and the contents of the specified file
register and place the result in the destination register. The optional
WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is
specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the
result is stored in the file register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register).
The f bits select the address of the file register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

XOR.B

0x1FFF

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9439
SR
0000
Example 2:

XOR

; XOR (0x1FFF) and WREG (Byte mode)

; Store result to 0x1FFF

After
Instruction
WREG (W0)
7804
Data 1FFE
9039
SR
0008 (N = 1)

0xA04, WREG

Before
Instruction
WREG (W0)
6234
Data 0A04 A053
SR
0000

; XOR (0xA04) and WREG (Word mode)

; Store result to WREG

After
Instruction
WREG (W0) C267
Data 0A04 A053
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 433

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

XOR

Exclusive OR Literal and Wn

Implemented in:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

kkkk

dddd

Syntax:

{label:}

Operands:

lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation

lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation
Wn [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

lit10.XOR.(Wn) Wn

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

1011

Description:

XOR{.B}

0010

#lit10,

1Bkk

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the unsigned 10-bit literal

operand and the contents of the working register Wn and store the result
back in the working register Wn. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wn.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The k bits specify the literal operand.
The d bits select the address of the working register.
Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation
rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.
2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned
value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte
mode.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

XOR.B

#0x23, W0

Before
Instruction
W0
7804
SR
0000
Example 2:

XOR

#0x108, W4

Before
Instruction
W4
6134
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 434

; XOR 0x23 and W0 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W0

After
Instruction
W0
7827
SR
0000
; XOR 0x108 and W4 (Word mode)
; Store result to W4

After
Instruction
W4 603C
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

XOR

Exclusive OR Wb and Short Literal

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

XOR{.B}

Wb,

#lit5,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Wd
[Wd]
[Wd++]
[Wd--]
[++Wd]
[--Wd]

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

lit5 [0 ... 31]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb).XOR.lit5 Wd

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

0110

Description:

1www

wBqq

qddd

d11k

kkkk

Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the contents of the base

register Wb and the unsigned 5-bit literal operand and place the result in
the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for
Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The k bits provide the literal operand, a 5-bit integer number.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

XOR.B

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

W4, #0x14, W5

Before
Instruction
W4
C822
W5
1200
SR
0000

; XOR W4 and 0x14 (Byte mode)

; Store result to W5

After
Instruction
W4
C822
W5
1234
SR
0000

5
Instruction
Descriptions

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 435

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

XOR

W2, #0x1F, [W8++]

Before
Instruction
W2
8505
W8
1004
Data 1004
6628
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 436

; XOR W2 by 0x1F (Word mode)

; Store result to [W8]
; Post-increment W8

After
Instruction
W2
8505
W8
1006
Data 1004
851A
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

XOR

Exclusive OR Wb and Ws

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

{label:}

XOR{.B}

Operands:

Wb [W0 ... W15]

Ws [W0 ... W15]
Wd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

(Wb).XOR.(Ws) Wd

Status Affected:

N, Z

Encoding:

0110

Description:

1www

Wb,

wBqq

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E
X

Ws,

[Ws],

[Wd]

[Ws++],

[Wd++]

[Ws--],

[Wd--]

[++Ws],

[++Wd]

[--Ws],

[--Wd]

qddd

dppp

ssss

Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the contents of the source

register Ws and the contents of the base register Wb, and place the
result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be
used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for
Ws and Wd.
The w bits select the address of the base register.
The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte).
The q bits select the destination Address mode.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note:

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

XOR.B

W1, [W5++], [W9++]

; XOR W1 and [W5] (Byte mode)

; Store result to [W9]
; Post-increment W5 and W9

After
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W5
2001
W9
2601
Data 2000
115A
Data 2600
00F0
SR
0008 (N = 1)

5
Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W1 AAAA
W5
2000
W9
2600
Data 2000
115A
Data 2600
0000
SR
0000

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation

rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to
denote a word operation, but it is not required.

DS70157E-page 437

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

Example 2:

XOR

W1, W5, W9

Before
Instruction
W1 FEDC
W5
1234
W9
A34D
SR
0000

DS70157E-page 438

; XOR W1 and W5 (Word mode)

; Store the result to W9

After
Instruction
W1 FEDC
W5
1234
W9
ECE8
SR
0008 (N = 1)

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

Zero-Extend Wn

Implemented in:

Syntax:

PIC24F

PIC24H

PIC24E

dsPIC30F

0ddd

dppp

ssss

{label:}

Ws,

dsPIC33F dsPIC33E

Wnd

[Ws],
[Ws++],
[Ws--],
[++Ws],
[--Ws],
Operands:

Ws [W0 ... W15]

Wnd [W0 ... W15]

Operation:

Ws<7:0> Wnd<7:0>
0 Wnd<15:8>

Status Affected:

N, Z, C

Encoding:

1111

Description:

1011

1000

Zero-extend the Least Significant Byte in source working register Ws to

a 16-bit value and store the result in the destination working register
Wnd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws,
and register direct addressing must be used for Wnd. The N flag is
cleared and the C flag is set, because the zero-extended word is always
positive.
The d bits select the destination register.
The p bits select the source Address mode.
The s bits select the source register.
Note 1: This operation converts a byte to a word, and it uses no .B or
.W extension.
2: The source Ws is addressed as a byte operand, so any
address modification is by 1.

Words:

Cycles:

Example 1:

W3, W4

; zero-extend W3
; Store result to W4

Before
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
1005
SR
0000
Example 2:

[W2++], W12

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

; Zero-extend [W2]
; Store to W12
; Post-increment W2

Instruction
Descriptions

Before
Instruction
W2
0900
W12
1002
Data 0900
268F
SR
0000

After
Instruction
W3
7839
W4
0039
SR
0001 (C = 1)

After
Instruction
W2
0901
W12
008F
Data 0900
268F
SR
0001 (C = 1)

DS70157E-page 439

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

NOTES:

DS70157E-page 440

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

6
Reference

Section 6. Reference
HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics:
6.1
6.2
6.3

Instruction Bit Map ........................................................................................................ 442

Instruction Set Summary Table ..................................................................................... 444
Revision History ............................................................................................................ 454

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 441

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

6.1

INSTRUCTION BIT MAP

Instruction encoding for the 16-bit MCU and DSC family devices is summarized in Table 6-1. This
table contains the encoding for the MSB of each instruction. The first column in the table
represents bits 23:20 of the opcode, and the first row of the table represents bits 19:16 of the
opcode. The first byte of the opcode is formed by taking the first column bit value and appending
the first row bit value. For instance, the MSB of the PUSH instruction (last row, ninth column) is
encoded with 11111000b (0xF8).
Note:

DS70157E-page 442

The complete opcode for each instruction may be determined by the instruction
descriptions in Section 5. Instruction Descriptions, using Table 5-1 through
Table 5-12.

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Instruction Encoding
Opcode<19:16>
0000

0000

NOP

0001
BRA
CALL
GOTO
RCALL

0010

0011

CALL

0001

0100
GOTO

0101
RETLW

0110
RETFIE
RETURN

0111
RCALL

Opcode<23:20>

1001

1010

1011

REPEAT

1100
(1)

1101

1110

(1)

1111

BRA
(OA)

BRA
(OB)

BRA
(SA)

BRA(1)
(SB)

BRA
(GT)

BRA
(GE)

BRA
(GTU)

SUBBR
MOV

BRA
(OV)

BRA
(C)

BRA
(Z)

BRA
(N)

BRA
(LE)

BRA
(LT)

BRA
(LEU)

BRA

BRA (NOV)

BRA
(NC)

BRA
(NZ)

BRA
(NN)

0100

ADD

ADDC

0101

SUB

SUBB

0110

AND

XOR

0111

IOR

MOV

1000

MOV

1001

MOV

1010

BSET

BCLR

BTG

BTST

BTSTS

BTST

BTSS

BTSC

BSET

BCLR

BTG

BTST

BTSTS

BSW

BTSS

BTSC

1011

ADD
ADDC

SUB
SUBB

AND
XOR

IOR
MOV

ADD
ADDC

SUB
SUBB

AND
XOR

IOR
MOV

MUL.US
MUL.UU

MUL.SS
MUL.SU

TBLRDH
TBLRDL

TBLWTH
TBLWTL

MUL

SUB
SUBB

MOV.D

MOV

MOVSAC(1)

SFTAC(1)

ADD(1)

LAC(1)

ADD(1)
NEG(1)
SUB(1)

SAC(1)

SAC.R(1)

FF1L
FF1R

1100

MAC(1)
MPY(1)
MPY.N(1)
MSC(1)

CLRAC(1)

MAC(1)
MPY(1)
MPY.N(1)
MSC(1)

ASR
LSR

RLC
RLNC

RRC
RRNC

ASR
LSR

RLC
RLNC

RRC
RRNC

DIV.S
DIV.U

DIVF(1)

ASR
LSR

FBCL

1110

CP0

CP
CPB

CP0

CP
CPB

CPBGT(2)
CPBLT(2)
CPSGT
CPSLT

CPBEQ(2)
CPBNE(2)
CPSEQ
CPSNE

INC
INC2

DEC
DEC2

COM
NEG

CLR
SETM

INC
INC2

DEC
DEC2

COM
NEG

CLR
SETM

PUSH

POP

LNK
ULNK

SE
ZE

DISI

DAW
EXCH
SWAP

CLRWDT
MOVPAG(2)
PWRSAV
POP.S
PUSH.S
RESET

NOPR

DS70157E-page 443

1:
2:

ED(1)
EDAC(1)
MAC(1)
MPY(1)

This instruction is only available in dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, and dsPIC33E family devices.
This instruction is only available in PIC24E and dsPIC33E family devices.

Section 6. Reference

1101

1111

Note

(1)

SUBR

0010
0011

1000

Reference

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Table 6-1:

INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY TABLE

The complete 16-bit MCU and DSC device instruction set is summarized in Table 6-2. This table contains an alphabetized listing of the
instruction set. It includes instruction assembly syntax, description, size (in 24-bit words), execution time (in instruction cycles), affected
Status bits, and the page number in which the detailed description can be found. Table 1-2 identifies the symbols that are used in the
Instruction Set Summary Table.
Note:

Table 6-2:

The instruction cycle counts listed here are for PIC24F, PIC24H, dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices. Some instructions require
additional cycles in PIC24E and dsPIC33E devices. Refer to Section 3.3 and Section 5.4 for details.

Instruction Set Summary Table

Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands

Description

Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)

Page
Number

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

ADD

f {,WREG}

Destination = f + WREG

5-100

ADD

#lit10,Wn

Wn = lit10 + Wn

5-101

ADD

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb + lit5

5-102

ADD

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb + Ws

5-104

ADD

Acc(2)

Add accumulators

5-106

ADD

Ws,#Slit4,Acc

16-bit signed add to accumulator

5-107

ADDC

f {,WREG}

Destination = f + WREG + (C)

5-109

ADDC

#lit10,Wn

Wn = lit10 + Wn + (C)

5-110

ADDC

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb + lit5 + (C)

5-111

ADDC

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb + Ws + (C)

5-113

AND

f {,WREG}

Destination = f .AND. WREG

5-115

AND

#lit10,Wn

Wn = lit10 .AND. Wn

5-116

AND

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb .AND. lit5

5-117

AND

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb .AND. Ws

DS70157E-page 444

6.2

Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)

Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands

Description

Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)

Page
Number

Ws,#bit4

Bit clear Ws

5-128

BRA

Expr

Branch unconditionally

5-130

BRA

Computed branch

5-132

BRA

C,Expr

Branch if Carry

1 (2)

5-134

BRA

GE,Expr

Branch if greater than or equal

1 (2)

5-136

BRA

GEU,Expr

Branch if Carry

1 (2)

5-154

BRA

Z,Expr

Branch if Zero

1 (2)

5-155

BSET

f,#bit4

Bit set f

5-156

BSET

Ws,#bit4

Bit set Ws

5-157

BSW.C

Ws,Wb

Write C bit to Ws<Wb>

5-159

BSW.Z

Ws,Wb

Write Z bit to Ws<Wb>

5-159

BTG

f,#bit4

Bit toggle f

5-161

BTG

Ws,#bit4

Bit toggle Ws

5-162

Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

Section 6. Reference

DS70157E-page 445

BCLR

Reference

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Table 6-2:

Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)

Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands

Description

Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)

Page
Number

BTSC

f,#bit4

Bit test f, skip if clear

1
(2 or 3)

5-164

BTSC

Ws,#bit4

Bit test Ws, skip if clear

1
(2 or 3)

5-166

BTSS

f,#bit4

Bit test f, skip if set

1
(2 or 3)

5-168

BTSS

Ws,#bit4

Bit test Ws, skip if set

1
(2 or 3)

5-169

BTST

f,#bit4

Bit test f

5-171

BTST.C

Ws,#bit4

Bit test Ws to C

5-172

BTST.Z

Ws,#bit4

Bit test Ws to Z

5-172

BTST.C

Ws,Wb

Bit test Ws<Wb> to C

5-174

BTST.Z

Ws,Wb

Bit test Ws<Wb> to Z

5-174

BTSTS

f,#bit4

Bit test then set f

5-176

BTSTS.C Ws,#bit4

Bit test Ws to C then set

5-177

BTSTS.Z Ws,#bit4

Bit test Ws to Z then set

5-177

CALL

Expr

Call subroutine

5-179

CALL

Call indirect subroutine

5-183

CALL.L

Wn(3)

Call indirect subroutine (long address)

5-187

CLR

f = 0x0000

5-188

CLR

WREG

WREG = 0x0000

5-188

CLR

Wd = 0

5-189

CLR

Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB(2)

Clear accumulator

5-190

Clear Watchdog Timer

5-192

CLRWDT

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

COM

f {,WREG}

Destination = f

5-193

COM

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws

5-194

Compare (f WREG)

5-196

Wb,#lit5

Compare (Wb lit5)

5-197

Wb,#lit8

Compare (Wb lit8)

5-198

Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

DS70157E-page 446

Table 6-2:

Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)

Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands

Description

Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)

Page
Number

Wb,Ws

Compare (Wb Ws)

5-199

CP0

Compare (f 0x0000)

5-200

CP0

Compare (Ws 0x0000)

1
(5)

5-212

CPSEQ

Wb, Wn

Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if =

1
(2 or 3)

5-213

CPSGT

Wb, Wn

Signed Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if >

1
(2 or 3)

5-217

CPSLT

Wb, Wn

Signed Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if <

1
(2 or 3)

5-218

CPSNE

Wb, Wn

Signed Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if

1
(2 or 3)

5-220

DAW.B

Wn = decimal adjust Wn

5-222

DEC

f {,WREG}

Destination = f 1

5-223

DEC

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws 1

5-224

DEC2

f {,WREG}

Destination = f 2

5-226

DEC2

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws 2

5-227

DISI

#lit14

Disable interrupts for lit14 instruction cycles

5-228

DIV.S

Wm, Wn

Signed 16/16-bit integer divide

5-229

DIV.SD

Wm, Wn

Signed 32/16-bit integer divide

5-229

Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

Section 6. Reference

DS70157E-page 447

CPBEQ

Expr(3)

Reference

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Table 6-2:

Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)

Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands

Description

Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)

Page
Number

DIV.U

Wm, Wn

Unsigned 16/16-bit integer divide

5-231

DIV.UD

Wm, Wn

Unsigned 32/16-bit integer divide

5-231

DIVF

Wm, Wn(2)

Signed 16/16-bit fractional divide

5-233

#lit14,

Expr(6)

Do code to PC + Expr, (lit14 + 1) times

5-235

#lit15, Expr(4)

Do code to PC + Expr, (lit15 + 1) times

5-237

Wn, Expr(2)

Do code to PC + Expr, (Wn + 1) times

5-239

Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd(2)

Euclidean distance (no accumulate)

5-243

EDAC

Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd(2)

Euclidean distance

5-245

EXCH

Wns,Wnd

Swap Wns and Wnd

5-247

FBCL

Ws,Wnd

Find bit change from left (MSb) side

5-248

FF1L

Ws,Wnd

Find first one from left (MSb) side

5-250

FF1R

Ws,Wnd

Find first one from right (LSb) side

5-252

GOTO

Expr

Go to address

5-254

GOTO

Go to address indirectly

5-255

GOTO.L

Wn(3)

Go to address indirectly (long address)

5-257

INC

f {,WREG}

Destination = f + 1

5-258

INC

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws + 1

5-259

INC2

f {,WREG}

Destination = f + 2

5-260

INC2

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws + 2

5-261

IOR

f {,WREG}

Destination = f .IOR. WREG

5-262

IOR

#lit10,Wn

Wn = lit10 .IOR. Wn

5-263

IOR

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb .IOR. lit5

5-264

IOR

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb .IOR. Ws

5-266

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

LAC

Ws,#Slit4, Acc

Load accumulator

5-268

LNK

#lit14

Link Frame Pointer

5-270

LSR

f {,WREG}

Destination = logical right shift f

5-272

LSR

Ws,Wd

Wd = logical right shift Ws

5-274

Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

(2)

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

DS70157E-page 448

Table 6-2:

Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)

Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands

Description

Page
Number

5-276

Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)

LSR

Wb,#lit4,Wnd

Wnd = logical right shift Wb by lit4

LSR

Wb,Wns,Wnd

Wnd = logical right shift Wb by Wns

5-277

MAC

Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB(2) Multiply and accumulate

5-278

MAC

(2)

Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd

Square and accumulate

5-280

MOV

f {,WREG}

Move f to destination

5-282

MOV

WREG,f

Move WREG to f

5-283

MOV

f,Wnd

Move f to Wnd

5-284

MOV

Wns,f

Move Wns to f

5-294

MOVPAG

#lit8,TBLPAG(3)

Move 8-bit literal to TBLPAG

5-294

(2)

MOVSAC

Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB

Move [Wx] to Wxd, and [Wy] to Wyd

5-296

MPY

Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd(2)

Multiply Wn by Wm to accumulator

5-298

MPY

Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd(2)

Square to accumulator

5-300

DS70157E-page 449

MPY.N

Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd

5-302

MSC

Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB(2) Multiply and subtract from accumulator

5-304

MUL

W3:W2 = f * WREG

5-306

MUL.SS

Wb,Ws,Wnd

{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)

5-307

MUL.SS

Wb,Ws,Acc(4)

Accumulator = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)

5-309

MUL.SU

Wb,#lit5,Wnd

{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)

5-310

MUL.SU

Wb,Ws,Wnd

{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)

5-312

Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

-(Multiply Wn by Wm) to accumulator

Section 6. Reference

(2)

Reference

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Table 6-2:

Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)

Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands

MUL.SU

Wb,Ws,Acc(4)
(4)

Description

Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)

Page
Number

Accumulator = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)

5-314
5-315

MUL.SU

Wb,#lit5,Acc

Accumulator = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)

MUL.US

Wb,Ws,Wnd

{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)

5-316

MUL.US

Wb,Ws,Acc(4)

Accumulator = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)

5-318

MUL.UU

Wb,#lit5,Wnd

{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)

5-319

MUL.UU

Wb,Ws,Wnd

{Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)

5-320

5-322

(4)

MUL.UU

Wb,Ws,Acc

Accumulator = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)

MUL.UU

Wb,#lit5,Acc(4)

Accumulator = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)

5-323

MULW.SS Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)

Wnd = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws)

5-324

MULW.SU Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)

Wnd = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)

5-326

MULW.SU Wb,#lit5,Wnd(3)

Wnd = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)

5-328

MULW.US Wb,Ws,Wnd(3)

Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws)

5-329

MULW.UU Wb,Ws,Wnd

Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws)

5-331

MULW.UU Wb,#lit5,Wnd(3)

Wnd = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5)

5-332

NEG

f {,WREG}

Destination = f + 1

5-333

NEG

Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws + 1

5-334

(3)

Negate accumulator

5-335

NOP

No operation

5-336

NOPR

No operation

5-337

POP TOS to f

5-338

POP

POP TOS to Wd

5-339

POP.D

Wnd

POP double from TOS to Wnd:Wnd + 1

5-340

NEG

POP

(2)

Acc

POP shadow registers

5-341

PUSH f to TOS

5-342

PUSH

PUSH Ws to TOS

5-343

PUSH.D

Wns

PUSH double Wns:Wns + 1 to TOS

5-345

PUSH shadow registers

5-346

Enter Power-saving mode

5-347

POP.S
PUSH
2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

PUSH.S
PWRSAV
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

#lit1

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

DS70157E-page 450

Table 6-2:

Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)

Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands

Description

Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)

Page
Number

RCALL

Expr

Relative call

5-348

RCALL

Computed call

5-352

REPEAT

(5)

#lit14

Repeat next instruction (lit14 + 1) times

5-356

REPEAT

#lit15(3)

Repeat next instruction (lit15 + 1) times

5-358

REPEAT

Repeat next instruction (Wn + 1) times

5-360

RESET

Software device Reset

5-364

RETFIE

Return from interrupt enable

RRNC

Ws,Wd

Wd = rotate right (no Carry) Ws

5-385

SAC

Acc,#Slit4,Wd(2)

Store accumulator

5-387

SAC.R

Acc,#Slit4,Wd(2)

Store rounded Accumulator

5-389

Ws,Wd

Wd = sign-extended Ws

5-391

SETM

f = 0xFFFF

5-392

SETM

WREG

WREG = 0xFFFF

5-392

SETM

Ws = 0xFFFF

5-393

SFTAC

Acc,#Slit6(2)

Arithmetic shift accumulator by Slit6

5-394

SFTAC

Acc,Wb(2)

Arithmetic shift accumulator by (Wb)

5-395

f {,WREG}

Destination = arithmetic left shift f

5-396

Ws,Wd

Wd = arithmetic left shift Ws

5-397

RLC

DS70157E-page 451

Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

Section 6. Reference

Return with lit10 in Wn

RETURN

Reference

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Table 6-2:

Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)

Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands

Description

Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)

Page
Number
5-399

Wb,#lit4,Wnd

Wnd = left shift Wb by lit4

Wb,Wns,Wnd

Wnd = left shift Wb by Wns

5-400

SUB

f {,WREG}

Destination = f WREG

5-401

SUB

#lit10,Wn

Wn = Wn lit10

5-402

SUB

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb lit5

5-403

SUB

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb Ws

5-404

SUB

Acc(2)

Subtract accumulators

5-406

SUBB

f {,WREG}

destination = f WREG (C)

5-407

SUBB

#lit10,Wn

Wn = Wn lit10 (C)

5-408

SUBB

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb lit5 (C)

5-409

SUBB

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb Ws (C)

5-411

SUBBR

f {,WREG}

Destination = WREG f (C)

5-413

SUBBR

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = lit5 Wb (C)

5-414

SUBBR

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Ws Wb (C)

5-416

SUBR

f {,WREG}

Destination = WREG f

5-418

SUBR

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = lit5 Wb

5-419

SUBR

Wb,Ws,Wd

5-433

ULNK
2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

XOR
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

f {,WREG}

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

DS70157E-page 452

Table 6-2:

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Table 6-2:

Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)

Assembly Syntax
Mnemonic, Operands

Description

Words Cycles OA(2) OB(2) SA(1,2) SB(1,2) OAB(2) SAB(1,2)

Page
Number

XOR

#lit10,Wn

Wn = lit10 .XOR. Wn

5-434

XOR

Wb,#lit5,Wd

Wd = Wb .XOR. lit5

5-435

XOR

Wb,Ws,Wd

Wd = Wb .XOR. Ws

5-437

Ws,Wnd

Wnd = zero-extended Ws

5-439

Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

Section 6. Reference

DS70157E-page 453

Reference

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

6.3

REVISION HISTORY
Revision A
This is the initial release of this document.

Revision B
This revision incorporates all known errata at the time of this document update.

Revision C (February 2008)

This revision includes the following corrections and updates:
Instruction Updates:
- Updated BRA Instruction (see BRA)
- Updated DIVF Instruction (see DIVF)
- Updated DO Instruction (see DO)
- Updated SUB instruction (see SUB)

Revision D (November 2009)

This revision includes the following corrections and updates:
Document renamed from dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual to 16-bit MCU
and DSC Programmers Reference Manual
Document has been completely redesigned to accommodate all current 16-bit families:
dsPIC30F, dsPIC33F, PIC24F and PIC24H

Revision E (June 2010)

This revision includes the following corrections and updates:
Information specific to dsPIC33E and PIC24E devices has been added throughout the
document

DS70157E-page 454

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 6. Reference

NOTES:

Reference

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 455

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

INDEX
A
Accumulator A, Accumulator B ........................................... 18
Accumulator Access............................................................ 84
Accumulator Selection ........................................................ 98
Accumulator Usage............................................................. 83
Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register ................. 95
Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register ........................ 95
Assigned Working Register Usage ..................................... 78

B
Byte Operations .................................................................. 64

C
Code Examples
Z Status bit Operation for 32-bit Addition .................. 77
Base MAC Syntax ....................................................... 86
File Register Addressing ............................................. 53
File Register Addressing and WREG.......................... 53
Frame Pointer Usage .................................................. 73
Illegal Word Move Operations..................................... 68
Immediate Addressing ................................................ 59
Indirect Addressing with Effective Address Update .... 55
Indirect Addressing with Register Offset ..................... 56
Legal Word Move Operations ..................................... 67
MAC Accumulator WB Syntax .................................... 88
MAC Prefetch Syntax.................................................. 87
Move with Literal Offset Instructions ........................... 56
MSC Instruction with Two Prefetches and Accumulator
Write Back........................................................... 88
Normalizing with FBCL ............................................... 92
Register Direct Addressing ......................................... 54
Sample Byte Math Operations .................................... 65
Sample Byte Move Operations ................................... 64
Scaling with FBCL....................................................... 91
Stack Pointer Usage ................................................... 71
Unsigned f and WREG Multiply (Legacy MULWF Instruction) ..................................................................... 80
Using 10-bit Literals for Byte Operands ...................... 69
Using the Default Working Register WREG................ 79
Conditional Branch Instructions .......................................... 76
Core Control Register ......................................................... 22

D
Data Addressing Mode Tree ............................................... 59
Data Addressing Modes...................................................... 52
DCOUNT Register .............................................................. 19
Default Working Register (WREG)................................ 17, 79
Development Support ........................................................... 6
DOEND Register................................................................. 20
DOSTART Register............................................................. 19
DSP Accumulator Instructions ............................................ 89
DSP Data Formats .............................................................. 81
DSP MAC Indirect Addressing Modes ................................ 57
DSP MAC Instructions ........................................................ 85
dsPIC30F/33F Overview ..................................................... 10

F
File Register Addressing ..................................................... 52

I
Immediate Addressing ........................................................ 58
Operands in the Instruction Set .................................. 58

DS70157E-page 456

Implied DSP Operands ....................................................... 78

Implied Frame and Stack Pointer ....................................... 78
Instruction Bit Map ............................................................ 442
Instruction Description Example ......................................... 99
Instruction Descriptions .................................................... 100
ADD (16-bit Signed Add to Accumulator) ................. 107
ADD (Add Accumulators).......................................... 106
ADD (Add f to WREG) .............................................. 100
ADD (Add Literal to Wn) ........................................... 101
ADD (Add Wb to Short Literal).................................. 102
ADD (Add Wb to Ws)................................................ 104
ADDC (Add f to WREG with Carry) .......................... 109
ADDC (Add Literal to Wn with Carry) ....................... 110
ADDC (Add Wb to Short Literal with Carry).............. 111
ADDC (Add Wb to Ws with Carry) ............................ 113
AND (AND f and WREG) .......................................... 115
AND (AND Literal and Wn) ....................................... 116
AND (AND Wb and Short Literal) ............................. 117
AND (AND Wb and Ws)............................................ 118
ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right by Short Literal) ............ 124
ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right by Wns) ........................ 125
ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right f) ................................... 120
ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right Ws) ............................... 122
BCLR (Bit Clear in Ws) ............................................. 128
BCLR.B (Bit Clear f).................................................. 127
BRA (Branch Unconditionally) .................................. 130
BRA (Computed Branch) .................................. 132, 133
BRA C (Branch if Carry) ........................................... 134
BRA GE (Branch if Signed Greater Than or Equal).. 136
BRA GEU (Branch if Unsigned Greater Than or Equal)138
BRA GT (Branch if Signed Greater Than) ................ 139
BRA GTU (Branch if Unsigned Greater Than).......... 140
BRA LE (Branch if Signed Less Than or Equal) ....... 141
BRA LEU (Branch if Unsigned Less Than or Equal) 142
BRA LT (Branch if Signed Less Than)...................... 143
BRA LTU (Branch if Not Carry)................................. 146
BRA LTU (Branch if Unsigned Less Than) ............... 144
BRA N (Branch if Negative) ...................................... 145
BRA NN (Branch if Not Negative)............................. 147
BRA NOV (Branch if Not Overflow) .......................... 148
BRA NZ (Branch if Not Zero) .................................... 149
BRA OA (Branch if Overflow Accumulator A) ........... 150
BRA OB (Branch if Overflow Accumulator B) ........... 151
BRA OV (Branch if Overflow) ................................... 152
BRA SA (Branch if Saturation Accumulator A) ......... 153
BRA SB (Branch if Saturation Accumulator B) ......... 154
BRA Z (Branch if Zero) ............................................. 155
BSET (Bit Set f) ........................................................ 156
BSET (Bit Set in Ws) ................................................ 157
BSW (Bit Write in Ws)............................................... 159
BTG (Bit Toggle f)..................................................... 161
BTG (Bit Toggle in Ws)............................................. 162
BTSC (Bit Test f, Skip if Clear) ................................. 164
BTSC (Bit Test Ws, Skip if Clear) ............................. 166
BTSS (Bit Test f, Skip if Set)..................................... 168
BTSS (Bit Test Ws, Skip if Set) ................................ 169
BTST (Bit Test f) ....................................................... 171
BTST (Bit Test in Ws) ....................................... 172, 174
BTSTS (Bit Test/Set f) .............................................. 176
BTSTS (Bit Test/Set in Ws) ...................................... 177
CALL (Call Indirect Subroutine) ........................ 183, 185
CALL (Call Subroutine)..................................... 179, 181
CALL.L (Call Indirect Subroutine Long) .................... 187
CBSLT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Less
Than) ................................................................ 211

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Index

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

MOV (Move f to Destination) .................................... 282

MOV (Move f to Wnd) ............................................... 284
MOV (Move Wns to [Wd with offset]) ....................... 289
MOV (Move Wns to f) ............................................... 285
MOV (Move WREG to f) ........................................... 283
MOV (Move Ws to Wd)............................................. 290
MOV (Move Ws with offset to Wnd) ......................... 288
MOV.B (Move 8-bit Literal to Wnd)........................... 286
MOV.D (Double-Word Move from Source to Wnd) .. 292
MOVPAG (Move Literal to Page Register) ............... 294
MOVPAG (Move Ws to Page Register).................... 295
MOVSAC (Prefetch Operands and Store Accumulator)296
MPY (Multiply Wm by Wn to Accumulator)............... 298
MPY (Square to Accumulator) .................................. 300
MPY.N (Multiply -Wm by Wn to Accumulator) .......... 302
MSC (Multiply and Subtract from Accumulator) ....... 304
MUL (Integer Unsigned Multiply f and WREG) ......... 306
MUL.SS (Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply with Accumulator Destination) ................................................. 309
MUL.SS (Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply) ............ 307
MUL.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply with
Accumulator Destination) ................................. 314
MUL.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply)312
MUL.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal
Multiply with Accumulator Destination)............. 315
MUL.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal
Multiply) ............................................................ 310
MUL.US (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply with
Accumulator Destination) ................................. 318
MUL.US (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed Multiply)316
MUL.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply with Accumulator Destination) ......................................... 322
MUL.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply) ........ 320
MUL.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply
with Accumulator Destination) .......................... 323
MUL.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply)
319
MULW.SS (Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply with 16-bit
Result) .............................................................. 324
MULW.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply
with 16-bit Result)............................................. 326
MULW.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply with 16-bit Result)............................ 328
MULW.US (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed Multiply
with 16-bit Result)............................................. 329
MULW.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply with 16-bit
Result) .............................................................. 331
MULW.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply with 16-bit Result) ....................................... 332
NEG (Negate Accumulator) ...................................... 335
NEG (Negate f) ......................................................... 333
NEG (Negate Ws)..................................................... 334
NOP (No Operation) ................................................. 336
NOPR (No Operation) .............................................. 337
POP (Pop TOS to f).................................................. 338
POP (Pop TOS to Wd) ............................................. 339
POP.D (Double Pop TOS to Wnd/
Wnd+1) ............................................................. 340
POP.S (Pop Shadow Registers)............................... 341
PUSH (Push f to TOS).............................................. 342
PUSH (Push Ws to TOS) ......................................... 343
PUSH.D (Double Push Wns/
Wns+1 to TOS)................................................. 345
PUSH.S (Push Shadow Registers) .......................... 346
PWRSAV (Enter Power Saving Mode) ..................... 347
RCALL (Computed Relative Call) ..................... 352, 354
RCALL (Relative Call) ...................................... 348, 350

DS70157E-page 457

Index

CLR (Clear Accumulator, Prefetch Operands).......... 190

CLR (Clear f or WREG) ............................................ 188
CLR (Clear Wd) ........................................................ 189
CLRWDT (Clear Watchdog Timer) ........................... 192
COM (Complement f)................................................ 193
COM (Complement Ws)............................................ 194
CP (Compare f with WREG, Set Status Flags)......... 196
CP (Compare Wb with lit5, Set Status Flags) ........... 197
CP (Compare Wb with lit8, Set Status Flags) ........... 198
CP (Compare Wb with Ws, Set Status Flags) .......... 199
CP0 (Compare f with 0x0, Set Status Flags) ............ 200
CP0 (Compare Ws with 0x0, Set Status Flags) ........ 201
CPB (Compare f with WREG using Borrow, Set Status
Flags) ................................................................ 202
CPB (Compare Wb with lit5 using Borrow, Set Status Flags)
203, .................................................................. 205
CPB (Compare Ws with Wb using Borrow, Set Status
Flags) ................................................................ 207
CPBEQ (Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Equal)..... 209
CPBGT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Greater
Than) ................................................................ 210
CPBNE (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Branch if Not
Equal) ............................................................... 212
CPSEQ (Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Equal) . 213, 214
CPSGT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Greater
Than) ........................................................ 216, 217
CPSLT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Less Than)
218, .................................................................. 219
CPSNE (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Not Equal)
220, .................................................................. 221
DAW.B (Decimal Adjust Wn) .................................... 222
DEC (Decrement f) ................................................... 223
DEC (Decrement Ws) ............................................... 224
DEC2 (Decrement f by 2).......................................... 226
DEC2 (Decrement Ws by 2) ..................................... 227
DISI (Disable Interrupts Temporarily) ....................... 228
DIV.S (Signed Integer Divide)................................... 229
DIV.U (Unsigned Integer Divide)............................... 231
DIVF (Fractional Divide)............................................ 233
DO (Initialize Hardware Loop Literal)................ 235, 237
DO (Initialize Hardware Loop Wn) .................... 239, 241
ED (Euclidean Distance, No Accumulate) ................ 243
EDAC (Euclidean Distance)...................................... 245
EXCH (Exchange Wns and Wnd) ............................. 247
FBCL (Find First Bit Change from Left) .................... 248
FF1L (Find First One from Left) ................................ 250
FF1R (Find First One from Right) ............................. 252
GOTO (Unconditional Indirect Jump)................ 255, 256
GOTO (Unconditional Jump) .................................... 254
GOTO.L (Unconditional Indirect Jump Long)............ 257
INC (Increment f) ...................................................... 258
INC (Increment Ws) .................................................. 259
INC2 (Increment f by 2)............................................. 260
INC2 (Increment Ws by 2) ........................................ 261
IOR (Inclusive OR f and WREG)............................... 262
IOR (Inclusive OR Literal and Wn)............................ 263
IOR (Inclusive OR Wb and Short Literal) .................. 264
IOR (Inclusive OR Wb and Ws) ................................ 266
LAC (Load Accumulator)........................................... 268
LNK (Allocate Stack Frame) ............................. 270, 271
LSR (Logical Shift Right by Short Literal) ................. 276
LSR (Logical Shift Right by Wns).............................. 277
LSR (Logical Shift Right f)......................................... 272
LSR (Logical Shift Right Ws) .................................... 274
MAC (Multiply and Accumulate)................................ 278
MAC (Square and Accumulate) ................................ 280
MOV (Move 16-bit Literal to Wn) .............................. 287

16-bit MCU and DSC Programmers Reference Manual

REPEAT (Repeat Next Instruction lit14 + 1 Times). 356
REPEAT (Repeat Next Instruction lit15 + 1 Times). 358
REPEAT (Repeat Next Instruction Wn + 1 Times)360, 362
RESET (Reset) ......................................................... 364
RETFIE (Return from Interrupt) ........................ 366, 367
RETLW (Return with Literal in Wn) ................... 368, 370
RETURN (Return) ............................................. 372, 373
RLC (Rotate Left f through Carry) ............................. 374
RLC (Rotate Left Ws through Carry)......................... 376
RLNC (Rotate Left f without Carry) ........................... 378
RLNC (Rotate Left Ws without Carry) ....................... 379
RRC (Rotate Right f through Carry) .......................... 381
RRC (Rotate Right Ws through Carry)...................... 382
RRNC (Rotate Right f without Carry) ........................ 384
RRNC (Rotate Right Ws without Carry) .................... 385
SAC (Store Accumulator).......................................... 387
SAC.R (Store Rounded Accumulator) ...................... 389
SE (Sign-Extend Ws) ................................................ 391
SETM (Set f or WREG) ............................................. 392
SETM (Set Ws) ......................................................... 393
SFTAC (Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Slit5) ......... 394
SFTAC (Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Wb)........... 395
SL (Shift Left by Short Literal) ................................... 399
SL (Shift Left by Wns) ............................................... 400
SL (Shift Left f) .......................................................... 396
SL (Shift Left Ws) ...................................................... 397
SUB (Subtract Accumulators) ................................... 406
SUB (Subtract Literal from Wn) ................................ 402
SUB (Subtract Short Literal from Wb) ....................... 403
SUB (Subtract WREG from f) ................................... 401
SUB (Subtract Ws from Wb) ..................................... 404
SUBB (Subtract Short Literal from Wb with Borrow). 409
SUBB (Subtract Wn from Literal with Borrow) .......... 408
SUBB (Subtract WREG and Carry bit from f) ........... 407
SUBB (Subtract Ws from Wb with Borrow) ............... 411
SUBBR (Subtract f from WREG with Borrow)........... 413
SUBBR (Subtract Wb from Short Literal with Borrow)414
SUBBR (Subtract Wb from Ws with Borrow) ............ 416
SUBR (Subtract f from WREG) ................................. 418
SUBR (Subtract Wb from Short Literal) .................... 419
SUBR (Subtract Wb from Ws) .................................. 420
SWAP (Byte or Nibble Swap Wn) ............................. 422
TBLRDH (Table Read High) ..................................... 423
TBLRDL (Table Read Low)....................................... 425
TBLWTH (Table Write High) ..................................... 427
TBLWTL (Table Write Low) ...................................... 429
ULNK (De-allocate Stack Frame) ..................... 431, 432
XOR (Exclusive OR f and WREG) ............................ 433
XOR (Exclusive OR Literal and Wn) ......................... 434
XOR (Exclusive OR Wb and Short Literal) ............... 435
XOR (Exclusive OR Wb and Ws).............................. 437
ZE (Zero-Extend Wn) ................................................ 439
Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction............ 94
Instruction Set Overview ..................................................... 38
Bit Instructions ............................................................ 45
Compare/Skip Instructions .......................................... 46
Control Instructions ..................................................... 49
DSP Instructions ......................................................... 49
dsPIC30F/33F Instruction Groups .............................. 38
Logic Instructions ........................................................ 43
Math Instructions......................................................... 41
Move Instructions ........................................................ 40
Program Flow Instructions .......................................... 47
Rotate/Shift Instructions .............................................. 44
Shadow/Stack Instructions.......................................... 49
Instruction Set Summary Table......................................... 444
Instruction Set Symbols ........................................................ 8

DS70157E-page 458

(text).............................................................................. 8
[text] .............................................................................. 8
{ } .................................................................................. 8
{label:}........................................................................... 8
#text .............................................................................. 8
<n:m>............................................................................ 8
Acc................................................................................ 8
AWB.............................................................................. 8
bit4 ................................................................................ 8
Expr .............................................................................. 8
f..................................................................................... 8
lit1 ................................................................................. 8
lit10 ............................................................................... 8
lit14 ............................................................................... 8
lit16 ............................................................................... 8
lit23 ............................................................................... 8
lit4 ................................................................................. 8
lit5 ................................................................................. 8
lit8 ................................................................................. 8
Slit10............................................................................. 8
Slit16............................................................................. 8
Slit4............................................................................... 8
Slit5............................................................................... 8
TOS .............................................................................. 8
Wb ................................................................................ 8
Wd ................................................................................ 8
Wm, Wn ........................................................................ 8
Wm*Wm........................................................................ 8
Wm*Wn......................................................................... 8
Wn ................................................................................ 8
Wnd .............................................................................. 8
Wns............................................................................... 8
WREG........................................................................... 8
Ws................................................................................. 8
Wx................................................................................. 8
Wxd............................................................................... 8
Wy................................................................................. 8
Wyd............................................................................... 8
Instruction Stalls ................................................................. 62
DO/REPEAT Loops .................................................... 63
Exceptions .................................................................. 63
Instructions that Change Program Flow ..................... 63
PSV............................................................................. 63
RAW Dependency Detection ...................................... 62
Instruction Symbols ............................................................ 94
Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply. 328
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply with 16-bit Result ............................................................................ 332
Integer and Fractional Data ................................................ 81
Representation ........................................................... 82
Interrupt Priority Level......................................................... 21
Introduction ........................................................................... 6

M
MAC
Operations .................................................................. 86
Prefetch Register Updates.......................................... 85
Prefetches................................................................... 85
Syntax......................................................................... 86
Write Back .................................................................. 86
MAC Accumulator Write Back Selection............................. 97
MAC or MPY Source Operands (Different Working Register)97
MAC or MPY Source Operands (Same Working Register) 97
Manual Objective .................................................................. 6
Modulo and Bit-Reversed Addressing Modes .................... 57
MOPAG Destination Selection............................................ 97
Multi-Cycle Instructions....................................................... 39

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Index
Multi-Word Instructions ....................................................... 39

X Data Space Prefetch Destination .................................... 96

X Data Space Prefetch Operation ...................................... 96

Normalizing the Accumulator with the FBCL Instruction ..... 92

O
Offset Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register (with Register Offset) ................................................................. 95
Offset Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register (with Register
Offset) ......................................................................... 95

Y
Y Data Space Prefetch Destination .................................... 97
Y Data Space Prefetch Operation ...................................... 96

Z
Z Status Bit ......................................................................... 77

Index

PIC Microcontroller Compatibility ..................................... 79

PRODH
PRODL Register Pair.................................................. 79
Program Addressing Modes ............................................... 61
Methods of Modifying Flow ......................................... 61
Program Counter ................................................................ 18
Programmers Model........................................................... 13
Register Descriptions.................................................. 17
PSVPAG Register ............................................................... 19

R
RCOUNT Register .............................................................. 19
Register Direct Addressing ................................................. 53
Register Indirect Addressing ............................................... 54
Modes ......................................................................... 54
Register Indirect Addressing and the Instruction Set .......... 57
Registers
CORCON (Core Control) ...................................... 31, 34
CORCON (Core Control) Register........................ 30, 32
SR (CPU Status)................................................... 25, 28
SR (Status) Register ................................................... 26

S
Scaling Data with the FBCL Instruction .............................. 90
Scaling Examples ....................................................... 90
Shadow Registers ............................................................... 23
Automatic Usage......................................................... 23
Software Stack Frame Pointer ...................................... 18, 72
Example ...................................................................... 73
Overflow...................................................................... 74
Underflow.................................................................... 74
Software Stack Pointer ................................................. 18, 70
Example ...................................................................... 71
Stack Pointer Limit Register (SPLIM) ................................. 18
Status Register ................................................................... 20
DSP ALU Status Bits .................................................. 21
Loop Status Bits.......................................................... 20
MCU ALU Status Bits.................................................. 20
Style and Symbol Conventions ............................................. 7
Document Conventions................................................. 7

T
TBLPAG Register ............................................................... 18

U
Using 10-bit Literal Operands ............................................. 69
10-bit Literal Coding.................................................... 69

W
Word Move Operations ....................................................... 66
Data Alignment in Memory.......................................... 66
Working Register Array ....................................................... 17

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

DS70157E-page 459

WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE

AMERICAS

ASIA/PACIFIC

EUROPE

Corporate Office
2355 West Chandler Blvd.
Chandler, AZ 85224-6199
Tel: 480-792-7200
Fax: 480-792-7277
Technical Support:
http://support.microchip.com
Web Address:
www.microchip.com

Asia Pacific Office

Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor
Tower 6, The Gateway
Harbour City, Kowloon
Hong Kong
Tel: 852-2401-1200
Fax: 852-2401-3431

India - Bangalore
Tel: 91-80-3090-4444
Fax: 91-80-3090-4123
India - New Delhi
Tel: 91-11-4160-8631
Fax: 91-11-4160-8632

Austria - Wels
Tel: 43-7242-2244-39
Fax: 43-7242-2244-393
Denmark - Copenhagen
Tel: 45-4450-2828
Fax: 45-4485-2829

India - Pune
Tel: 91-20-2566-1512
Fax: 91-20-2566-1513

France - Paris
Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20
Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79

Japan - Yokohama
Tel: 81-45-471- 6166
Fax: 81-45-471-6122

Germany - Munich
Tel: 49-89-627-144-0
Fax: 49-89-627-144-44

Atlanta
Duluth, GA
Tel: 678-957-9614
Fax: 678-957-1455
Boston
Westborough, MA
Tel: 774-760-0087
Fax: 774-760-0088
Chicago
Itasca, IL
Tel: 630-285-0071
Fax: 630-285-0075
Cleveland
Independence, OH
Tel: 216-447-0464
Fax: 216-447-0643
Dallas
Addison, TX
Tel: 972-818-7423
Fax: 972-818-2924
Detroit
Farmington Hills, MI
Tel: 248-538-2250
Fax: 248-538-2260
Kokomo
Kokomo, IN
Tel: 765-864-8360
Fax: 765-864-8387
Los Angeles
Mission Viejo, CA
Tel: 949-462-9523
Fax: 949-462-9608
Santa Clara
Santa Clara, CA
Tel: 408-961-6444
Fax: 408-961-6445
Toronto
Mississauga, Ontario,
Canada
Tel: 905-673-0699
Fax: 905-673-6509

Australia - Sydney
Tel: 61-2-9868-6733
Fax: 61-2-9868-6755
China - Beijing
Tel: 86-10-8528-2100
Fax: 86-10-8528-2104
China - Chengdu
Tel: 86-28-8665-5511
Fax: 86-28-8665-7889

Korea - Daegu
Tel: 82-53-744-4301
Fax: 82-53-744-4302

China - Chongqing
Tel: 86-23-8980-9588
Fax: 86-23-8980-9500

Korea - Seoul
Tel: 82-2-554-7200
Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or
82-2-558-5934

China - Hong Kong SAR

Tel: 852-2401-1200
Fax: 852-2401-3431

Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur

Tel: 60-3-6201-9857
Fax: 60-3-6201-9859

China - Nanjing
Tel: 86-25-8473-2460
Fax: 86-25-8473-2470

Malaysia - Penang
Tel: 60-4-227-8870
Fax: 60-4-227-4068

China - Qingdao
Tel: 86-532-8502-7355
Fax: 86-532-8502-7205

Philippines - Manila
Tel: 63-2-634-9065
Fax: 63-2-634-9069

China - Shanghai
Tel: 86-21-5407-5533
Fax: 86-21-5407-5066

Singapore
Tel: 65-6334-8870
Fax: 65-6334-8850

China - Shenyang
Tel: 86-24-2334-2829
Fax: 86-24-2334-2393

Taiwan - Hsin Chu

Tel: 886-3-6578-300
Fax: 886-3-6578-370

China - Shenzhen
Tel: 86-755-8203-2660
Fax: 86-755-8203-1760

Taiwan - Kaohsiung
Tel: 886-7-536-4818
Fax: 886-7-536-4803

China - Wuhan
Tel: 86-27-5980-5300
Fax: 86-27-5980-5118

Taiwan - Taipei
Tel: 886-2-2500-6610
Fax: 886-2-2508-0102

China - Xian
Tel: 86-29-8833-7252
Fax: 86-29-8833-7256

Thailand - Bangkok
Tel: 66-2-694-1351
Fax: 66-2-694-1350

Italy - Milan
Tel: 39-0331-742611
Fax: 39-0331-466781
Netherlands - Drunen
Tel: 31-416-690399
Fax: 31-416-690340
Spain - Madrid
Tel: 34-91-708-08-90
Fax: 34-91-708-08-91
UK - Wokingham
Tel: 44-118-921-5869
Fax: 44-118-921-5820

China - Xiamen
Tel: 86-592-2388138
Fax: 86-592-2388130
China - Zhuhai
Tel: 86-756-3210040
Fax: 86-756-3210049

01/05/10

DS70157E-page 460

2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Maplin Electronics 1983-09
No ratings yet
Maplin Electronics 1983-09
68 pages
Coding Club Level 3 Python Building Big Apps PDF
100% (1)
Coding Club Level 3 Python Building Big Apps PDF
134 pages
PICkit 3 Programmer Application User's Guide 50002158a
No ratings yet
PICkit 3 Programmer Application User's Guide 50002158a
88 pages
Using The Modbus Protocol Library in S7-200
No ratings yet
Using The Modbus Protocol Library in S7-200
18 pages
InCircuitSerialProgramming PDF
No ratings yet
InCircuitSerialProgramming PDF
244 pages
Model Building and Simulation of Thermoelectric Module Using Matlab-Simulink
100% (1)
Model Building and Simulation of Thermoelectric Module Using Matlab-Simulink
7 pages
How To Select A Peltier Module PDF
No ratings yet
How To Select A Peltier Module PDF
11 pages
Get Started With LabVIEW
100% (5)
Get Started With LabVIEW
16 pages
LV13 072023 en 202309201140578470
No ratings yet
LV13 072023 en 202309201140578470
120 pages
Chapter7. FET Biasing: JFET Biasing Configurations Fixed Biasing Self Biasing & Common Gate Voltage Divider
No ratings yet
Chapter7. FET Biasing: JFET Biasing Configurations Fixed Biasing Self Biasing & Common Gate Voltage Divider
42 pages
Labview Basic 1 Manual
No ratings yet
Labview Basic 1 Manual
476 pages
18 Sound 8 2 Ways v1 PDF
No ratings yet
18 Sound 8 2 Ways v1 PDF
16 pages
Microchip MPLAB® X IDE User's Guide
No ratings yet
Microchip MPLAB® X IDE User's Guide
226 pages
A LabVIEW Based Autonomous Airship Flight Controller
100% (1)
A LabVIEW Based Autonomous Airship Flight Controller
112 pages
LabView Tutorial
No ratings yet
LabView Tutorial
288 pages
L6 Week6 FET Biasing Chap7
No ratings yet
L6 Week6 FET Biasing Chap7
40 pages
10) User Datagram Protocol (UDP) New
No ratings yet
10) User Datagram Protocol (UDP) New
27 pages
Selecontrol® Mas: Tcp/Ip and Udp
No ratings yet
Selecontrol® Mas: Tcp/Ip and Udp
26 pages
Introduction Peltier
No ratings yet
Introduction Peltier
8 pages
Tutorial Citec
No ratings yet
Tutorial Citec
80 pages
Socket Programming With UDP and TCP
100% (1)
Socket Programming With UDP and TCP
19 pages
8051 Microcontroller
100% (3)
8051 Microcontroller
6 pages
1.6 TCP Header
No ratings yet
1.6 TCP Header
2 pages
Kongsberg Maritime - Process Simulation D-SPICE DCS
No ratings yet
Kongsberg Maritime - Process Simulation D-SPICE DCS
2 pages
Microprocessors and Interfacing
No ratings yet
Microprocessors and Interfacing
125 pages
Introduction of Peltier
No ratings yet
Introduction of Peltier
6 pages
Circuit BrakerCutler Hammer 4160 Breaker 69C3076
No ratings yet
Circuit BrakerCutler Hammer 4160 Breaker 69C3076
72 pages
Modbus Protocol UG
100% (1)
Modbus Protocol UG
33 pages
Using External Code in Labview
No ratings yet
Using External Code in Labview
302 pages
Modbus Protocol
100% (3)
Modbus Protocol
67 pages
LabVIEW Design Patterns
No ratings yet
LabVIEW Design Patterns
56 pages
JTAG Security
No ratings yet
JTAG Security
4 pages
Panasonic SC-PM18 Stereo System User Manual
No ratings yet
Panasonic SC-PM18 Stereo System User Manual
28 pages
PIC Microprocessor Circuit Design
100% (1)
PIC Microprocessor Circuit Design
308 pages
Introduction To Arduino
No ratings yet
Introduction To Arduino
60 pages
Lenze SMD Basic Manual
No ratings yet
Lenze SMD Basic Manual
38 pages
2C-ESP8266 SDK Programming Guide en v1.3.0
100% (2)
2C-ESP8266 SDK Programming Guide en v1.3.0
162 pages
Advanced View Pic Microcontroller Projects List 1652 - PIC Microcontroller
No ratings yet
Advanced View Pic Microcontroller Projects List 1652 - PIC Microcontroller
175 pages
Omron Cable c20
No ratings yet
Omron Cable c20
1 page
CC 1101
No ratings yet
CC 1101
103 pages
Mini Development Board: Users Guide
No ratings yet
Mini Development Board: Users Guide
44 pages
1757 Um007 - en P PDF
No ratings yet
1757 Um007 - en P PDF
160 pages
List of TCP and UDP Port Numbers
No ratings yet
List of TCP and UDP Port Numbers
52 pages
Fibox Enclosure 4.1 US Web
100% (1)
Fibox Enclosure 4.1 US Web
181 pages
ST7735
No ratings yet
ST7735
167 pages
UCM6xxx Basic Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
UCM6xxx Basic Configuration Guide
29 pages
Datasheet CS209A
No ratings yet
Datasheet CS209A
6 pages
8086 Microprocessor Architecture
No ratings yet
8086 Microprocessor Architecture
132 pages
Atmega 32 U 4
100% (1)
Atmega 32 U 4
26 pages
HC-SR04 Ultrasonic Sensor On An Atmel ATtiny13 at PDF
No ratings yet
HC-SR04 Ultrasonic Sensor On An Atmel ATtiny13 at PDF
8 pages
Z3 2 4
100% (1)
Z3 2 4
104 pages
Instrucciones
No ratings yet
Instrucciones
502 pages
16-Bit MCU and DSC Programmer's Reference Manual
No ratings yet
16-Bit MCU and DSC Programmer's Reference Manual
502 pages
DsPIC Programmers Reference 70157C
100% (1)
DsPIC Programmers Reference 70157C
364 pages
DsPIC30F Family Reference Manual
No ratings yet
DsPIC30F Family Reference Manual
772 pages
PIC18F Instruction Manual-2
No ratings yet
PIC18F Instruction Manual-2
1 page
PIM 814 Infosheet
100% (1)
PIM 814 Infosheet
8 pages
Pic 16 C 54 C
No ratings yet
Pic 16 C 54 C
5 pages
dsPIC Language Tools Libraries PDF
100% (3)
dsPIC Language Tools Libraries PDF
404 pages
Mplab XC16 C Compiler User's Guide: 2012-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. DS50002071C
No ratings yet
Mplab XC16 C Compiler User's Guide: 2012-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. DS50002071C
366 pages
PIC12F675
No ratings yet
PIC12F675
128 pages
Analytical Survey of Wearable Sensors (2012) - ART
No ratings yet
Analytical Survey of Wearable Sensors (2012) - ART
7 pages
Interfacing of USB Device With LabVIEW - THE PDF
100% (1)
Interfacing of USB Device With LabVIEW - THE PDF
106 pages
Analise de Requisitos (2006) - PPT
No ratings yet
Analise de Requisitos (2006) - PPT
13 pages
Seminar On CAN Bus Protocol (2015) - PPT
100% (4)
Seminar On CAN Bus Protocol (2015) - PPT
30 pages
SLBS - SI3000 VoiceBand Codec With Microphone-Speaker Drive
No ratings yet
SLBS - SI3000 VoiceBand Codec With Microphone-Speaker Drive
35 pages
A Real-Time Control Using Wireless Sensor Network For Intelligent Energy Management System in Buildings (2010) - ART
No ratings yet
A Real-Time Control Using Wireless Sensor Network For Intelligent Energy Management System in Buildings (2010) - ART
6 pages
A Framework For Use of Wireless Sensor Networks in Forest Fire Detection & Monitoring (2012) - ART
No ratings yet
A Framework For Use of Wireless Sensor Networks in Forest Fire Detection & Monitoring (2012) - ART
12 pages
Application Notes LGDP4535 Ver2.0
No ratings yet
Application Notes LGDP4535 Ver2.0
6 pages
Notas para Interfase Del Sensor DHT11 Al PIC
100% (1)
Notas para Interfase Del Sensor DHT11 Al PIC
66 pages
DS-2CD4A26FWD-IZ (H) (S) 2MP Low Light Smart Bullet LPR Camera
No ratings yet
DS-2CD4A26FWD-IZ (H) (S) 2MP Low Light Smart Bullet LPR Camera
4 pages
Bhaktivedanta_Vidyapitha_SB_Canto_10_Overview
No ratings yet
Bhaktivedanta_Vidyapitha_SB_Canto_10_Overview
208 pages
Vdocuments - MX Agri Chandlers 2011
No ratings yet
Vdocuments - MX Agri Chandlers 2011
14 pages
GE RR FET F136 Fact Sheet - Updated
No ratings yet
GE RR FET F136 Fact Sheet - Updated
2 pages
A Brief History of Linux
No ratings yet
A Brief History of Linux
4 pages
EasyEDA-Tutorials v6.3.53
No ratings yet
EasyEDA-Tutorials v6.3.53
256 pages
LIST OF Civil Engineers
No ratings yet
LIST OF Civil Engineers
1 page
CFBC Datasheets
100% (1)
CFBC Datasheets
5 pages
SST - Python Projects List (2022)
No ratings yet
SST - Python Projects List (2022)
11 pages
MASTER REV.3 Presentation - Edited
No ratings yet
MASTER REV.3 Presentation - Edited
91 pages
SMA 3261 - Lecture 4 - Numerical - Differentiation
No ratings yet
SMA 3261 - Lecture 4 - Numerical - Differentiation
10 pages
Erin Cunia: Career Objective
No ratings yet
Erin Cunia: Career Objective
4 pages
MG-60H Operation Manual
No ratings yet
MG-60H Operation Manual
94 pages
Built-In Power Supply Photoelectric Sensor
No ratings yet
Built-In Power Supply Photoelectric Sensor
16 pages
Tolerence Stackup Analysis
No ratings yet
Tolerence Stackup Analysis
10 pages
Final Presentation 2
No ratings yet
Final Presentation 2
19 pages
Hot Air Drying - Methods of Producing
No ratings yet
Hot Air Drying - Methods of Producing
14 pages
5L40E/5L50E: Technical Bulletin #873
No ratings yet
5L40E/5L50E: Technical Bulletin #873
2 pages
+2 English: Be Confident Model Public Exam - March 2023
No ratings yet
+2 English: Be Confident Model Public Exam - March 2023
19 pages
SUPP 1951 Brownie Scout Handbook
No ratings yet
SUPP 1951 Brownie Scout Handbook
4 pages
Verbal and Non-Verbal Strategies
No ratings yet
Verbal and Non-Verbal Strategies
2 pages
Homework Letter To Teacher
100% (1)
Homework Letter To Teacher
8 pages
E.O. No. 513
No ratings yet
E.O. No. 513
8 pages
OB2 Midterm (Part 3)
No ratings yet
OB2 Midterm (Part 3)
9 pages
Bio Ss3 1st Term Enote 2024-2025
No ratings yet
Bio Ss3 1st Term Enote 2024-2025
67 pages
TYBBA (IB) (Sem V)
No ratings yet
TYBBA (IB) (Sem V)
11 pages
402 Vocational IX - (OpenOffice) Answer Key PART B
100% (2)
402 Vocational IX - (OpenOffice) Answer Key PART B
31 pages
Full Olympic Cities City Agendas Planning and The World S Games 1896 2016 2nd Edition John R. Gold Ebook All Chapters
100% (3)
Full Olympic Cities City Agendas Planning and The World S Games 1896 2016 2nd Edition John R. Gold Ebook All Chapters
84 pages
Transparent Governance in An Age of Abundance
No ratings yet
Transparent Governance in An Age of Abundance
452 pages
Alto Elvis 15.2xla SM Ver1.0
100% (1)
Alto Elvis 15.2xla SM Ver1.0
22 pages